annex manager

Part No. 166-024-389 Rev. ADecember 1996

User Guide

Annex Manager

ents,ed toUserss.

t and

and

y the

al

000,ever,re

ive

y,d in

or

uanty).

Copyright © 1996 Bay Networks, Inc.

All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. December 1996.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statemconfigurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believbe accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in thidocument. The information in this document is proprietary to Bay Networks, Inc

The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreemenmay only be used in accordance with the terms of that license.

Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject torestrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical DataComputer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.

Notice for All Other Executive Agencies

Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to, or accompandelivery of, this computer software, the rights of the United States Governmentregarding its use, reproduction, and disclosure are as set forth in the CommerciComputer Software-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19.

Trademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.

Annex, Remote Annex, Annex Manager, Remote Annex 2000, Remote Annex 4Remote Annex 6100, Remote Annex 6300, Remote Annex 5390/Async, RemotAnnex 5391/CT1, Remote Annex 5393/PRI, BayStack Remote Annex 2000 SerQuick2Config, Bay Networks, Bay Networks Press, and the Bay Networks logo atrademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.

Third Party Trademarks

All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respectowners.

Statement of Conditions

In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliabilitBay Networks, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the products describethis document without notice.

Bay Networks, Inc. does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein.

In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursto a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure (that maincorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties

Contents

Preface

About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiDocumentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi

Introduction

Annex Manager Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiAnnex Manager Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvSystem Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviPlatforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviSun Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiHP Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiIBM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiSCO Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

Chapter 1Installing Annex Manager

Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Installing the Annex Manager Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Setting Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Working with SunNet Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Linking Annex Manager with SunNet Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Using SunNet Manager Discovery to Find Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Running Annex Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Chapter 2Window Basics

Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Mouse and Keyboard Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Using Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Controlling the Window Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Changing a Window’s Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Using Annex Manager Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Moving Windows and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Using Scroll Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Using the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Using Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Using Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Using List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Understanding Message and Output Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

iiiAnnex Manager User Guide

Contents

Chapter 3Working with Annex Manager Windows

Understanding Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Using Annex Manager Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Using Secondary Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Using the File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Understanding the Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Using the Cancel Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Using the Reset Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Understanding Warning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Using Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Displaying Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Understanding the Help Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Saving Help Window Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Changing Site Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Displaying the Site Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Understanding the Site Parameters Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Changing Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Chapter 4Using the Main Window

Using Setup and Customize Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Understanding the Main Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Using the Specification Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Verifying Annex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Using the Configuration Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Saving and Opening Annex Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Saving an Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Opening an Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Editing List Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Displaying SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Displaying the SNMP Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Understanding the SNMP Information Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Viewing and Updating SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Part 2 Setup Mode

Chapter 5Setup Mode Basics

Understanding Setup Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Displaying Setup Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Using the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Using the Setup Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Understanding Setup Window Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Using Confirmation Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Annex Manager User Guideiv

Contents

Chapter 6Selecting General Settings

Using the General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Using the General (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Selecting General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Chapter 7Setting Asynchronous Port Values

Selecting Async Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Understanding the Async Ports Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Using the Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Understanding the Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Understanding the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Selecting Async Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Chapter 8Setting ISDN Primary RateAnnex Values

Using the Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Understanding the Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Selecting Call Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Using the Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Understanding the Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Assigning Remote Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Using the T1/PRI Line Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Understanding the T1/PRI Line Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Setting the Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Chapter 9Editing Modem Definitions

Understanding the Edit Modem Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Creating and Changing Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Changing Definitions for Annexes with Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Changing Definitions for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Removing a Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Understanding the Modem Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Editing Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Creating New Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Editing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Chapter 10Setting Security Values

Understanding the Security Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Selecting Security Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

vAnnex Manager User Guide

Contents

Part 3 Customize Mode

Chapter 11Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT Windows

Using the AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Understanding the AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Changing AppleTalk Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Using the IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Understanding the IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Changing IP Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Using the IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Understanding the IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Selecting IPX Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Using the LAT Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8Understanding the LAT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Entering LAT Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Chapter 12Using and Creating Parameter Groups

Working with Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Creating Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Displaying the User Defined Parameter Groups Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Understanding the User Defined Parameter Groups Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Creating or Modifying a User Defined Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Chapter 13Viewing and Changing Parameters

Viewing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Displaying the Show Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Understanding the Show Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Viewing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Displaying the Set Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Understanding the Set Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Changing Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Identifying Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Understanding Warning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Understanding Output and Message Box Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Chapter 14Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts

Viewing Script Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Displaying the View Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Understanding the View Script Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Viewing a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Annex Manager User Guidevi

Contents

Creating New Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7Displaying the Create Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8Understanding the Create Script Window Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9Creating a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11Editing Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

Changing Parameter Values Using Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16Displaying the Execute Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16Understanding the Execute Script Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17Executing a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Identifying Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22Create Script Command Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22Execute Script Command Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Chapter 15Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values

Comparing Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Displaying the Compare Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Understanding the Compare Window Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3Selecting Annexes and Scripts for Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5Using Compare Window Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9Comparing Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Copying Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11Displaying the Copy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11Understanding the Copy Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12Copying Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16

Identifying Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19Compare Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19Copy Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20

Part 4 Control and Status Commands

Chapter 16Booting and Resetting Annexes

Booting Annexes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Displaying the Boot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Understanding the Boot Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3Booting Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Resetting Annex Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9Displaying the Reset Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Understanding the Reset Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11Resetting an Annex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14

Broadcasting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15Displaying the Broadcast Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16Understanding the Broadcast Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16Sending a Broadcast Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18

Configuring PRI Internal Modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19Understanding the Set PRI Internal Modems Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20

viiAnnex Manager User Guide

Contents

Changing Internal Modem Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22

Chapter 17Displaying Status Information

Displaying Annex Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Displaying the Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Understanding the Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5

Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5Understanding the Annex Async Port Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10

Displaying Interface Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14

Displaying PRI Channels Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15Understanding the Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19Viewing PRI Channels Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19

Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27

Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-34Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35

Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36Understanding the Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38Viewing T1 Modem Calls Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38

Displaying UDAS Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39Displaying the Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39Understanding the Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42Viewing UDAS Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42

Identifying Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43Discovering Annexes using a Search Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-48Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-49Using the Discover Annexes/Network Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-50

Annex Manager User Guideviii

Contents

Part 5 Reference Information

Chapter 18Annex Manager and SNMP

SNMP Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1SNMP Management Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2SNMP Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3Message Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3

Setting up the Annex for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Defining the Community String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Defining Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4

Standard MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5MIB Object Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Describing and Naming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Trap Hosts and Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8

Chapter 19Annex Parameters

Chapter 20Troubleshooting

ixAnnex Manager User Guide

Contents

Annex Manager User Guidex

Figures

Figure 1-1. Initialization Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Figure 2-1. Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Figure 2-2. List Box with Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Figure 2-3. Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Figure 2-4. Check Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Figure 2-5. Annex List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Figure 2-6. Set Window Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Figure 2-7. Compare Window Output Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Figure 3-1. File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Figure 3-2. Confirmation Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Figure 3-3. Overwrite Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Figure 3-4. Cancel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Figure 3-5. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Figure 3-6. Warning Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Figure 3-7. Window Item Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Figure 3-8. Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Figure 3-9. Save Output/Messages File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Figure 3-10. Site Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Figure 4-1. Main Window in Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Figure 4-2. Main Window in Customize Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Figure 4-3. Automatic Discovery Process Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Figure 4-4. Creating Annex LIst Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Figure 4-5. Main Window with Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Figure 4-6. Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Figure 4-7. Annex Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Figure 4-8. Main Window Configuration Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Figure 4-9. Save Annex List Selection Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Figure 4-10. Open Annex List Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Figure 4-11. SNMP Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Figure 5-1. Setup Mode Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Figure 5-2. General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Figure 5-3. Closing Confirmation Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Figure 6-1. General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Figure 6-2. General (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Figure 6-3. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Figure 7-1. Async Ports Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Figure 7-2. Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Figure 7-3. Edit Async Ports (continued) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Figure 7-4. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Figure 8-1. Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Figure 8-2. Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Figure 8-3. T1/PRI Line Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Figure 9-1. Edit Modem Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Figure 9-2. Modem Definition ConfIrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Figure 9-3. Modem Definition ConfIrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Figure 9-4. Remove Modem Definition Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Figure 9-5. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Figure 9-6. Configuration File Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

xiAnnex Manager User Guide

Figures

Figure 9-7. Edit Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Figure 10-1. Security Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1Figure 10-2. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4Figure 11-1. AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1Figure 11-2. IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3Figure 11-3. Reset Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5Figure 11-4. IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6Figure 11-5. LAT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8Figure 12-1. User Defined Parameter Groups Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Figure 12-2. User-defined Parameter Groups Name Entry Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8Figure 13-1. Show Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Figure 13-2. Set Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8Figure 13-3. Differing Values Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13Figure 13-4. Set Command Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14Figure 13-5. Set Command Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15Figure 14-1. View Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Figure 14-2. Create Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8Figure 14-3. Create Script Port Entry Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12Figure 14-4. Script File Selection Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14Figure 14-5. Execute Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17Figure 14-6. Script Port Entry Window for Execute Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20Figure 14-7. Execute Script Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21Figure 14-8. Execute Script Reset Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21Figure 15-1. Compare Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2Figure 15-2. Compare Window for two Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5Figure 15-3. Compare Window for Annex and Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6Figure 15-4. Compare Window for Two Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7Figure 15-5. Copy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12Figure 15-6. Copy Command Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-18Figure 15-7. Copy Command Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-18Figure 16-1. Boot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2Figure 16-2. Boot Command Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8Figure 16-3. Reset Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10Figure 16-4. Reset Command Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-15Figure 16-5. Broadcast Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-16Figure 16-6. Set PRI Internal Modems Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-20Figure 17-1. Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-2Figure 17-2. Annex Async Port Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-6Figure 17-3. Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12Figure 17-4. Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16Figure 17-5. Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21Figure 17-6. Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-29Figure 17-7. Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-36Figure 17-8. Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-40Figure 17-9. Discover Annexes/Search Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-44Figure 17-10. Annex LIst File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-49Figure 17-11. Discover Annexes/Network Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-51Figure 17-12. Discover Annexes/Network Process Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-52Figure 17-13. Creating Annex List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-53

Annex Manager User Guidexii

Figures

Figure 18-1. Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

xiiiAnnex Manager User Guide

Figures

Annex Manager User Guidexiv

Tables

Table 2-1. Mouse Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Table 2-2. Keyboard Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Table 15-1. Comparison Output Box Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Table 18-1. Supported Standard MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8Table 18-2. RFC 1213 MIB-II Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9Table 18-3. RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10Table 18-5. RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12Table 18-6. RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14Table 18-7. RFC 1243 AppleTalk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16

xvAnnex Manager User Guide

Tables

Annex Manager User Guidexvi

’s

ionthat

ins forible

Preface

Annex Manager is a graphical user interface that allows you toconfigure one or more Annexes easily and quickly. Annex Managerwindow software gives you access to all Annex SNMP-configurableparameters and commands.

TheAnnex Manager User Guide is intended for System Administratorsor others who need to configure Annex remote access communicatservers. It assumes that you are familiar with network protocols and you know the parameter values you need to configure Annexes.

About the Documentation

This book provides complete Annex Manager documentation. It explaall Annex Manager commands and gives you step-by-step directionsusing each command. In addition, it describes each parameter eligfor Annex Manager processing.

This guide is part of the complete Annex documentation set.You should refer to other manuals for information not related tothe Annex Manager graphical user interface.

xviiAnnex Manager User Guide

Preface

TheAnnex Manager User Guide includes the following parts andchapters:

• Introduction provides an overview of Annex Manager featuresand platforms.

• Part 1,Annex Manager Basics:

• Chapter 1,Installing Annex Manager provides directionsfor installing the software.

• Chapter 2,Window Basics presents basic windows toolsthat you can use throughout any Annex Manager session.

• Chapter 3,Working with Annex Manager Windowsdescribes Annex Manager’s command, secondary,warning, and help windows.

• Chapter 4,Using the Main Window explains all features inthe main window. It includes directions for creating andusing Annex lists.

• Part 2,Setup Mode:

• Chapter 5,Setup Mode Basics describes the windows andspecial features of the Setup mode.

• Chapter 6,Selecting General Settings discusses how to usethe two General windows in Setup mode to set the mostcommonly-used Annex parameters.

• Chapter 7,Setting Asynchronous Port Values explains howto select and edit asynchronous port settings and modemdefinitions in Setup Mode.

Annex Manager User Guidexviii

Preface

• Chapter 8,Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Valuesdescribes how to set frequently-used Call Defaultparameters, assign remote addresses to channels, and setthe T1/PRI line switch type.

• Chapter 9,Editing Modem Definitions explains how to edita modem definition in your configuration files.

• Chapter 10,Setting Security Values describes how to setfrequently-used Annex security settings.

• Chapter 11,Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX and LAT Windowsexplains how to set frequently-used values for theseprotocols.

• Part 3,Customize Mode:

• Chapter 12,Using and Creating Parameter Groupsdescribes how to create your own parameter listings thatyou can use in any Annex Manager session.

• Chapter 13,Viewing and Changing Parameters providesinstructions for using theShow andSet commands.

• Chapter 14,Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scriptsexplains the commands that allow you to create a set ofparameter values, to store them as a script, and to apply ascript’s values to one or more Annexes.

• Chapter 15,Comparing and Copying Parameters andValues discusses the commands that allow you to verifyparameters and values in existing Annexes and scripts, andto apply one Annex’s parameter values to other Annexes.

xixAnnex Manager User Guide

Preface

• Part 4,Control and Status Commands:

• Chapter 16,Booting and Resetting Annexes providesinstructions for theBoot, Reset, andBroadcast commands.

• Chapter 17,Displaying Status Information describes thecommands that give you status information for Annexes,ports, channels, and interfaces.

• Part 5,Reference Information:

• Chapter 18,Annex Manager and SNMP presents a briefoverview of SNMP and its relationship to the Annex andAnnex Manager.

• Chapter 19,Annex Parameters describes each parametereligible for Annex Manager processing. It includes eachparameter’s type, allowable values, Annex Manager defaultvalue, and the pre-defined lists in which each parameterappears.

• Chapter 20,Troubleshooting gives detailed answers to thequestions most frequently asked by Annex Manager users.

• TheIndex provides detailed page references for the entireAnnex Manager User Guide.

Annex Manager User Guidexx

Preface

uests

Documentation Conventions

This book’s conventions allow you to use Annex Manager easily. Yocan use the book as a reference guide, finding descriptions of singlelements, or follow directions through a chapter. The following table litheAnnex Manager User Guide conventions.

Convention: Represents:

Italics Book titles, chapter titles, and chapter headings.

Window font Text from any Annex Manager window.

Parameter font Parameter names, tool names, filenames, anddirectory names.

Keycaps.

Window push buttons.

Notes provide important information.

Warnings inform you about conditions that canhave adverse effects on processing.

Cautions notify you about dangerous conditions.

Key

Button Name

xxiAnnex Manager User Guide

Preface

Annex Manager User Guidexxii

ted,y

edes

Introduction

Annex Manager allows system administrators to monitor andconfigure the Annexes in the network. It is a host-based, window orienconfiguration and management application designed to manage BaNetworks’ Annex remote access communication servers.

Annex Manager offers the functionality of the older Annex host-basna configuration tool in an easier to use format. In addition, it providbasic monitoring capabilities that were previously available only byconnecting directly to the Annex.

Annex Manager Features

Annex Manager offers advanced features through a graphical userinterface. It allows you to:

• Configure Annexes with Setup or Customize mode:

• Setup mode allows users to configure one or more Annexesby setting the most commonly used parameters.

• Customize mode lets users set individual Annex parametersand provides access to all main menu commands.

• Simplify configuration operations using pre-defined parametergroups.

• Create additional parameter groups for easy configuration.

• Support multiple Annex hardware versions, including theAnnex3, Micro Annex XL, Remote Annex RA2000, RA4000,RA6100, and RA6300 products; Cabletron CSMIM,CSMIM-T1, and MODMIM; and Bay Networks 5390.

xxiiiAnnex Manager User Guide

Introduction

• Display online documentation for all Annex configurationparameters and for all Annex Manager windows and fields.

• Show and set values for all Annex configuration parameters.

• Save current configuration parameter settings into script filesand restore settings from these files. Using script commands,you can:

• Create ASCII text files and edit them with standardworkstation editors.

• Use predefined configuration script files to configureAnnexes and ports.

• Compare parameters and values for two Annexes, for an Annexand a script, or for two scripts.

• Copy the current parameter settings from one port to another orfrom one Annex to another.

• Retrieve basic status and statistics information from an Annexor from a specific port on more than one Annex.

• Define site specific defaults.

• Identify Annexes in the network.

• Save lists of Annex names or addresses.

• Display default values for each configuration parameter.

• Boot and reset Annexes.

• Edit Annex configuration file.

• Reset ports or Annex subsystems automatically after youchange parameter settings.

Annex Manager User Guidexxiv

Introduction

s therded

iatedisk

lingare

exh, theol.

ork

r

Annex Manager Environment

Annex Manager is an SNMP-based management application that useX/Motif™ graphical environment for its user interface and the standaSNMP protocol to send commands to the Annex. Since it is designto run stand-alone, Annex Manager includes statically-linked SNMPprotocol routines and the X/Motif™ binary libraries. The installationprocess copies the appropriate binary executable and all the assochelp and data files from the distribution media to the workstation's dstorage. Although it is not a requirement, you should consider instalAnnex Manager on the same workstation you use for the Annex softwinstallation.

Annex Manager depends on the proprietary MIB defined for the Annand on the various standard MIBs supported by the Annex. As sucAnnex Manager cannot manage other SNMP-manageable nodes innetwork, and is not intended to be a generic SNMP management to

Annex Manager may be loosely coupled with several standard netwmanagement products such as SunNet Manager™,HP/Openview™, or IBM Netview™ for AIX. However, Annex Manageis not tightly integrated with these products.

xxvAnnex Manager User Guide

Introduction

ningns

ng

c the

thest

al

System Requirements

Release 2.3 of Annex Manager is intended to run on a workstation runBSD Unix (Sun Sparc, HP, RS/6000, SCO Unix). The following sectiolist the hardware and software requirements for installing and runniAnnex Manager.

Memory Requirements

You must have at least 10 MB of free disk space available prior toinstallation.We recommend at least 32 MB of RAM, although specifimemory requirements vary depending on the type of workstation andother tasks that run concurrently with Annex Manager.

Annex Manager works best with a color monitor directly attached to workstation or a color X-window terminal connected to the UNIX hoover the network. Annex Manager also supports a grey-scaleX-window terminal attached to the workstation. Any X-window terminused with Annex Manager must have at least 2 MB of RAM.

Platforms

Annex Manager runs on the following platforms:

• SunOS 4.1.3C or 4.1.4, Solaris 2.4 with SunOS compatibilitymode, and Solaris 2.5.

• HP-UX 9.0.5 or 10.0.

• AIX 4.1.4.

• SCO/UNIX Release 3.2.

Annex Manager User Guidexxvi

Introduction

s.

700

.

ing

tall

Sun Requirements

Annex Manager runs under SunOS and Solaris on SPARC System

HP Requirements

Annex Manager runs under HP-UX 9.0.5 or 10.0 on HP 9000 SeriesWorkstations.

IBM Requirements

Annex Manager runs under AIX 4.1.4 on IBM RS/6000 workstations

SCO Requirements

Annex Manager runs under SCO/Unix Release 3.2 and the X windowsystem. You should have a 486 CPU with 16 MB RAM, 20 MB ofavailable disk space, and a CD-ROM drive or a 3.5” floppy drive to insthe software.

xxviiAnnex Manager User Guide

Introduction

Annex Manager User Guidexxviii

s.

k,

herm.

Chapter 1Installing Annex Manager

Annex Manager uses simple, step-by-step installation procedureWhen you follow the directions in this section, you can install AnnexManager easily and quickly. This section includes:

• Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms

• Installing the Application

• Setting Environment Variables

• Working with SunNet Manager

• Running Annex Manager

Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms

You can receive the Annex Manager installation file (tarfile) on a distape, or as an electronically-transmitted file. The application runs onAIX™, HP-UX™, Solaris™, and SunOS™ platforms. You can use tinstructions in this section for any Annex Manager medium or platfo

The directions in this chapter use thewindow font to indicate thecommands and names you need to type, and to show yousamples of the installation script.

1-1Annex Manager User Guide

Chapter 1 Installing Annex Manager Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

oteone

Installing the Annex Manager Application

Annex Manager installation uses the same installation script as RemAnnex Software. To install Annex Manager, you extract the installatiscript and run it. After you set environment variables, you can run thapplication. Annex Manager’s installation procedure uses simple,interactive steps.

Using the InstallationScript

To install Annex Manager:

1. Create a directory in which to place the setup directory youextract from the media. The setup directory contains installationscripts, release notes, and a release version file. Type:% mkdir annex/setup% cd annex

2. Extract the setup directory from the media. Type: xvf <tar-device-name> setup

3. Execute the setup/install script. Type% setup/install

The script responds with a welcome message as shown in thefollowing example:

****************************************************It is required that you run this script as root*****************************************************This command is used to install Annex Software (boot images, security,command line management) and Annex Manager (X-Motif GUImanagement application). The versions installed are:Annex Software R13.2Annex Manager R2.3

At any question prompt you can escape to a shell by typing "!". When youexit that shell you will bounce back to the question prompt. Many of thequestions will have default answers in square brackets; pressing carriagereturn will select the default.

Do you want to continue (y/n/q=quit) [y]:

Annex Manager User Guide1-2

Chapter 1 Installing Annex ManagerPart 1 Annex Manager Basics

4. Select the media type you want to use to install the products:

What type of install will be performed?1. Floppy Disks2. Tape3. Tarfile previously copied to hard disk4. Reinstall from previously extracted software on hard drive5. Quit

5. After you select a media type, the installation script requestsfurther information based on your previous selection. Theexample below shows you the questions that the installationscript asks for each media type:

For Floppy Drives:Enter the install source type [1]: 1

What is the name of the floppy drive that has the tarfileName:

For Tape Drives:Enter the install source type [1]: 2

What is the name of the tape drive that has the tarfileName:

For the tarfile:Enter the install source type [1]: 3What is the fully specified path and name of the tarfileName:



6. Specify whether you want to install the Annex Software orAnnex Manager. To install Annex Manager, enter 2 at theprompt:

After installing one product you will be asked if you want to install the otherproduct.

Indicate desired action:1) Install Annex Software2) Install Annex Manager3) QuitEnter desired action [1]: 2

For the installation to proceed, we must copy software to a directory on ahard disk on the host. Please enter the name of the directory to be used.

7. Specify a directory in which you want to install Annex Manager:

Enter the name of the Annex Manager installation directory.Directory name [/usr/annex/gui_am_R2.3]: /u1/annex_manager

To merge existing Annex Manager data with thisnew installation, enter a new, unused directory.

The installation script will extract Annex Manager from the tar device:

Calling command: tar -xf <tar_device> gui_amThis may take some time.



8. After the extraction, the installation script will begin to installAnnex Manager and will prompt you for information:

Beginning Annex Manager 2.3 Installation

The environment variable GUI_AM_DIR is set to '/usr/annex/gui_am_R2.3'.The installation script will merge data from the current installation(unknown) in '/usr/annex/gui_am_R2.3' into the installationdirectory, '/u1/annex_manager'.

9. If you installed Annex Manager previously, the installationmerges existing data files in the new directory.

To merge files, select c, as shown in the example below. If you do notwant to merge files, abort the installation, make the necessarychanges and restart the installation process from the beginning.

If this is correct, press 'c' to continue.Otherwise,- abort by pressing 'a’- make the necessary changes for your correct installation- restart the installation process.Continue (c/a) [c]

10. The installation script detects the platform automatically andinstalls only the binaries for the appropriate platform:

The installation program has detected that you are currently running theSunOS operating system.

Is this correct (y/n) [y]



11. Enter a username for the person responsible for maintainingAnnex Manager files. If you enter root, only root can changethese files:

The installation program will change the ownership of Annex Managerfiles to root. Only owner of certain configuration files may modify thosefiles.

To have the installation script change the ownership to another user id,enter the username now or press return to accept root.

Enter Username [root] root

12. Enter group ids for users allowed to read and write to AnnexManager files:

The installation program will change the group id of Annex Manager filesand directories to group 'bin'. Only members of this group can add datafiles.

To have the installation script change the group id, enter the group id now,or press return to accept bin.

Enter Group id [bin] annex

13. Confirm the installation directory you entered previously:

Annex Manager 2.3 will be installed in /u1/annex_manager

If this is the correct directory press 'c' to continue or 'a' to abort theinstallation.

Continue or Abort (c/a) [c]

Installing Annex Manager 2.3 into '/u1/annex_manager/GUI_AM_R2.3'...

Extracting data files...

Extracting SunOS version of executable and uid...



n

14. List the users allowed to run Annex Manager and use the Set,Execute Script, Copy, Boot, and Reset commands:

In order for users to configure the Annex (use Set, Execute Script, Copy,Boot, and Reset commands) you must enter their user names in the useraccess list. root will be added to the user access listautomatically.

This is the current access listroot

Do you want to add other names to the user access list (y/n) [y]

Enter user names (one per line) to permit set access.Type "<CR>", "." or ^D on a line by itself to end.Enter a? to print the current access list

User name [<CR> to end]

15. Select a color scheme for displaying Annex Manager:

What default color scheme do you want (c=color/m=mono) [c] m

Finishing installation...Installation complete.

To Run Annex Manager, you need to set your environment as follows:1. If you have changed the recommended installation

directory, set the GUI_AM_DIR environment variable to $PWD.2. Put the $PWD/bin directory in your path3. Set the DISPLAY environment to point to the host where you

want Annex Manager to appear.

You can put these commands in your .cshrc, .login, .profile, or some otherequivalent script.To run the Annex Manager, type ‘gui_am’ at the shell prompt. Consult theREADME file for release information.

When you complete this step, you can set up the environment to ruAnnex Manager.



ent

ely onx

of

Setting Environment Variables

When you complete installation procedures you need to set environmvariables:

1. Set the GUI_AM_DIR environment variable to: /u1/annex_manager

2. Put the /u1/annex_manager/bin directory in your path.

3. Set the DISPLAY environment to point to the host where youwant Annex Manager to appear.

You can put these commands in your .cshrc, .login, .profile, or anequivalent script.

Working with SunNet Manager

Although Annex Manager is a stand-alone application, it can be looslinked to SunNet Manager so that a network administrator can clickan icon representing an Annex in the network map and select AnneManager from a list of tools for that node.

The steps described here are specific to SunNet ManagerRelease 2.2 and may vary if you are using a different versionSunNet Manager.



leyou

nu:

ile

Linking Annex Manager with SunNet Manager

You can link Annex Manager and SunNet Manager from the ConsoCommands/Tools option menu or from Annex icons. In both cases, must link Annex Manager in thexylogics.schema file located in the/usr/

snm/struct directory.

Adding Annex Manager to the Console Commands/ToolsOption Menu

To add Annex Manager to the Console Commands/Tools option me

Add the following information in the instance elementCommandsection of the xylogics.schema file.

instance element Command ((SNM_Console “Annex-Manager...” “$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am”))

Please refer to Chapter 8 in theSunNet Manager User's Guide forinformation about adding Annex Manager to the Tools option menu whSunNet Manager is running.



Adding Annex Manager to the Annex Icons

To add Annex Manager to the Annex Icons:

1. Add the following information in the instant elementCommandsection of the xylogics.schema file.

instance elementCommand ( (component.annexII "Annex-Manager..."

"$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am") (component.microannex "Annex-Manager..."

"$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am") (component.annex3 "Annex-Manager..."

"$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am"))

2. Place mouse cursor on the Annex icon and click the MENUbutton to display the popup menu.

3. On the popup menu, select Annex Manager under the Toolsoption.

Please refer to theSunNet Manager User's Guide for more information.



ionente

ter 5

are

Using SunNet Manager Discovery to Find Annexes

The Discovery tool uses the object identifier (OID) or system descriptretrieved from a device through SNMP to specify which type of elemit will create. You must add components of each Annex model to thdiscover.conf file located in the/var/adm/snm directory for Discovery tocreate Annex elements. For more information, please refer to Chapin theSunNet Manager Reference Manual.

Currently, all Annex models return the same OID for thesysOid object.SunNet Manager Discovery cannot distinguish among Annex hardwmodels.

To use the Discovery tool:

Add the following lines to the #MAPPINGS section:

Annex3 component.annex3

Micro Annex component.microannex

Annex-II component.annexII



t

s

can

Running Annex Manager

You can run Annex Manager after you install the application and seenvironment variables:

Type gui_am at the shell prompt.

If you did not set a path, typecd <install directory>/bin and then typegui_am

or type the full path.

gui_am is a script file that sets environment variables and runAnnex Manager’sgui_am_exe executable. You should notinvokegui_am_exe from the command line.

A window appears that informs you about the initialization process.

Figure 1-1. Initialization Window

When the initialization process ends, this window disappears and youuse Annex Manager.


nex

ill

Chapter 2Window Basics

Annex Manager provides simple tools for controlling windowdisplays and entering information. This chapter teaches you to use AnManager windows. It includes the following sections:

• Window Elements describes the components that comprise mostAnnex Manager windows.

• Mouse and Keyboard Techniques explains common mouseoperations and corresponding keyboard commands.

• Controlling the Window Displayprovides instructions forchanging a window’s size, moving a window, reducing awindow to an icon, using scroll bars, and using the controlmenu.

• Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes describes each type of AnnexManager field, button, and box, and gives instructions forselecting and entering information.

After you become familiar with the techniques described here, you wbe able to use Annex Manager easily and efficiently.

This book describes all window conventions for the Motif™window manager. If you use another window manager, themethods you use may vary.


Chapter 2 Window Basics Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

llrves

Window Elements

Annex Manager uses Motif™ elements such as title, menu and scrobars, list boxes, and help windows. Annex Manager’s main window seas an example, since it uses most available elements.

Figure 2-1. Window Elements

If you are familiar with windows applications, you recognize manyelements in the main window.

WARNING

Maximizebutton

Minimize buttonTitle barControl menu button Menu bar

Text field

Cursor

Push button

Option button

Scroll

Border

List box


Chapter 2 Window BasicsPart 1 Annex Manager Basics

w:
The elements listed below can appear in any Annex Manager windo
• Title bar labels each window.

• Borders allow you to change a window’s size using a mouse.

• Control menu button displays a menu for moving, sizing, andclosing a window.

• Mouse pointershows you the mouse location in a window.When you move the mouse, the pointer moves accordingly.

• Cursor, sometimes called an “insertion point,” appears in a textfield when you can enter or change the field’s value. You cantype only when you see the cursor blinking.

• Scroll bars allow you to move through a list box wheninformation is too long or too wide for the box. You can use thescroll bars to view all available text.

• Minimize button converts all open Annex Manager windows toan icon on your desktop.

• Maximize button toggles the main window’s size, enlarging itfrom the standard size to fill your terminal’s screen or restoringit to its original size.

• Text fields display specific pieces of information. You can typenew values or change existing values in some text fields.

• List boxes display items you can select for Annex Managerprocessing. The mouse can select one or more items and candisplay help information about a parameter.

• Message and output boxes display information about theactions you take and about Annex Manager operations.Message boxes monitor action, while output boxes show theresults of an action. Both boxes can include warning or statusmessages.

• Option buttons, marked with a small rectangle ( ), provideseveral selections automatically. You can hold the mouse buttonto display all options and to select the one you need.



ionods.ard

lists,ame

use

• Push buttons are large rectangular buttons that instruct thesystem to take action. When a push button’s label is followedby an ellipsis (...), these buttons display an additional window.

• Radio buttons, marked with a diamond-shape ( ), turn aselection on or off. These buttons appear in sets of two or more;you can select only one button in each set.

• Check buttons, marked with a square ( ), turn a selection on oroff. You can select one or more buttons in the set.

The pull-down menu appears only in the main window:

• Themenu bar stores the pull-down menus you can use forAnnex Manager commands and for help facilities. Some menuselections duplicate Annex Manager buttons; other operationsappear only in these menus.

Mouse and Keyboard Techniques

Annex Manager allows you to navigate in windows and enter informatusing a mouse, keyboard commands, or a combination of both methThis section tells you how the mouse works and explains the keybocommands that can substitute for the mouse.

Using the Mouse

Annex Manager uses a mouse to display windows, select text fields, and buttons, and respond to warning and help windows. You use the s“point and click” mouse techniques found in other interfaces. Thefollowing table lists terms, actions, and results that occur when you the mouse.



s.

n

Table 2-1. Mouse Operation

Annex Manager does not use the right or center mouse buttonFor information about selecting items from lists, seeUsing ListBoxes later in this chapter.

Using Keyboard Commands

Annex Manager provides the following keyboard commands that casubstitute for clicking or dragging the mouse pointer.

Term If you: The mouse:

Click Press and release the mousebutton

Selects a window, box, textfield, button, or list item

Double click Press and release the mousebutton twice, quickly

Displays help when cursoris on an Annex parameteror parameter group

Drag Hold the mouse button andmove the mouse

Moves a window, scrollsthrough information in abox, selects text, or selectsa range of list items

Point Move the mouse pointer toan item

Relocates the mousepointer



,es

Figure 2-2. Keyboard Commands

Clicking the mouse button produces the same result as using + , the space bar, or . Dragging the pointer produc

the same result as using arrow keys or + arrow keys.

If you press: Annex Manager:

Places the cursor in the next field, box, or button

+ Places the cursor in the previous field, box, orbutton

Space bar Selects an item from a list or menu

Space bar + Displays information about an Annex list item

, , , or Moves the pointer through a list or a menu

+ or Selects text in a field

Acknowledges file selection windows, warningboxes, and help messages

or Deletes a character to the cursor’s right or left,based on your keyboard configuration.

or Displays a help message for a list item, a field, ora button

Places the cursor in the menu bar

+ moves the cursor to the next field

+ + moves the cursor to the previous field

Tab

Shift Tab

Return

Shift

Return

X Delete

Help F1

F10

Ctr; Tab

Shift Ctr; Tab

Tab

Shift Tab Return

Shift



orkngeas. the

a

ose

Controlling the Window Display

Annex Manager allows you to arrange your desktop to suit your own wstyle. You can reduce the Annex Manager application to an icon, chaa window’s size, move a window, and scroll through lists and text areThis section gives you instructions for these operations and for usingcontrol menu.

Changing a Window’s Size

Annex Manager displays windows in a default size. You can changewindow’s size by using the maximize button ( ), which expands thewindow to fill your desktop, or by using the mouse, which lets you choany size for the window.

Using Borders toChange WindowSize

To change a window’s size using the mouse:

1. Place the mouse pointer in the window’s border.

To size the entire window, place the pointer in the window’s corner;

its shape changes to .

To size only the horizontal or vertical dimensions, place the pointer

in the border; its shape changes to .

2. Hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer

The window’s border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

3. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the size youneed.



uceon,

Using theMaximize Buttonto ChangeWindow Size

To change a window’s size using the maximize button:

1. Move the cursor to the maximize ( ) button in the window’supper right corner.

2. Click the left mouse button.

The window expands to fill your desktop.

To restore the window to its original size after you use the maximizebutton, click the button again.

You can also use the Control menu’sSize option to alter awindow’s size. For more information, seeUsing the Control Menulater in this chapter.

Using Annex Manager Icons

If you need room on your desktop for other applications, you can redany open Annex Manager window to an icon. When you restore an icthe window opens in the size and location that displayed before youreduced it.

Reducing aWindow to an Icon

To reduce a window to an icon:

1. Move the mouse pointer to the minimize ( ) button in thewindow’s upper right corner.

2. Click the mouse button.

The window icon appears on your screen.



ienter

suit

k

therve

Restoring an Icon To restore a window to its original size and location:

1. Move the pointer over the icon.

2. Click the mouse button to display the icon menu.

The icon menu offers the same selections as the control menu.

3. Move the pointer to Restore and click the left mouse buttonagain.

You can skip steps 2 and 3 by double clicking on the icon.

Moving Windows and Icons

You can move a window or the Annex Manager icon to a more convenlocation on your desktop. Since you may use certain Annex Managwindows more often than others, you can position these windows toyour needs.

Moving a Window To move a window:

1. Place the pointer in the window’s title bar.

2. Drag the pointer.

The window’s border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

3. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the newlocation.

If one window on your desktop partially covers another, you can clicthe mouse on the covered window to bring it forward.

Moving an Icon If you have arranged your desktop so that an icon is covered by anowindow, use theLower option described later in this section and then mothe icon using the steps listed above.



rsa list

Inicate

hee

Using Scroll Bars

When a box is too small to display all available information, scroll balet you view complete lists or messages. The sample below shows box with scroll bars.

Figure 2-3. List Box with Scroll Bars

Scroll bars are horizontal or vertical areas that contain scroll boxes.the example above, scroll boxes are the white area. These boxes indwhether the scroll bar is active: scroll boxes change size to reflect tproportion of material that the window displays. The example abovshows active and inactive scroll bars:

• The vertical scroll bar is active. The scroll box fills aboutone third of the available space, indicating that there is moreinformation.

• The horizontal scroll bar is inactive. The scroll box fills the bar,indicating that complete information is displayed.

WARNING

scroll box in anactive scroll bar

scroll box in aninactive scroll bar



the Youse

ge If

When scroll bars are active, you can click the mouse button to movedisplay one line at a time or one page (the size of the box) at a time. can view information from any position in the list by dragging the moupointer.

Using the Mouseto Scroll

To view one line at a time:

1. Move the pointer to the arrow at the top or bottom of the scrollbar.


From the top arrow, the display moves up one line. From the bottomarrow, it moves down one line.

To view one page at a time:

1. Move the pointer to the scroll bar above or below the verticalscroll box or to the left or right of the horizontal scroll box.


The list displays according to the location of the pointer. Forexample, if you place the pointer below the vertical scroll box, thedisplay moves down one page.

To scroll through the display:

1. Move the pointer to the scroll box.

2. Hold the left mouse button.

The list moves as long as you hold the mouse button.

3. Release the mouse button when you reach the position youwant.

Using Arrow Keysto Scroll

You can use the or arrow keys to scroll through a list or messabox. If you click an arrow key, the display moves one line at a time.you hold an arrow key, the display scrolls.



sanonol

ns

f

Using the Control Menu

The control menu appears in every Annex Manager window. It allowyou to move and size a window, to change the window to and from icon, and to control the window’s display in relation to other windows your desktop. This section gives you directions for using each contrmenu option.

TheClose option appears in Annex Manager running the Motif™window manager only in the main window. Other windowmanagers may vary. You should always use the buttoprovided on Annex Manager screens.

The control menu uses standard window features:

• Active options appear in black type and inactive options appearin grey.

• The key sequence for each option appears next to the option. Iyour keyboard does not have a key labeled “Alt,” consult yourhardware documentation to find the corresponding key.

• The first letter of each option is underlined. When you displaythe control menu, you can select an option by typing theunderlined letter on your keyboard.

Displaying the Control Menu Window

Displaying themenu

To display a control menu option:

1. Move the pointer to the menu control button in the window’supper left corner.

2. Click the mouse button or hold it down to display the menu.

3. Click the mouse button on the option you need, or drag thepointer to the option and release the button.

You can also type the underlined letter.

Close



in

Using Control Menu Options

TheMaximize, Minimize, andRestore options allow you to change a windowto and from an icon.

• TheMaximize option enlarges a window to the size of yourdesktop.

• TheMinimize option shrinks a window to an icon.

• TheRestore option returns all open Annex Manager windows totheir original sizes.

Maximize andMinimize have the same effect on a window as the buttonsthe window’s upper right corner. For more information about thesebuttons, refer toUsing Annex Manager Icons earlier in this chapter.

Using the MoveOption

To alter a window’s position on your desktop:

1. Select Move and click the mouse button.

The pointer changes to and the window’s border becomes anoutline as you move the pointer.

2. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the newlocation.

The window appears in its new location and the pointer returns to

.

You can move a window by following these steps or by using thedirections inMoving Windows and Icons on page 2-9.



w’s

he

urow

is is

Using the SizeOption

TheSize option lets you shrink or stretch a window. To change a windosize:

1. Select Size and click the mouse button.

The pointer changes to .

2. Move the pointer to the border.

The pointer changes to .

3. Continue to move the pointer to reach the size you need.

The border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

4. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the newsize.

The window displays in its new size and the pointer returns to .

You can change a window’s size by using this option or by following tdirections inChanging a Window’s Size on page 2-7.

TheLower option moves any Annex Manager window to the back of yodesktop. When you use this option on overlapping windows, the windin the foreground moves, revealing the window that was covered.

Using the LowerOption

To change the display:

1. Select the window you want to move.

2. Select Lower and click the mouse button.

If you position a window so that it is partially visible, you canclick anywhere on its border to bring it to the foreground.

Using the CloseOption

TheClose option appears only in the Annex Manager main window. Thoption allows you to exit Annex Manager software. While this optionavailable, you should always use the Annex ManagerExit entry in themain menu.



ion

ne.

or

r

eld’s

ess

the

Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes

Text fields, buttons, and boxes allow you to select or enter informatin an Annex Manager window. This section explains how you canrecognize these elements and gives you directions for using each o

Using Text Fields

A text field contains a single piece of information displayed in a box. Fexample, the main window provides text fields for Annex names,passwords, and port numbers. Some text fields allow you to enter ochange values; others simply display information.

Entering TextField Information

The cursor appears in a text field when you can enter or change the fivalue. To use a text field:

1. Place the pointer in the field and click the mouse button.

The border of the field is highlighted and the cursor blinks.

2. Type new information or edit the value that displays.

You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor or the andarrow keys to select text when you are editing existing text.

If you edit a text field that uses more than one line, you must pr + to move to the next field, or + + to move

to the previous field.

When you complete your work in the window, Annex Manager uses new value for processing.

Shift

Ctr; Tab Shift Ctr; Tab



lect

and

ingplace

whow

the

Using Buttons

Annex Manager provides several types of buttons that allow you to seinformation. Buttons control list box contents, window displays, andAnnex Manager processing. This section describes each button typegives you directions for using buttons.

An option button appears as a box with a small rectangle ( ) followthe text. These buttons display a menu: you can select one item and it in the box.

Selecting Items inOption Buttons

To use an option button:

1. Move the pointer inside the button and click or hold the mousebutton.

The menu appears.

2. Move the mouse to highlight the item you want and click orrelease the mouse button.

Your selection appears in the box.

Push buttons instruct the system to begin a process or display a newindow. For example, a push button can add an Annex to a list or sparameter values. These buttons display as boxes with text inside( ).

Using PushButtons

To use a push button:

1. Move the pointer inside the button.


An ellipsis (...) following a push button label indicates that pressing button will display another window.

Help



arehen two

Using Radio Buttons

Radio buttons allow you to turn a selection on or off. These buttonsmarked with a diamond shape ( ) that the window manager fills in wyou select a button. Radio buttons always appear in a box in sets ofor more. You can select only one button in each set.

Selecting RadioButtons

To use a radio button:

1. Move the pointer to the diamond shape ( ).


When you select a radio button, the diamond’s center ishighlighted. If you select another button in the set, the highlightingof the first button disappears.

Figure2-4 shows the radio buttons in theBoot command.

Figure 2-4. Radio Buttons



bel.ore

Using Check Buttons

Check buttons are marked with a small square ( ) that precedes a laThey allow you to turn a selection on or off. You can select one or mcheck buttons.

Selecting CheckButtons

To use check buttons:

1. Move the pointer to the square shape ( ).


When you turn a selection on, the center of the square ishighlighted. When you turn a selection off, the center of the squareis empty.

3. Move the pointer to the next check button you want to selectand repeat steps 1 and 2.

When you select more than one button, the previously selectedbuttons remain highlighted.

Figure2-5 shows the check buttons in theCreate Script command. TheMain

Window Parameters button is turned on.

Figure 2-5. Check Buttons



.

hesetn

Using List Boxes

Annex Manager uses several types of boxes:

• List boxes display items you can select for Annex Managerprocessing. When complete information cannot fit into a box,horizontal and vertical scroll bars allow you to view thecomplete list.

• Message boxes monitor Annex Manager operations. Theseboxes can include status and error messages.

• Output boxes display the results of Annex Manager processing

Selecting Items in List Boxes

List boxes store information about Annexes, parameters, and files. Tboxes, which always include an identifying label, allow you to selecitems for Annex Manager processing. The example below shows aAnnex List box.

Figure 2-6. Annex List Box



tingx

ways

one

the

e at

Annex Manager provides several methods for selecting and deselecitems from a list box. You can combine these methods in any list bothat permits you to select more than one item. Selected items are alhighlighted.

Selecting OneItem

Some lists permit you to select only one item in a list box. To select item:

1. Move the pointer to the item you want to select.


Annex Manager highlights the item, indicating that it is selected.

You can search through a list by selecting one item and typing beginning letters of the item you want to find. The list will scrollautomatically to the item that matches your entry.

Selecting Morethan One Item

In many lists, you can select more than one item. To select items ona time:

1. Move the pointer to the first item you want to select and click themouse button.

The item appears highlighted, indicating that it is selected.

2. Move the pointer to the next item you want to select.

3. Hold and click the mouse button.

The item is selected in addition to any items you selectedpreviously. You can repeat this step to select as many items as youneed.

Ctrl



dingave

ge,

ges:

ge,

Selecting aRange of Items

Annex Manager provides two ways to select a range of items, depenon your previous selections. To select a range of items when you hnot yet selected items:

1. Move the pointer to the first item you want to select and hold themouse button.

Annex Manager highlights the first item.

2. Drag the pointer through all items you want to select.

Each item is highlighted as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want in therange.

Annex Manager highlights all items to indicate that they areselected.

You can skip steps 2 and 3 by selecting the first item in the ranmoving the pointer to the last item you want to select, pressing

, and clicking the mouse.

Adding a Rangeof Items

To select a range when you have already selected items and/or ran

1. Move the pointer to the first item you want to select, hold ,and hold the mouse button.

Annex Manager highlights the first item.

2. Drag the pointer through all items you want to select.

Each item is highlighted as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want in therange.

Annex Manager highlights all items, indicating that they areselected.

You can skip steps 2 and 3 by selecting the first item in the ranmoving the pointer to the last item you want to select, pressing

, and clicking the mouse.

Shift

Ctrl

Shift



tion,

Deselecting Items in LIst Boxes

You can deselect single items or a range of items in a list box. In addiyou can deselect all your previous selections.

Deselecting OneItem

To deselect a list item:

1. Move the pointer to any selected item.

2. Hold and click the mouse button.

The highlighting disappears, indicating that the item is deselected.

Deselecting aRange of Items

To deselect a range of items:

1. Move the pointer to the first item you want to deselect, hold, and hold the mouse button.

2. Drag the pointer through all items you want to deselect.

Each item’s highlighting disappears as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want to deselect.

Annex Manager removes highlighting from the range of items,indicating that they are no longer selected.

Deselecting AllItems

To deselect all items in a list box:

1. Move the pointer to any item in the list box.


Highlighting disappears from all items except the one on whichyou placed the pointer.

3. Keep the pointer on the remaining selected item, hold , andclick the mouse button.

Annex Manager removes highlighting from the item. The list boxdoes not contain selected items.

Ctrl

Ctrl

Ctrl



cludeoxes.

Understanding Message and Output Boxes

Message and output boxes display details about Annex Managerprocessing: their contents report on the operations you use and can inerror and status messages. You cannot enter information in these b

Reading Message Boxes

Message boxes monitor Annex Manager operations by displaying statusand error information. The example below shows the Set message box.

Figure 2-7. Set Window Message Box

This message box summarizes theShow Values command: it lists eachparameter and notifies you that Annex Manager has completed theShow

Values request.

WARNING



rs the

Reading Output Boxes

Output boxes show the results of Annex Manager commands. Likemessage boxes, output boxes can include error and status messages.The example below shows the Compare output box for two Annexes.

Figure 2-8. Compare Window Output Box

In this example, the output box displays the differences in parametevalues between Annexes. The box lists each parameter and includevalues for each Annex.


es.omndr or

Chapter 3Working with Annex Manager

Windows

Annex Manager looks and works like many graphical user interfacIts main window displays basic information. Each entry you select frthe pull-down menu or from the main window displays its own commawindow. Some commands require additional windows when you entechange values.

This chapter describes Annex Manager windows in the followingsections:

• Understanding Window Types discusses the relationshipbetween Annex Manager’s main, command, and secondarywindows.

• Using Annex Manager Menus describes each entry in the pull-down menu.

• Using Secondary Windows explainsFile Selection, Confirmation,Reset Parameters, andCancel windows.

• Understanding Warning Windows tells you how and whywarnings appear and gives you instructions for acknowledgingthese windows.

• Using Help Windows describes the three types of online helpthat give you information about Annex Manager commandsand selections.

• Changing Site Defaults explains theSite Parameters command,which changes default values that display in theShow commandand in help messages.


Chapter 3 Working with Annex Manager Windows Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

e

Understanding Window Types

Annex Manager uses several kinds of windows to help you configurAnnexes:

• The main window always appears first and stays on yourdesktop as long as you are using Annex Manager. This windowincludes the pull-down menu, which gives you access to allAnnex Manager commands.

• Each command or Setup mode selection uses its own window.These windows appear when you select pull-down menu entriesor Setup field selections.

• Some windows require secondary windows for processing.Annex Manager uses the following windows, which aredescribed later in this chapter.

• TheFile Selection window lets you enter a path and file nameor choose an existing file in which to store the scripts andlists you create. In addition, this window lets you selectfiles for storing help messages and command output.

• TheConfirmation window appears when you change anAnnex configuration or when you choose to overwrite anexisting file that you created. This window gives youinformation about the changes that will occur.

• TheCancel window appears if an Annex Manager commandtakes a longer than average time for processing. It lets youknow how much processing has occurred and allows youto cancel the command.


Chapter 3 Working with Annex Manager WindowsPart 1 Annex Manager Basics

geratedu’s

• TheReset Parameters window appears only when you selectConfirm Auto Reset from the pull-down menu. This windowinforms you that Annex Manager will reset the Annexesyou selected.

Some commands have their own secondary windows. Forexample, thePort Entry window appears only in theCreate ScriptandExecute Script commands. Although these are secondarywindows, this book describes them as part of each command.

Using Annex Manager Menus

Annex Manager’s main window gives you access to all Annex Manacommands and options through its pull-down menu. This menu is locjust below the window’s title bar. The following list describes the menheadings as well as the commands and operations it provides:

• TheFile heading provides tools you can use with AnnexManager commands.

• Open Annex List places a saved Annex List in the mainwindow’s list box.

• Save Annex List allows you to create an Annex list and tosave it for future use.

• View Script displays complete information for an existingscript.

• Create Script lets you choose parameters and values for anew script.

• Exit closes Annex Manager software.



• TheConfigure heading includes the commands you use toreconfigure an Annex:

• Boot allows you to boot one or more active Annexes.

• Broadcast sends messages to all ports on one or moreAnnexes.

• Discover Annexes provides two commands that identifyAnnexes and other devices on your network.

• Reset changes a specific Annex or port configurationwithout rebooting.

• Setup provides access to Annex Manager’s Setup mode.

• Compare matches parameters and values for two Annexes,an Annex and a script, or two scripts.

• Copy copies parameter values from one Annex to one ormore Annexes.

• Execute Script applies a script’s values to one or moreAnnexes.

• Set lets you change parameter values for one or moreAnnexes.

• Show displays current parameter values for one or moreAnnexes.



• TheOptions heading includes commands that let you createparameter groups, view SNMP information, set your site’sSNMP default values, and change SNMP defaults.

• User-defined Parameter Groups allows you to selectparameters and store them as a group.

• Site Parameters lets you change your site’s parameter defaultvalues that display in Help messages and in theShow

command.

• SNMP Information displays basic SNMP information about asingle Annex.

• Confirm Auto Reset determines whether Annex Managerrequires you to verify a reset procedure for theSet, Copy

andExecute Script commands. If you choose this option, (thedefault turns it on) you must respond to the window thatappears before Annex Manager will change aconfiguration. If you do not select this option, the resetprocedure occurs automatically.

• TheStatus heading provides access to commands that give youcurrent Annex, port, and interface information:

• Annex Status displays basic information about an Annex.

• Async Port displays basic information about one or moreasynchronous ports.

• Interface allows you to view current information about anAnnex’s interfaces.

• PRI provides basic information about ISDN Primary RateAnnexes.

• T1 displays basic statistics about T1 ports.

• DVS provides information for all active tunnel interfaces.

• Verify Annex State checks system information for Annexes

• TheMode menu lets you chooseSetup or Customize modes.



one

ve

Using Secondary Windows

An Annex Manager’s secondary window appears when a commandrequires information that its window does not accommodate. Forexample, if you create a new script, theFile Selection window allows youto specify a path and file name that will store the script.

This section describes the secondary windows common to more thancommand. It includes:

• Using the File Selection Window

• Understanding the Confirmation Window

• Using the Cancel Window

• Using the Reset Parameters Window

Some commands have their own secondary windows. Forexample, the Port Entry window appears only in theCreate ScriptandExecute Script commands. This book describes these exclusisecondary windows as part of each command.



r the

ou

ple,s,

tion

Using the File Selection Window

File Selection windows allow you to select a file from a list box or to entea directory and file information. Annex Manager commands then usefiles you select for processing.

Figure3-1 below shows the file selection window that displays when yuse theOpen Annex List command.

Figure 3-1. File Selection Window

The file selection window’s title reflects the command name. Forexample, theOpen Annex List command displays theAnnex List Selection

window illustrated above; theCreate Script window displays theScript

Selection window.

Each command displays files appropriate for its processing. For examtheOpen Annex List command displays the default directory for Annex listwhile theCreate Script window displays the default script directory. Werecommend that you use the default directory included in the file selecwindow.

WARNING



s:

then

Understanding the File Selection Window Format

All file selection windows use the following fields, boxes, and button

• TheFilter field determines the information that appears in theDirectories andFiles boxes. This field displays the defaultdirectory for the command you are using. An asterisk indicatesthat all files in the filter’s directory appear in theFiles box.

If you enter another file path or select a directory from theDirectories box and press or , theDirectories boxlists all directories and theFiles box lists all files located in thespecifiedFilter directory.

• TheDirectories box lists all directories specified by the filter.When you select a directory, your selection is added to theFilterfield. If you then choose , theFiles box displays allfiles in the directory you selected.

TheFilter field considers text that follows the last slash tobe a file filter. If you select a directory from theDirectoriesbox without clearing theFilter field, the file selectionwindow places your selection in the existing path,preceding the file filter.

• TheFiles box lists all files in the specified directory. When youclick on a file name, it appears in theSelection field.

• TheSelection field stores the file that the current command willuse. You can:

• Use theFilter field,Directories box, andFiles box to locate anexisting file name or to add a new file name to an existingdirectory.

• Enter another path and file name when you need a file fromanother directory, or when you want to add a new file nameto another directory.

When you choose , the command you are using works on file you specified. If you are changing an existing file, a confirmatiowindow appears so that you can verify your choice.

Return Filter

Filter

OK



ve.

Using Push Buttons

The file selection window uses the following push buttons:

• activates the command you are using for the file youspecified.

• changes the window’s display. When you type anew path and file name in theFilter field or select an item fromtheDirectories window and press , theFilter field,Directories box,Files box, andSelection field display informationbased on your entry.

• removes the file selection window from yourdisplay.

• displays a window that explains how the fileselection window works for the command you are using.

Editing Files

You can use an ASCII text editor to change the list or script files you saAnnex Manager verifies each file according to its first four lines.When youedit these files, you must use Annex Manager conventions:

• List files begin with:## DB_VERSION: V1.0# FORMAT: Annex Name | Community String | Timeout | Retries#

• Script files begin with:## DB_VERSION: V1.0# FORMAT: Parameter Name | Port Type | Port Number | Value#

You can enter comment lines as long as each line begins withthe pound sign (#). Annex Manager processing ignores theselines.

You can find additional information about editing files inChapter4 andChapter14.

OK

Filter

Filter

Cancel

Help



tingn

ue

t in

Understanding the Confirmation Window

TheConfirmation window appears when you use a command that willchange an Annex configuration, or when you choose an eligible exisfile from the file selection window. This window gives you informatioabout the changes that will occur.Figure3-2 shows a sampleConfirmation

window for theCopy command.

Figure 3-2. Confirmation Window

You must respond to this window. You can select to continthe command’s processing, or to return to the commandwindow.

Figure3-3 shows the window that appears when you try to store a lisan existing file.

Figure 3-3. Overwrite Confirmation Window

OK

Cancel



gersing

sing

e ofing.

Using the Cancel Window

TheCancel window appears if an Annex Manager command takes a lonthan average time for processing. It lets you know how much proceshas occurred and allows you to cancel the command.

Cancelling a command does not restore values or undo procesthat occurred before you issued the cancellation.

Figure3-4 shows the window for theDiscover Annexes command.

Figure 3-4. Cancel Window

TheCancel window uses a dynamic graph to show you the percentagprocessing that has taken place. If you find that the operation is taktoo long, you can press to return to the command window

WARNING

Cancel



ting

se

tedntry,

x.

Using the Reset Parameters Window

The pull-down menu’sConfirm Auto Reset entry determines whether AnnexManager requires you to verify a reset procedure for theSet, Copy, andExecute Script commands. If you changed parameters that require resetan Annex, Annex Manager displays theReset Parameters window (seeFigure3-5) after the command completes its processing. If you chooConfirm Auto Reset, you must respond to theReset Parameters window.

Selecting the Confirm Auto Reset Option

Confirm Auto Reset is the only menu entry that is a check button. It is selecwhen you begin using Annex Manager. If you have deselected this eyou can click the mouse onConfirm Auto Reset in the Options menu toactivate the window.

Figure 3-5. Reset Parameters Window

If you useSet, Copy, or Execute Script to change parameter valuesand do not select theConfirm Auto Reset option, Annex Managerwill reset the Annexes you selected without notifying you.

If you change values for port parameters only, Annex Managerwill reset the ports you selected. It will not reset the entire Anne

WARNING



Yourk.t

rk.

Understanding Warning Windows

Annex Manager displays warning windows when you enter invalidinformation or choose an option that Annex Manager cannot process.must acknowledge warning windows before you can continue your woFigure3-6 shows a warning window that appears for a command tharequires you to select an Annex.

Figure 3-6. Warning Window

AcknowledgingWarning Windows

To acknowledge a warning window:

1. Move the pointer to .


The warning window disappears. You can also acknowledge thewarning box by moving the pointer into the box and pressing

.

After you acknowledge the warning window you can return to your wo

If you do not understand why a warning window appeared,acknowledge the window and consult the help facility for moredetailed information.

OK

Return



s youline

s,

Using Help Windows

The online help facility gives you detailed information about thecommands, boxes, fields, buttons, parameter groups and parameteruse to configure an Annex. Annex Manager offers three types of onhelp:

• Information about Customize mode fields, commands andparameters appears in a standard Annex Manager window. Youcan save this window’s information in a text file.

• Information about all Setup mode fields, single fields inCustomize mode, and all boxes and buttons appears in a smallwindow labelledWindow Item Help. You cannot save the contentsof these windows.

• Short descriptions of Setup mode fields appear automatically atthe bottom of every Setup mode window.

This section explains how you can use help windows. It includes:

• Displaying Help Windows

• Understanding the Help Window Format

• Saving Help Window Contents

Displaying Help Windows

You can use keyboard commands to display information about fieldboxes, and buttons. Mouse commands display information aboutcommand windows and about parameters.



t

Displaying Window Item Help

Displaying a HelpWindow

To display help about a field, box, or button:

1. Move the cursor to any field, box, or button.

You can use the mouse or to move the cursor. Be sure that theitem you are selecting is highlighted.

2. Press or .

TheWindow Item Help window appears.

Figure3-7 shows a help message for the main window’sbutton.

Figure 3-7. Window Item Help

Acknowledging Help Windows

Responding to a HelpWindow

You can acknowledge this kind of help window at any time:

1. Move the pointer to .

2. Click the mouse button or press .

The help window disappears.

You cannot save information directly fromWindow Item Help.However, the help windows that appear when you press thecommand’s button include information on each window elemenand allow you to save window contents.

Tab

F1 Help

Add

WARNING

OK

Return



argedowe

ter:

Displaying Command and Parameter Help

Information about command windows and parameters appears in a lwindow that includes a box and push buttons. You can leave this winon your desktop, use it for any command or parameter, and save thcontents of the box in a file.

Displaying CommandInformation

To display information about a command:

1. Display any command window or the main window.

2. Click .

TheHelp window appears. From the main window, use the pull-down menu’sHelp entry and selectMain Window. TheHelp entryalso includes a help message that describes the main menu bar.

Displaying ParameterInformation

To display information about a parameter group or a single parame

1. Display any command window that includes parameter groupsor single parameter names.

2. Double Click the mouse button on the parameter name or theparameter group name.

TheHelp window appears.

Help



sen

Figure3-8 shows theHelp window for theSet command.

Figure 3-8. Help Window

You can leave this kind of help window on your desktop as you uAnnex Manager. Each time you select command help or help oparameters, Annex Manager adds help text to the window.



andan

es

t edit

Understanding the Help Window Format

TheHelp window that stores command and parameter help uses a boxpush buttons. If you keep this window open on your desktop, you cuse it to display one or more help messages at any time.

Reading the Help Window Box

TheHelp window displays information in a single box. These messagmirror theAnnex Manager User Guide. They include:

• An overview of each command.

• Information about the command window’s format.

• Descriptions of the fields, buttons, and boxes that comprise thecommand window.

• Special notes or warnings about using the command.

• Short descriptions of each parameter eligible for AnnexManager processing.

You can save help messages that appear in this box, but you cannothem or delete portions of their text.

Using Push Buttons

TheHelp window uses the following push buttons:

• removes all existing text from the window.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichallows you to save the window’s contents in a file.

• removes theHelp window from your display.

Clear

Save Help

Close



oits

Saving Help Window Contents

You can leave theHelp window on your desktop and add information tit as you use Annex Manager. The help window allows you to save contents in a file at any time.

You can include parameter help inHelp windows by highlighting aparameter or an input area and pressingor .

Saving HelpInformation

To save help messages:

1. Display the Help window.

You can display this window by clicking any command’s

button or by clicking twice on a parameter name orparameter group.

2. Press .

TheSave Output/File Selection window (seeFigure3-9).

Figure 3-9. Save Output/Messages File Selection Window

F1

Help

Help

Save Help



the

t

ury.

.at

TheSave Output/Messages File Selection window displays the default textdirectory. It allows you to:

• Overwrite an existing file that you created by selecting itsname. When you choose an existing file, a confirmationwindow lets you verify your selection. You cannot overwrite afile that someone else created.

• Enter a new file name.

When you choose , Annex Manager stores the contents of

Help window in the file you specified.

Changing Site Defaults

TheSite Parameters command lets you change default parameter values thadisplay in theShow command if you select theVerbose Output button that displaysin help messages.You can use this command to inform users about yosite's default value so that they can configure Annexes appropriatel

Using this command changes values in help messages onlyYou cannot use it to change the parameter default settings ththe Annex uses for processing.

OK



r’s

andalue,

Displaying the Site Parameters Window

Using the SiteParametersCommand

TheSite Parameters command lets you change the display of a parametedefault value. To use this command:

1. Select Site Parameters from the Options menu.

TheSite Parameters window appears (seeFigure3-10).

Figure 3-10. Site Parameters Window

Understanding the Site Parameters Window Format

TheSite Parameters window is divided into two sections: the left-handsection lets you choose a parameter from an existing list. The right-hsection shows you the parameter's name and current help default vand lets you enter a new value for display.

WARNING



he list

ters

you

.

Choosing Lists and Parameters

This window’s option button allows you to choose a parameter list. Tbox below the option button displays each parameter included in theyou choose. The option button lets you select:

• Annex Only List to display all parameters, excluding portparameters.

• Async Port List to display asynchronous port parameters.

• Printer Port List to display printer port parameters.

• Enet Port List to display Ethernet port parameters.

• DSO Channel List to display DS0 channel parameters

• DS1 Line List to display DS1 line parameters.

When you choose a list, the box below this button displays all parameincluded in the list. You can select a single parameter from this list.

Understanding the Default Value Area

The window’s right-hand side displays current default values and letsenter a new default value for help messages and for theShow command.

• Before you select a parameter, the small box at the top of thewindow displaysnothing selected. When you choose aparameter, its name appears here.

• TheAM Default area displays Annex Manager's default for theparameter you chose. The Annex retains this value as itsdefault, regardless of the changes you enter with this command

• TheSite Default field allows you to enter a new value for theparameter you chose. Again, this value appears only in theparameter's help message and in theShow command if youselect theVerbose Output button. It does not change the valueused for processing.



Using Push Buttons

TheSite Parameters command uses the following push buttons:

• activates the command, changing the default valuethat appears in the help message and in theShow command.You can press and click twice on the parameter inthe box to check your work.

• removes your site default and replaces it withAnnex Manager's default.

• displays a window that explains theSite Parameterscommand.

• removes theSite Parameters window from yourdisplay.

Changing Default Values

Using the SiteParametersCommand

To change the default values that display:

1. Choose a list from the option button.

All parameters included in the list you choose will appear in thelist box.

2. Select a single parameter from the list.

Annex Manager’s default value for the parameter you choseappears in the box in the right side of the window.

Apply

Apply

Delete

Help

Close



3. Enter a value in the Site Default field.

This field appears as an option button or a text field, depending onthe parameter you selected. If it displays as an option button, youcan choose a value from the list. If it displays as a text field, youcan type a value.

4. Press .

Annex Manager changes the default value displayed in theparameter’s help message and in theShow command to the valueyou entered. This value appears for display purposes only.

Apply


ddes:

Chapter 4Using the Main Window

The main window includes Annex Manager’s pull-down menu anprovides access to Setup and Customize modes. This chapter inclu

• Using Setup and Customize Modes

• Understanding the Main Window Format

• Saving and Opening Annex Lists

• Displaying SNMP Information

Using Setup and Customize Modes

Annex Manager provides two modes:

• Setup mode allows you configure one or more Annexesquickly. It provides a series of windows that allow you tochoose basic Annex and port settings. The main windowappears in Setup mode when Annex Manager appears on yourdesktop.

• Customize mode allows you to set any Annex parameter. Youcan choose parameter values using a group of relatedparameters, or you can select one or more individualparameters.


Chapter 4 Using the Main Window Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

nexsplay

The main window first appears in Setup mode.

Figure 4-1. Main Window in Setup Mode

In Setup mode, you can use the main window to enter one or more Annames or IP addresses, add or remove Annexes from the list, and dithe Setup mode windows.

This mode allows you limited access to Annex Manager’s pull-down menu. You cannot chose theView Script, Create Script,Compare, Copy, Execute Script, Show, Set, User-defined ParameterGroups, or Site Parameters commands.

WARNING


Chapter 4 Using the Main WindowPart 1 Annex Manager Basics

nds

nds.

If you choose Customize from the Mode menu, Annex Manager expathe main window.

Figure 4-2. Main Window in Customize Mode

In Customize mode, you have access to all Annex Manager commaThis chapter explains how the main window works in Setup andCustomize modes.

WARNING

Specificationarea

Configurationarea



ect

sd

e,to

that

Understanding the Main Window Format

In Customize mode, the main window is dividedinto specification andconfiguration areas. These areas work together, allowing you to selAnnex names and parameter options.

• In the specification area, you can select one or more Annexesfrom a list. This area appears in Setup mode.

• In the configuration area, you choose the parameter groups orlists you will use for the Annexes you selected. This areaappears only in Customize mode.

The information required in the specification and configuration areadepends on the command you choose. When you complete requireinformation, you can use Setup windows and other Annex Managercommands.

The main window displays at all times when you use AnnexManager. In Customize mode, you can return to this window atany time to change list or parameter information. In Setup modyou must close all other Setup windows before you can return the main window.

Using the Specification Area

The main window’s specification area stores an Annex list. AnnexManager’s configuration and status commands work for the Annexesappear on the list.



xesist

rm

ot

eout

uou

5.0eter

Understanding the Automatic Annex List

When you start Annex Manager, the software finds all available Anneon your local network and places them in the main window’s Annex Lbox with their hardware types.

To disable this process, type-nod argument when you load AnnexManager (e.g., typegui_am -nod).

Annex Manager displays a new window over the main window to infoyou that the automatic discovery process is taking place.

Figure 4-3. Automatic Discovery Process Window

As Figure4-3 shows, this message window indicates that you have nentered a specificInternet Address or Subnet Mask. In addition, it includesthe default broadcast address for your local network, and a default timvalue.

You can use the-dn (Discover Network),-ds (Discover Subnetmask) and-dt (Discover Timeout) command arguments when yoload Annex Manager to override default settings. For example, ycan typegui_am -dn 132.245.88.0 -ds 255.255.255.0 -dt 5 to discoverAnnexes for the 132.245.88.0 internet address and 255.255.25subnet mask with a response time of 5 seconds. You cannot us-dnand-ds separately. Annex Manager does not require that you ena new timeout value.



nex

n

dts

When Annex Manager completes the discovery process, a windowinforms you about the number of Annexes that will be loaded in the AnList.

Figure 4-4. Creating Annex LIst Window

The main window’s Annex List box includes all available Annexes oyour local network.

Figure 4-5. Main Window with Annex List

You can save any list using theSave Annex List command or recreate a savelist using theOpen Annex List command. In addition, you can change lisusing and .Instructions for saving, opening, andchanging lists appear later in this chapter.

WARNING

Add Remove



ou

Creating an Annex List

Creating a List When you create an Annex list, Annex Manager verifies the name yenter and displays it, with its hardware type, in theAnnex List box. Tocreate an Annex list:

1. Enter a name or an IP address in the Annex field.

You can enter an Annex name or its IP address. If you add anAnnex to this list using one identifier (e.g., a name) and repeat theprocess using the other identifier (e.g. the IP address) for the sameAnnex, a message informs you that the Annex is already includedin the list.

If you enter a device with which Annex Manager cannotcommunicate via SNMP,NOT REACHABLE displays in place of theAnnex type. If you enter a device name that responds to SNMP butis not an Annex, or if you enter the name of an unknown device, awarning message informs you that the device cannot be added tothe list. For more information about theNOT REACHABLE

designation, see Chapter 20.

2. Enter the Annex’s SNMP community string in the Communityfield.

The default string for the Annex ispublic. This string appearsautomatically if you do not complete this field.

If you enter a valid Annex name and an incorrectSNMP community string, the Annex appears in the listasNOT REACHABLE.

3. Click or press .

The Annex name appears in the list box. All names appear in theorder in which you enter them.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for as many Annexes as you need.

If you usepublic as your community string, you canskip steps 2 and 3 by entering an Annex name andpressing or . The default communitystring displays and the Annex name appears in the list.

Add Return

Return Add



dpter.

the

e

If you need to add Annexes later, you can return to this area.

Figure 4-6. Annex List

You can save any list using the File menu’sSave Annex List command. Thismenu also provides theOpen Annex List command, which recreates a savelist. Instructions for saving and opening lists appear later in this cha

Selecting Items in Lists

Selecting an Annex Many Annex Manager commands require you to select Annexes frommain window’s list. To select one or more Annexes:

1. Create an Annex list.

For instructions, seeCreating an Annex List in this chapter.

2. Click the mouse button on each Annex you want.

You can select as many Annexes as you need. (Some commandsallow you to select only one Annex.) To deselect an Annex, hold

andclick on any highlighted item. To display Annex

information, choose or double click on any Annexname in the list.

After you create a list, you can use the Setup mode or the Customizmode’s configuration area.

Ctrl

Annex Info



ngee

Changing Annex Lists

As you use commands to configure Annexes, you may need to chayour original Annex list. You can change or verify list items at any timby using specification area buttons.

• adds an Annex to the existing list.

• removes one or more devices from the list.

• displays basic information about any Annex youselect.

Adding to a List To add an Annex to a list:

1. Enter an Annex name and a community string.

If you use the default community string (public) you do not need tocomplete this field.

2. Click or press .

The device you entered appears in the Annex list box.

Deleting from a List To delete a device from an existing list:

1. Select one or more devices from the list box.

Annex Manager highlights your selections.

2. Choose .

Annex Manager removes the devices you selected.

Add

Remove

Annex Info

Add Return

Remove



Using the Annex InfoButton

To display basic information about an Annex:

1. Select a single Annex from the list box.

Annex Manager highlights your selection. If you select more thanone Annex, a warning window informs you that theAnnex Info

window will contain information about the first Annex youselected. You can select an Annex and chooseVerify Annex State

from the Status menu to insure that the Annex Info window willdisplay current information.

2. Choose or press .

TheAnnex Info window appears.

Figure 4-7. Annex Info Window

Annex Info Return



e not

t:

Verifying Annex Status

Because an Annex list can contain Annexes or other devices that arreachable, you may want to verify the status of these items.

Verifying Status To verify information about an Annex list device or to change the lis

1. Select one or more items from the Annex list box.

2. Select Verify Annex State from the Status menu.

If you select an Annex whose status has changed fromNOT REACHABLE, the Annex’s type replaces the original message.If you select a device that is now reachable but is not an Annex,Annex Manager removes it from the list.

If an Annex has theNOT REACHABLE status because you added itusing an invalidCommunity string, and you useVerify Annex State

again, Annex Manager attempts to connect using the originalstring. If this string differs from the one currently displayed in theCommunity field, Annex Manager attempts to connect using thestring that appears in the field.



to

d the

.

Using the Configuration Area

In Customize mode, the main window’s configuration area allows youselect parameter options for processing. Some Annex Managercommands use the Annexes you select in the specification area anparameter options you select here.

The following example shows the configuration area’s initial display

Figure 4-8. Main Window Configuration Area

To complete this area, you need to select aParameter Option and chooseindividual items from the parameter list. You can then use theShow, Set,and other Annex Manager commands.

WARNING



use you

tton

Choosing Parameter Options

The Annex Manager commands available through Customize modethe Annexes you select in the specification area and the parametersselect in the configuration area.

The configuration area’sParameter Options button controls the lists thatdisplay below it:

• ThePre-defined Groups option displays system-supplied groupsof parameters. Each group is comprised of related Annexparameters.

• TheUser-defined Groups list displays the parameter groups youhave created and saved with theUser-defined Parameter Groupscommand.

• TheAnnex Only List option includes all parameters, excludingport parameters.

• TheAsync Port List option displays asynchronous portparameters

• ThePrinter Port List option includes printer port parameters.

• TheEnet Port List option displays Ethernet port parameters.

• TheDS0 Channels List option displays DS0 channel parametervalues.

• TheDS1 Line List option displays T1 DS1 port parameter values.

If you choosePre-defined Groups orUser-defined Groups,you can select one item. For all other options you canselect as many items as you need.

When you click the mouse, theParameter Options box displays thecorresponding list. When the list appears you can click the mouse buon each list item you want to select.



r

Selecting a ParameterOption

To select an option:

1. Hold the mouse on the Parameter Options button .

2. Highlight the option you want and release the button.

The list box changes according to the option you select.

Some commands require you to select an item from the list box. Foexample, theSet command changes parameter values based on yourselections in this area.

Selecting Groups orLists

To select items:

1. Hold the mouse button on the Parameter Options button, highlightyour choice, and release the button.

The appropriate list displays in the box.

2. Click the mouse button on each list item you want.

If you choosePre-defined Groups or User-defined Groups, you canselect one item. For all other options, you can select as many itemsas you need. Annex Manager highlights the items you choose. To

deselect an item, hold and click the mouse again on anyhighlighted item.

Using Push Buttons

The main window uses theShow andSet push buttons:

• invokes theShow command that allows you todisplay parameter values.

• invokes theSet command that allows you to changeparameter values.

Ctrl

Show

Set



,e ortry

n

Saving and Opening Annex Lists

When you create an Annex list, you can use the File menu’sSave Annex

List andOpen Annex List commands.Save Annex List stores the list youcreated;Open Annex List places it in the main window’s specification areaso that you can use it for Annex Manager processing. When you savopen a list, Annex Manager stores community string, timeout, and reinformation for each Annex.

Save Annex List andOpen Annex List use the file selection windowdescribed in Chapter 3. You should be familiar with this windowbefore you save and open Annex lists.

Saving an Annex List

Saving a List TheSave Annex List command stores any Annex list in a file. To save aAnnex list:

1. Move the pointer to the File menu and click on Save Annex List.

TheAnnex List Selection window appears.

Figure 4-9. Save Annex List Selection Window



e

. To

TheAnnex List Selection window displays the default list directory.We recommend strongly that you save files in this directory. Theselection window allows you to:

q Select a list that will overwrite an existing list. Whenyou select an existing list, a window appears that allowsyou to verify your choice. You cannot overwrite a listthat someone else created.

q Create a new list by entering a new file name or a pathand name and choosing .

When you complete this window, Annex Manager saves the list in thfile you specified.

Opening an Annex List

Opening a Saved List Open Annex List places any list you have saved in the main window’sspecification area, so you can use it for Annex Manager processingopen a saved list:

1. Move the pointer to the File menu and click on Open Annex List.

TheAnnex List Selection window appears.

OK



Figure 4-10. Open Annex List Selection Window

2. Choose a list from the Files box and click or press.

If you store lists in another directory, you can enter a path and filename in theSelection field.

Annex Manager attempts to communicate with each device on thelist, displaying its type or theNOT REACHABLE designation. Thelist appears in the main window’s specification area, replacing thenew list. For more detailed information about Annex Manager’sstandardFile Selection window, see Chapter 3.

OK

Return



ction

ns.

s,ex

Editing List Files

You can use an ascii editor to change the list files you save in the selewindow. Annex Manager verifies each file according to its first four lines.

When you edit these files, you must use Annex Manager conventioList files always begin with:

## DB_VERSION: V1.0# FORMAT: Annex Name | Community String | Timeout | Retries#

For example, you might enteremma| public | 2 | 2. You can enter commentlines as long as each line begins with the pound sign (#). Annex Managerprocessing ignores these lines.

Displaying SNMP Information

TheSNMP Information command lets you see and update timeout, retrieand community string information for one or more Annexes or for AnnManager’s defaults. This section includes:

• Displaying the SNMP Information Window

• Understanding the SNMP Information Window Format

• Viewing and Updating SNMP Information



:

Displaying the SNMP Information Window

Displaying the window SNMP Information appears in the Options menu. To display the window

1. Create an Annex list and select one or more Annexes.

For more information, seeCreating Annex Lists in this chapter.

If you are changing Annex Manager defaults, you donot need to create an Annex list first. You can beginwith step 2.

2. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select SNMPInformation.

TheSNMP Information window appears (seeFigure4-11).

Figure 4-11. SNMP Information Window

WARNING



ones.

ex.

Understanding the SNMP Information WindowFormat

TheSNMP Information window uses text fields, check buttons, and pushbuttons. You can update information that appears in the text fields foror more Annexes or you can change Annex Manager’s default value

Annex Manager saves the values you change usingSNMPInformation for an active session only. When you exit AnnexManager, the originalTimeout, Retries, andCommunity String valuesare reinstated.

Using Text Fields

SNMP Information uses the following text fields:

• Timeout specifies the length of time in seconds that AnnexManager waits for a response. You can enter a number ofseconds here. If you leave this field blank,SNMP Informationuses Annex Manager’s five second default.

• Retries controls the number of times that Annex Manager triesto reach an Annex or other device on the network. You canenter a number here. If you leave this field blank, the commanduses Annex Manager’s default of 0 (zero) retries.

• Community String specifies the SNMP password Annex Manageruses to communicate with Annexes. You can enter a new stringhere. If you do not complete this field, Annex Manager usespublic, which is the default community string.

TheSNMP Information command’s initial display does not includevalues for these fields. To display current Annex values or AnnManager’s default values, you must use orShow Default Show Annex



r:

Using Check Buttons

SNMP Information uses the following check buttons to change values foone or more Annexes or to change Annex Manager’s default values

• Update Selected Annex(es) on Apply changes values for one ormore Annexes.

• Update Default Values on Apply changes Annex Manager’s SNMPdefaults based on the values in the text fields.

Using Push Buttons

SNMP Information uses the following push buttons:

• activates the command and changesTimeout, Retries,andCommunity String values.

• displays SNMP default values in the window’s textfields.

• displays current Annex values in the window’s textfields. If you selected multiple Annexes that have differentvalues, a warning window informs you that theSNMPInformation will not display these values.

• displays a window explaining this command.

• removes theSNMP Information window from yourdisplay.

Apply

Show Default

Show Annex

Help

Close



Viewing and Updating SNMP Information

Using the SNMPInformationCommand

To check current SNMP information or to change Annex values:


For information.Creating Annex Lists in this chapter. If you want tochange Annex Manager’s SNMP default values only, you can skipthis step.

2. Move the pointer to the Option menu and choose SNMPInformation.

3. Enter new values for Timeout, Retries and/or Community String oruse or to display current values.

always displays Annex Manager’s default values. The

values that display when you use depend on theAnnexes you selected in the main window:

q If you select a single Annex or multiple Annexes thathave the same values, text fields display current values.

q If you select multiple Annexes that have different values,a warning window informs you that where differencesexist, values will not display. If you chooseunder this circumstance, Annex Manager uses itsdefault values.

4. Select Update Selected Annex(es) on Apply and/or Update DefaultValues on Apply.

You can select one or both check buttons.

5. Choose .

Annex Manager changes Annex or default values based on thecheck buttons you selected and on values in the text fields.

Show Default Show Annex

Show Default

Show Annex

Apply

Apply


x

s.

t.

x For

gs.ased

Chapter 5Setup Mode Basics

Annex Manager’s Setup mode appears when you first use AnneManager software. This mode allows you to configure one or moreAnnexes by setting the most commonly used parameters.

The Setup mode limits your access to Annex Manager commandIf you use this mode, you can use only theOpen Annex List, SaveAnnex List, Boot, Broadcast, Discover Annexes, PRI Internal Modems,Reset, SNMP Information, Confirm Auto Reset, and allStatuscommands. Commands that are unavailable appear in grey tex

You can use the menu’sMode heading to switch from Setup toCustomize mode. Customize mode lets you set individual Anneparameters and provides access to all main menu commands.detailed information about using Customize mode, see Part 3.

A series of Setup mode windows allows you to change Annex settinEach window groups related settings and provides access to fields bon your previous selections. You can select:

• TheGeneral window to change the most commonly used Annexsettings. If you press this window’s button, a secondwindow allows you to view and change additional Annexsettings.

• TheAsync Ports window to select one or more ports. When youpress here, you can change port and modemconfigurations.

• TheCall Defaults window to set the most commonly-usedparameters for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes.

More

Edit Port


Chapter 5 Setup Mode Basics Part 2 Setup Mode

asins

• TheChannels window to assign remote addresses to ISDNPrimary Rate Annex channels.

• TheT1/PRI Line window to set the ISDN Primary Rate Annex’sswitch type.

• TheSecurity window to change security settings.

• TheAppleTalk window to configure Annexes that use the sameAppleTalk zone.

• The IP window to select Internet address and interface routingsettings.

• The IPX window to choose an IPX frame type.

• TheLAT window to change LAT servers and group codes.

Setup mode uses windows that allow you to change Annex settingswell as Help, Warning, and Confirmation windows. This section explaSetup mode windows in the following sections:

• Understanding Setup Windows

• Displaying Setup Windows

• Understanding Setup Window Fields

• Using Push Buttons

• Using Confirmation Windows


Chapter 5 Setup Mode BasicsPart 2 Setup Mode

.

r.

r to

Understanding Setup Windows

Setup mode uses the following types of windows:

• The main window provides access to Setup mode windows.Although it always appears, you cannot return to it unless youfirst close all Setup mode windows.

• Setup mode lets you change frequently-used settings inGeneral,Async Ports, Call Defaults, Channels, PRI Line, Security, AppleTalk,IP, IPX, andLAT windows. You can display a window byselecting an option from theSetup field that appears in eachwindow. When you complete the window’s fields and press

, your changes take effect. You can then chooseanotherSetup field option or press to return to themain window.

• A Confirmation window appears if you change settings and press rather than . This window informs you that

your changes will not take effect if you continue the closingprocess.

• A Reset Parameters window informs you that Annex Managerneeds to reset Annexes or ports for your changes to take effectThis window appears only when you selectConfirm Auto Resetfrom the main window’s pull-down menu.

• Help windows appear when you press or , as theydo for all Annex Manager modes and commands. In addition,the Setup mode provides a single line at the bottom of eachwindow that gives you a brief summary for each field. A shortmessage appears automatically as you move the mouse pointe

TheReset Parameters,Warning, andHelp windows are the same for all AnnexManager windows. For more information about these windows, refeChapter 3.

Apply

Close

Close Apply

Help F1



en

Displaying Setup Windows

You must begin with the main window to display Setup windows. Whyou press in the main window and the first Setup mode windowappears, you can display additional windows.

Using the Main Window

To display the Setup mode’s windows, you must start from AnnexManager’s main window (seeFigure5-1). For detailed information aboutthe main window, see Chapter 4.

Figure 5-1. Setup Mode Main Window

Setup



Displaying the firstSetup Window

To display the first Setup window:


For information about creating Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. Press .

TheGeneral window appears (seeFigure5-2). Like all other Setupmode windows, this window includes theSetup field.

Figure 5-2. General Window

TheSetup field at the top of this window also appears in theAsync Ports,

Call Defaults, Channels, T1/PRI Line, Security, AppleTalk, IP, IPX, andLAT windows.

You can use it to display another Setup window.

Setup

WARNING



s

ntertings

tainace

Using the Setup Field

TheSetup field controls the windows that appear in Annex Manager’sSetup mode. When you first use Setup mode, theGeneral window appears.This window includes theSetup field, as does any window that appearwhen you choose one of theSetup options. You can useSetup from anywindow in which it appears.

Using the Setup Field To use this field:

1. Display any window that includes the Setup field.

TheGeneral window displays first.

2. Move the pointer to the Setup field and select any availableoption.

Understanding Setup Window Fields

When you select an option from theSetup field, Annex Manager displaysanother window that allows you to change Annex settings. Once you eor select new values and press , Annex Manager changes seton the Annexes you selected.

Your selections in a Setup mode window may not allow you to use cerfields. Fields that are unavailable appear in grey text: you cannot plthe cursor in these fields or change their settings. For example, if theAsync

Ports window’sModem button is not selected, you cannot use theModem

Name field, or theEdit Modem window.

Apply

Edit Modem



ys aports

e

if

When a Setup window first appears, each field automatically displavalue based on the Annexes or ports you selected. If the Annexes or you selected:

• Have the same settings for a field, the current value appearsautomatically. For example, if you choose several ports that usethe same type of modem, modem’s name appears in theNamefield.

• Do not have values set for a text field, that field displays “ “.

• Have different settings, a field does not display a value:

• Text fields and option menus appear blank.

• Radio buttons appear with no buttons selected.

If you select multiple Annexes or ports and you wantto view or change values for a single Annex or port,you can return to the main window or theEdit AsyncPorts window to select a single Annex or port.

Using Push Buttons

When you choose aSetup field option, the windows that appear use thfollowing push buttons:

• sets any changes you made in a window for theAnnexes you selected. The Reset Parameters window appears you chose theConfirm Auto Reset option from the mainwindow’s menu if the changes you made require the Annexesyou selected to be reset. If you did not chooseConfirm AutoReset, Annex Manager resets values without notifying you.

Apply



ove:

• displays current values for all fields in a window. Youcan change values in the window and then press todisplay current values for the Annexes you selected. Thisbutton works only if you have not yet pressed .

• displays a window explaining each Setup modewindow.

• removes a window from your display and returns youto the main window.

TheGeneral andAsync Ports options use a series of windows. Thesewindows use the following push buttons in addition to those listed ab

• displays an additional window related to the windowin which it appears. This button appears in theGeneral andEditAsync Ports windows.

• returns you the previous window in a series. Afteryou press , you must press on the firstwindow in the series. Annex Manager will not change Annexsettings until you press . appears in theGeneral (continued), Edit Async Ports andEdit Modem windows.

• closes a window and displays the previous window ina series. If you change values and then press , AnnexManager will not store the new values you selected.appears in theGeneral (continued), Edit Async Ports andEditModem windows.

• displays theEdit Async Ports window.

• gives you the current status of each port in theAsyncPorts window list.

• displays theEdit Modem window.

• deletes modems defined in the Annex configurationfile.

Restore

Restore

Apply

Help

Close

More

OK

OK Apply

Apply OK

Cancel

Cancel

Cancel

Edit Port

Update

Edit Modem

Remove



her

he

Using Confirmation Windows

If you enter or select new values in any window and press ratthan , Annex Manager displays a confirmation windowinforming you that your changes will not take effect if you continue tclosing process.

Figure 5-3. Closing Confirmation Window

You can press to continue closing the window or toreturn to the window, where you should press .

Close

Apply

OK Cancel

Apply


nge

s:

Chapter 6Selecting General Settings

Annex Manager provides twoGeneral windows. You can change basicAnnex settings in the first window and display a second window to chaadditional settings.

This chapter describes the General windows in the following section

• Using the General Window

• Using the General (continued) Window

• Selecting General Settings

Displaying theWindow

To display the firstGeneral window, press in the main window.

Figure 6-1. General Window

Setup


Chapter 6 Selecting General Settings Part 2 Setup Mode

g

Using the General Window

TheGeneral window includes basic Annex information inBoot Info, Logging,andTime boxes.

TheBoot Info box uses the following fields:

• Default Host identifies the host used for the host server and for allservices unless you enter host addresses in theGeneral(continued) window. When this window first appears, theDefaultHost field displays the current address in the Annex'spref_load_addr parameter.

When you configure an Annex for the first time, theSecurityPreferred Host, DHCP Preferred Host, Nameserver Preferred Host,Nameserver Alternate Host, Time Host, Logging Host, and Dump Hostfields are0.0.0.0. In this situation, Annex Manager sets those fieldsto the address in theHost field. You can change these addresses usintheGeneral (continued) window.

• Load Sequence specifies available network interfaces and theorder in which they are used for a down-line load or an up-linedump. You can list more than one interface by using commas toseparate interface names. You can enter:

• net to specify a local area network.

• sl + port number (e.g.,sl2) to specify a SLIP line. If you entersl and a port number, you must enter an address in theslip_load_dump_host parameter.

• self to instruct an Annex to boot its image from the FlashROMs. Since the Annex cannot dump back to itself, youshould include a secondary interface here by enteringself,net or self,sl+port number.


Chapter 6 Selecting General SettingsPart 2 Setup Mode

t

• Boot Image contains the image file name loaded by defaultwhen the Annex is booted. This name can use up to 100characters.

• Config Filedefines the name for the configuration filemaintained on the boot host. The Annex uses this file forinformation on gateways, rotaries, macros, and services. It musreside in the/usr/spool/erpcd/bfs directory.

TheLogging box provides the following fields:

• Log messages at and above determines the priority levels that theAnnex logs. You can choose:

• emergency to log hardware failures.

• alert to log all Annex reboots.

• critical to log configuration and initialization problems such asconfiguration file format errors or lack of memory.

• error to log all line initialization errors.

• warning to log minor problems.

• notice to log time server queries and information aboutresponses.

• info to start and end CLI sessions and Annex jobs created byrlogin, telnet, connect, ping and tap commands.

• debug to start and end any Annex process.

• all to log messages at all levels.

• none to disable message logging.



see

,ord

TheTime box includes the following fields:

• Use daylight savings in allows the Annex to adjust for daylightsavings time in your geographic location. You can select asingle location from the list.

• Minutes west of GMT defines the time zone in which the Annexresides. You can enter a positive number of minutes for timezones west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or a negativenumber for time zones east of GMT. For example, you wouldenter 300 for New York, since it is five hours west of GMT, or -60 for Paris, which is one hour east of GMT.

Using Push Buttons

TheGeneral window uses the , , , , and

push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, Chapter 5.

Using the General (continued) Window

TheGeneral (continued) window allows you to change additional securityDHCP, nameserver, time, logging, software options, dump, and passwsettings for the Annexes selected in the main window.

More Apply Restore Help

Close




To display this window, press on theGeneral window.

Figure 6-2. General (continued) Window

More

WARNING



to

ings

is

toe

ings

s

Understanding the General (continued) Window

This window allows you to change basic Annex settings in addition those included in the first window.

TheSecuritybox provides host information and broadcast message settfor Annex security. It includes the following fields and buttons:

• Preferred Host contains the IP address of the security host.

• Alternate Host contains the IP address of the backup securityhost.

• Broadcast On and OFF determine whether or not an Annexbroadcasts for security validation if the preferred securityservers are not available.

• The button activates the ACP security server,including security for AppleTalk, CLI, and SLIP/PPPconnections.

• The button deactivates security.

If the selected Annex uses these security systems, the On button selected when the window first appears. In this case, theenable_security parameter is activated. If you change the setting OFF, Annex Manager deactivates security but does not change thenable_security parameter setting.

TheDHCP box provides host information and broadcast message settfor AnnexDHCP. It includes the following fields and buttons:

• Preferred Host contains the IP address of the DHCP server thatthe client attempts to use as the primary source for DHCPservices.

• Alternate Host contains the IP address of the DHCP server thatthe client attempts to use as a backup source for DHCP servicewhen the primary DHCP server does not respond. backupsecurity server.

On

OFF



he

es:

The DHCP fields are optional and may be 0.0.0.0. When enabled, tclient broadcasts DHCP messages.

• Broadcast On and OFF determine whether or not an Annexbroadcasts for a DHCP server if the preferred DHCP serversare not available.

• The button activates the ACP security server.

TheNameserver box defines a type of name service and host address

• Preferred Service defines the type of name service used with theNameserver box’sPreferred Host field. You can selectnone, dns,or ien_116.

• Alternate Service defines the type of name service used with theNameserver box’sAlternate Host field. The Annex uses thisservice and host when the service specified in thePreferredService field is not available.You can selectnone, dns, or ien_116.

• Preferred Host contains a host address for thePreferred Serviceyou selected.

• Alternate Host contains a host address for theAlternate Serviceyou selected.

TheTime box controls the time server host:

• Host lists the IP address that an Annex queries for time service.You can enter:

On



.

.

ou

x

• A loopback address (127.0.0.1) to disable time service queries

• A host address to send queries to a specific host.

• A broadcast address to send queries to a specific network ornetworks instead of sending a general broadcast to all networks

• 0.0.0.0 to direct the Annex to query the boot host.

TheLogging box specifies a log host for the Annexes you selected:

• Host contains an IP address for the host that logs Annexmessages. If you enter0.0.0.0, the Annex broadcasts its logmessages.

TheSoftware Options box lists the options you can use on the Annexes yselected:

• The left-handSoftware Options box activates routing andfiltering, AppleTalk functions and parameters, IPX, and the CLItn3270 command. You must contact your supplier to obtain thekey value for the features you choose. Available options appearin black text; those that are unavailable appear in grey.

• The right-handSoftware Options box restricts access to LAT-specific Annex commands, parameters, functions, and to theLAT protocol within the Annex. You must contact your supplierto obtain a LAT key. After you set the key, your systemadministrator must reboot the Annex.

You can use theSoftware Options box only when you select a single Annein the main window.

TheDump box allows you to change dump host information:

• Dump Host contains an IP address for the host on which theAnnex creates dump files. If you do not want dump files, youcan enter0.0.0.0.

ThePassword box allows you to change the superuser password.



ter 5.

• Superuser Password modifies the Annex's administrativepassword used for access to the superuser CLI commands andfor administrative access to an Annex. This password overridesthe CLI lock and virtual CLI passwords. For security reasons,Annex Manager displays this value asset or unset. Thesepasswords use 1 to 16 characters.

Using Push Buttons

TheGeneral (continued) window uses the , , and

push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chap

Selecting General Settings

To view or change values in theGeneral windows:

1. Create an Annex list, select one or more Annexes, and press.

TheGeneral window appears.

2. Enter or Select new values in any field.

If you complete your work in the first window and do not need touse the second window, go to step 5.

3. Press .

TheGeneral (continued) window appears.

4. Enter or select new values in any field and press .

TheGeneral window reappears.

5. Press .

OK Help Cancel

Setup

More

OK

Apply



TheReset Parameters window appears if you selected theConfirm

Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the settings youchanged require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did notselectConfirm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes withoutnotifying you.



set

Chapter 7Setting Asynchronous Port Values

Annex Manager’s Setup mode provides windows you can use toport values for the Annexes you select:

• TheAsync Ports window allows you to select the ports whosesettings you want to view or change.

• TheEdit Async Ports andEdit Async Ports (continued) windowsinclude the most commonly used port and modem settings.

This chapter describes these windows in the following sections:

• Selecting Async Ports

• Using the Edit Async Ports Window

• Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window

• Selecting Async Port Settings


Chapter 7 Setting Asynchronous Port Values Part 2 Setup Mode

y

Selecting Async Ports


TheAsync Ports window allows you to select individual ports. To displathis window selectAsync Ports from theSetup field.

Figure 7-1. Async Ports Window


Chapter 7 Setting Asynchronous Port ValuesPart 2 Setup Mode

ou

Understanding the Async Ports Window

TheAsync Ports window allows you to select the ports whose settings ywant to view or change. It provides port information in itsAsync Ports boxas well as several push buttons.

This window provides port information in itsAsync Ports box. It includesthe following categories:

• Annex Name displays the name or IP address of each Annex youselected in the main window.

• Port# provides the number of each port.

• Mode displays the current setting for the type of access on eachport.

• Modem Type includes the name of the modem attached to eachport.

• Status provides the current state for each port.

The information in this box is current as of the time you selectedAsync Ports in theSetup field. You can press at any time todisplay the most recent values.

You can select one or more ports by clicking the mouse in theAsync Ports

box.

Update



Using Push Buttons

This window uses the , , , and pushbuttons:

• displays theEdit Async Ports window. You can use thisbutton only after you select one or more ports in the list.

• gives you the current status of each port in the list.

• displays a window explaining theAsync Portswindow.

• removes the Async Ports window from your displayand returns you to the main window.

Using the Edit Async Ports Window

After you select ports in theAsync Ports window, you can change modemand interface settings in theEdit Async Ports window. In addition, you canuse push buttons to display theEdit Async

Ports (continued) window and theEdit Modems window.


To display this window, select one or more ports in theAsync Ports windowand press .

Edit Port Update Help Close

Edit Port

Update

Help

Close

Edit Port



Figure 7-2. Edit Async Ports Window



ds in

orts.

Understanding the Edit Async Ports Window

TheEdit Async Ports window allows you to view and change modem aninterface settings for the ports you selected. It groups related settingboxes, and provides access to theEdit Async Ports (continued) window andto theEdit Modem window.

ThePort Options box determines whether the ports you selected usemodems and defines the type of access that is available on these p

• TheType box contains theModem, No Modem, Disable, andOtherbuttons. These buttons define several settings for modemconfiguration. The button you choose here, combined with yourselections in theDirection box, determines the availableselections in theMode box.

• Modem indicates that the ports you selected will use themodem specified in theEdit Modem window’sModem Name

field. This button selects theModem Signals button and setsFlow Control to Hardware.

• No Modem indicates that the ports you select will not use amodem. It deselectsModem Signals, setsFlow Control toSoftware, and disables theModem box.

• Disable disables the port. If you select this button, youcannot enter additional information in the window.

• Other indicates that one or more ports you selected currentlydefine x25, tn3270, pc, terminal, or printer as the type ofdevice attached to a port. You can return to the main windowand use Annex Manager’s Customize mode to check thesevalues. If theOther button is selected when this windowappears, you can select theModem, No Modem, or Disable

buttons. You cannot select theOther button.



• TheDirection box determines whether the port transmits and/orreceives data.

• Theoutgoing andincoming buttons allow the port to useoutgoing or incoming connections. You can selectoutgoing, incoming, or both. These buttons, combined withyour selections in theType box, determine theMode boxoptions you can use. When an option is unavailable, itappears in grey: you cannot select such options.

• The Mode box defines the type of access available on a port.This box includes the following buttons:

• Autodetect allows a port to identify an incoming packet'sprotocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.

• Serial provides access to modems, serial line printers, andother serial devices attached to this outgoing port.

• PPP specifies that a port can perform as a network interfaceusing PPP.

• ARAP specifies that a port can perform as a networkinterface using ARAP.

• IPX allows dial-in Novell access with the Fastened II client.

• Telnet automatically connects a user to a host via the telnetcommand. You can specify the host and arguments in theRlogin/Telnet box’sArgument field.

• SLIP specifies that a port can perform as a network interfaceusing SLIP.

• CLI allows a port connected to a terminal or incomingmodem access to the Annex Command Line Interface(CLI). CLI provides access to the network and connectionsto other hosts via the telnet, connect, rlogin, and tn3270commands.



• Dedicated automatically connects a user with the hostdefined in theDedicated box. Once you enter a host addressthere, you can choose whether the port will communicatevia telnet or rlogin.

• NDP allows dial-in with authentication by Novell, dial-out,and routing.

• Rlogin automatically connects a user to a host via the rlogincommand. You can specify the host and arguments in theRlogin/Telnet box’sArgument field.

• Other indicates that one or more Annexes you selectedcurrently use modes that differ from the options displayedin theMode box. You can use the Set command in AnnexManager’s Customize mode to check these values, or youcan select another option here. You cannot select theOther

button.

If you selectAutodetect, PPP, ARAP, IPX, or SLIP, AnnexManager does not allow an Annex to determine modemspeed automatically. If you selectSerial, CLI, Telnet,Dedicated, NDP, orRlogin and the Annexes you chose areset to select modem speed automatically, Annex Managerdoes not change this condition.

For more information about modem speeds, refer to theAutobaud andSpeed parameters described inChapter 19 and to theRemote Annex Administrator’sGuide for UNIX.



the

.

TheLine Control box defines flow control and line speed settings using following fields:

• TheModem Signals box indicates whether the ports you selectedwill use a modem for flow control. When you select theOnbutton, the ports and modem use DCD, DTR, and DSR signals

• The Flow Control box specifies the type of signals an Annex usesto control data transfer. If you select:

• None, the port does not use hardware or software flowcontrol.

• Hardware, the port uses CTS/RTS signals.

• Software, the port uses xon/xoff signals.

• Other displays if the Annexes you selected have flow controlset to a value that is notHardware, Software, orNone. If youselect another setting here, you cannot selectOther again.

• The Speed box defines the baud rate of the asynchronous linebetween a device and an Annex. The value you enter mustmatch the device's baud rate. For a port with a modem,Speed istypically set to the maximum speed that the modem supports(e.g.,115200).

All Annexes do not support all port speeds. Please referto your Annex hardware guides for detailed information.



TheModem box lists modem names and provides access to theEdit Modem

window.

• The field in this box specifies the type of modem attached to theports you selected. You can display a list that includes allmodems defined in the Annex configuration file and inincludefiles for the Annexes you selected.

This list displays names from the Annex configurationfile followed by names in anyinclude file. If you edit amodem definition that originates in aninclude file, AnnexManager copies the definition, places the edited versionin the Annex configuration file, and displays its name.

You cannot configure modem information if you selectmultiple Annexes that do not use the same configurationfile on the same host. (The configuration file does not haveto reside on the same host as does Annex Manager.) Inaddition, you cannot configure modem information if youselect one or more Annexes where the preferred boot hostis different from the actual boot host.

The modem name that displays when the window first appearsdepends on your port selections:

• If you selected one port, or multiple ports that use the samemodem, this field shows the current modem name.

• If you selected ports that use different modems, this fieldwill be blank. If you continue to use this window and donot enter a name here, Annex Manager will not change

modem values when you press .

• If the modem name is not set for the ports you selected,<undefined> appears.

Apply



• If the ports you selected use a modem that does not appearin the list, Annex Manager adds the name to the list, displaysa warning window, and creates a default modem definition

in the configuration file. You can press to display,change, or delete this definition.

For detailed information about theEdit Modem Window, refer toChapter 9.

The Interface Options box displays information in theSettings, Address

Assignment, Interface Protocol, AppleTalk, Rlogin/Telnet, andDedicated boxes.

• The Settings box displays address and protocol information forthe ports you selected.

• Local Address defines the IP address for the port on theAnnex side of a link when the Annex does not obtain theaddress from the host’sacp_dialup file.

• Remote Address contains the IP address for the port at theother end of the serial line if the Annex does not obtain theaddress from theacp_dialup file.

• Subnet Mask contains the Annex’s IP subnet mask. Thisfield’s initial display is based on the network portion of theAnnex’s IP address.

Entering an incorrect Subnet Mask can cause routingproblems.

• The Address Assignment box allows an Annex to request anaddress from a host-based server. TheAddress Assignment

buttons are used in conjunction with theLocal Address andRemote Address fields:

• If you select theSecurity Server button, the Annexsearches theacp_dialup file for the remote client’s username and sets local and remote addresses and subnetmask.

Edit Modem



If the file contains a matching user name and:

• The local and remote addresses exist in theacp_dialup file, the Annex uses those values.

• Theacp_dialup file contains a remote address butnot a local address, the Annex uses the remote addressfrom the file and the Annex’s IP address for the localaddress.

If the file does not contain a matching user name, theAnnex uses values from theLocal Address, Remote

Address, andSubnet Mask fields:

• If both fields contain addresses, the Annex uses thesevalues.

• If both fields are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiatesfor both addresses with the remote PPP client. Theconnection is denied for a remote SLIP client.

If the file contains a local address and the remote addressis set to0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address andnegotiates with the remote PPP client for the remoteaddresses. The connection is denied for a remote SLIPclient.

• If you select thedhcp button, the Annex contacts aDHCP server to request a remote address.

• If you select theLocal button, the Annex uses the IPaddress at the other end of the serial line.

• The Interface Protocol box lists the control protocols for whichthe Annex negotiates. You can select a single button or anycombination of the following buttons:

• atcp specifies AppleTalk Protocol Control Protocol.

• ipcp specifies Internet Protocol Control Protocol.



ct

• ipxcp specifies the Internet Packet Exchange ControlProtocol.

• ccp specifies the Compression Control Protocol.

TheAppleTalk box uses theNode ID field.

• Node ID specifies the AppleTalk hint used by the Annex on aspecific port. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimalnotation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot:

• A network address ranges from 0 to 65534 (0x0000 to0xFFFE).

• A node address ranges from 0 to 254 (0x00 to 0xFE).

For example, 191.253, 0x00FR.253 and 191.0xFD designatethe same address. You can enter numbers ranging from 0 to65534.255.

TheRlogin/Telnet box allows you to specify arguments forrlogin andtelnet

connections.

• Argument contains the commands used when you selectRlogin orTelnet in theMode box. You should include a host name oraddress here. You can enter up to 100 characters.

TheDedicated box allows you to choose a host and therlogin or telnet

applications for ports connected directly to a host.

• Host Address contains the IP address of a host to which this portwill connect.

• Method selects the application to which an Annex port canconnect. You can select theRlogin or Telnet button.

When an option is unavailable it appears in grey: you cannot selesuch options.



.

l.

Using Push Buttons

This window uses , , , and pushbuttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5

Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window

Annex Manager’sEdit Async Ports (continued) window allows you to selectport settings for PPP security, inactivity timers, and the LAT protoco


To display this window, press in theEdit Async Ports window.

Figure 7-3. Edit Async Ports (continued) Window

Apply Help Close More

More

WARNING



t

eer.

y

Understanding the Edit Async Ports (continued)Window

TheEdit Async Ports (continued) window provides access to additional porsettings inPPP Security, Time, andLAT boxes.

ThePPP Security box defines data for authorization on a remote PPP pThis box uses the following fields:

• Remote Username contains the user name by which the Annexidentifies itself when the remote PPP peer asks forauthentication. This name can contain up to 15 characters.

• Remote Password defines the password that the Annex useswhen the remote PPP peer requests authentication. For securitreasons, Annex Manager displays this parameter's value assetor unset. This name can contain up to 15 characters.

TheTime box defines activity on the ports you selected and controlsinactivity timers.

• CLI Inactivity Timer specifies the amount of time in minutes thatthe Annex remains idle before disconnecting a CLI sessionfrom a port. Entering 0 (zero) disables the timer; entering 255causes the Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its lastjob. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255. Unlike theport inactivity timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLIsession with active jobs.

• Port Inactivity Timer specifies the number of minutes that a portcan remain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminatesall sessions and resets the port. You can use theInput is ActivityandOutput Is Activity buttons to define activity as input to the portor output from the port. If you do not use these buttons, thetimer runs independent of activity. You can enter any number ofminutes up to 255 minutes.



.,

see

rts:

• Input Is Activity buttons define activity as input. If you click theOn button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it receivesinput at the port.

• Output Is Activity buttons defines activity as output. If you clicktheOn button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when itsends output from the port.

TheLAT box defines group codes.

• Authorized Groups specifies the LAT protocol remote groupcodes that are accessible to users on an Annex port. You canenter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g., 1, 5,200-255). You can use any number between 0 and 255.

Using Push Buttons

TheEdit Async Ports (continued) window uses the , , and

push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons,Chapter 5.

Selecting Async Port Settings

This section gives you directions for using Annex Manager’s threeAsync

Ports windows.

Selecting Ports Before you can change port settings, you need to select specific po

1. Create an Annex list, select one or more Annexes, and press.

TheGeneral window appears.

2. Select Async Ports from the Setup button.

TheAsync Ports window appears.

OK Help

Cancel

Setup



3. Choose one or more ports from the list.

The next window’s settings display current values based on yourselections here. If you choose ports whose settings differ, somefields in the next window may be blank, or may not be accessible.

If the Async Ports window has been displayed on your screen for

some time or if you have changed values, you can pressto see the most recent port status.

4. Press .

TheEdit Async Ports window appears.

Changing PortSettings

TheEdit Async Ports window displays current settings for the ports youselected and allows you to change these settings:

1. Display the Edit Async Ports window.

2. Select buttons in the Port Options box that are appropriate for theports you chose.

The selections you make here control the availability of theremaining fields. For detailed information about thePort Options

box, seeUnderstanding the Edit Async Ports Window earlier in thischapter.

3. Press .

TheEdit Async Ports (continued) window appears.

4. Enter or change information in the PPP Security, Time, or LATboxes.

Available fields depend on your selections in the previous window.For detailed information, seeUnderstanding the Edit Async Ports(continued) Window earlier in this chapter.

5. Press .

TheEdit Async Ports window reappears.

Update

Edit Port

More

OK



6. Press .




Apply


esangede

le.

icetup,

orts

B

.

Chapter 8Setting ISDN Primary Rate

Annex Values

Annex Manager allows you to configure ISDN Primary Rate Annexin its Setup and Customize modes. The Setup mode allows you to chvalues for the most commonly-used parameters. The Customize moprovides access to all parameters and to the Annex configuration fi

ISDN Primary Rate Annexes use circuit-switched B channels for vo(modem) and data calls and packet-switched D channels for call seteardown, and connection management over dedicated trunk lines.

• In the United States, Canada, and Japan, PRI service uses T1trunk lines. A single T1 line supports 23 B channels and one Dchannel.

• In Europe and the Pacific Rim, PRI service uses E1 trunk lines.A single E1 line supports 30 B channels and 2 D channels.

The PRI line interface and the Ethernet port are the only physical pon the ISDN Primary Rate Annex. When a user dials in to an ISDNPrimary Rate Annex, calls are assigned dynamically to an availablechannel. The Annex accepts:

• Voice (modem) calls by negotiating for available B channelsand modems and by checking configuration parameter settings

• V.120 calls by using a terminal adapter (TA) to convert analogdata into V.120 frames. After negotiating for B channels,resources, and configuration parameters, the Annex convertsthe V.120 frames into asynchronous data streams.

• Synchronous PPP calls from PCs with adapter cards thatsupport PPP encapsulation over ISDN. Like modem and V.120calls, these calls require negotiation for B channels, resources,and configuration parameters.


Chapter 8 Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values Part 2 Setup Mode

DNides

The ISDN Primary Rate Annex can assign a call to any available Bchannel. It uses:

• Internal defaults for all parameters that are not set. The Annexuses these values unless you set Call Default and/or SessionParameter Block values.

• Call Default parameters settings that apply to all incomingcalls. These parameters are similar to those you use forasynchronous ports.

• Session Parameter Blocks (SPB), stored in thepri section ofyour Annex configuration file, include Setup criteria andparameter values that the Annex uses to match incoming callsand override existing parameter values.

For detailed information about SPBs, refer to theRemote Annex 6300Supplement to the Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX.

You can use Annex Manager’s Customize mode to set individual ISPrimary Rate Annex parameters. Annex Manager’s Setup mode provseveral windows you can use for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes:

• TheCall Defaults window allows you to set the most commonlyused PRI parameter and modem settings.

• TheChannels window allows you to set a remote address foreach B-channel.

• TheT1/PRI Line window allows you to select the type of centraloffice switch that your telephone company provides.

• TheSecurity window controls security systems on the Annex.For detailed information about this window, see Chapter 10.

This chapter describes these windows in the following sections:

• Using the Call Defaults Window

• Using the Channels Window

• Using the T1/PRI Line Window


Chapter 8 Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex ValuesPart 2 Setup Mode

he

Using the Call Defaults Window

TheCall Defaults window lets you change commonly-used parametersettings for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes. In addition, you can use tEdit Modems window to view and change internal modem definitions.


To display theCall Defaults window, selectCall Defaults from theSetup field.

Figure 8-1. Call Defaults Window



e

rylues.

ves

the

Understanding the Call Defaults Window

TheCall Defaults window allows you to view and change settings for thISDN Primary Rate Annexes you selected.Call Defaults groups relatedsettings in boxes and provides access to theEdit Modem window. The fieldsin theEdit Modemwindow apply to all calls established on an ISDN PrimaRate Annex unless settings in the configuration file override these va

TheDirection box determines whether the port transmits and/or receidata.

• Theoutgoing andincoming buttons allow the channel to useoutgoing or incoming connections. You can selectoutgoing,incoming, or both. These buttons, combined with yourselections in theType box, determine theMode options you canuse. When an option is unavailable, it appears in grey: youcannot select such options

The Mode box defines the type of access available. This box includesfollowing buttons:

• Autodetect allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to identify anincoming packet's protocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.

• Serial provides access to modems, serial line printers, and otherserial devices.

• PPP specifies that a connection can perform as a networkinterface using PPP.

• IPX allows dial-in Novell access with the Fastlink II client.

• Telnet automatically connects a user to a host via the telnetcommand. You can specify the host and arguments in theRlogin/Telnet box’sArgument field.

• SLIP specifies that a call can perform as a network interfaceusing SLIP.



• CLI allows a terminal or incoming modem access to the AnnexCommand Line Interface (CLI). CLI provides access to thenetwork and connections to other hosts via the telnet, connect,rlogin, and tn3270 commands.

• ARAP specifies that a connection can perform as a networkinterface using ARAP.

• Rlogin automatically connects a user to a host via the rlogincommand. You can specify the host and arguments in theRlogin/Telnet box’sArgument field.

• Other indicates that one or more Annexes you selected currentlyuse modes that differ from the options displayed in theModebox. You can use the Set command in Annex Manager’sCustomize mode to check these values, or you can selectanother option here. You cannot select theOther button.

TheInterface Options box displays information in theIP Addresses, PPP Interface

Protocol, AppleTalk, andRlogin/Telnet boxes.

• The IP Addresses box allows an Annex to request an addressfrom the host-based security server.

• TheAddress Assignment buttons control settings for theLocal

Address field in this window and theRemote Address field intheChannels window:

• If you select theSecurity Server button, the Annexsearches theacp_dialup file for the remote client’s username and sets local and remote addresses and subnetmask.



If the file contains a matching user name and:

• The local and remote addresses exist in theacp_dialup file, the Annex uses those values.

• Theacp_dialup file contains a remote address butnot a local address, the Annex uses the remoteaddress from the file and the Annex’s IP addressfor the local address.

If the file does not contain a matching user name, theAnnex uses values from theLocal Address, Remote

Address, andSubnet Mask fields:

• If both fields contain addresses, the Annex usesthese values.

• If both fields are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiatesfor both addresses with the remote PPP client. Theconnection is denied for a remote SLIP client.

If the file contains a local address and the remoteaddress is set to0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local addressand negotiates with the remote PPP client for theremote addresses. The connection is denied for aremote SLIP client.

• If you select thedhcp button, the Annex contacts aDHCP server to request a remote address.

• If you select theLocal button, the Annex uses the IPaddress at the other end of the serial line.



• TheLocal Address field defines the IP address for a connectionon the ISDN Primary Rate Annex side of a link when theAnnex does not obtain the address from the host’sacp_dialupfile.

• The Subnet Mask field contains the ISDN Primary Rate Annex’sIP subnet mask. This field’s initial display is based on thenetwork portion of the Annex’s IP address.

Entering an incorrectSubnet Mask can cause routing problems.

• ThePPP Interface Protocol box lists the control protocols forwhich the Annex negotiates. You can select a single button orany combination of the following buttons:

• atcp specifies AppleTalk Control Protocol.

• ipcp specifies Internet Protocol Control Protocol.

• ipxcp specifies the Internet Packet Exchange Control Protocol.

• ccp specifies the Compression Control Protocol.

• mp specifies the MultiLink PPP Protocol.

• TheAppleTalk box uses theNode ID field.

• Node ID specifies the AppleTalk hint used by the ISDN PrimaryRate Annex. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimalnotation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot:


• A node address ranges from 0 to 254 (0x00 to 0xFE).For example, 191.253, 0x00FR.253 and 191.0xFDdesignate the same address. You can enter numbersranging from 0 to 65534.255.



.

• TheRlogin/Telnet box allows you to specify arguments forrloginandtelnet connections.

• Argument contains the commands used when you selectRlogin or Telnet in theMode box. You should include a hostname or address here. You can enter up to 100 characters

TheTime box defines activity and controls inactivity timers.

• TheTimer box controls inactivity timers.

• CLI Inactivity Timer specifies the amount of time in minutesthat the ISDN Primary Rate Annex remains idle beforedisconnecting a CLI session. Entering0 (zero) disables thetimer; entering255 causes the Annex to disconnect as soonas it exits from its last job. You can enter any number ofminutes up to 255. Unlike the call inactivity timer, this timerdoes not disconnect a CLI session with active jobs.

• Call Inactivity Timer specifies the number of minutes that aconnection can remain inactive. If the timer expires, theAnnex terminates the call. You can use theInput is Activity

andOutput Is Activity buttons to define incoming call activity.If you do not use these buttons, the timer runs independentof activity. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255minutes.

• Input Is Activity buttons define activity as input. If you click theOn button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it receivesinput through an established call.

• Output Is Activity buttons defines activity as output. If you clicktheOn button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when itsends output.



eer.

ct

.

ann,

ThePPP Security box defines data for authorization on a remote PPP pThis box uses the following fields:

• Remote Username contains the user name by which the ISDNPrimary Rate Annex identifies itself when the remote PPP peerasks for authentication. This name can contain up to 15characters.

• Remote Password defines the password that the ISDN PrimaryRate Annex uses when the remote PPP peer requestsauthentication. For security reasons, Annex Manager displaysthis parameter's value asset or unset. This name can contain upto 15 characters.

TheModem box provides access to theEdit Modem window.

When an option is unavailable it appears in grey: you cannot selesuch options.

Using Push Buttons

This window uses , , , and pushbuttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5

The button displays a window that allows you to changedefinitions for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex’s internal modems. You cedit internal modems only from this window. For detailed informatiosee Chapter 9.

Apply Restore Help Close

Edit Modem



to

Selecting Call Default Settings

This section gives you directions for using Annex Manager’sCall Defaults

window.

Selecting Settings To use theCall Defaults window:

1. Display the Call Defaults window.

2. Enter or change information in the Mode, Interface, Time, orPPP Security boxes.

If you enter information and then need to return to the values that

displayed originally, you can press .

3. Press .

Annex Manager changes values for the ISDN Primary Rate

Annexes you selected. You cannot use after you press

.

Using the Channels Window

Setup mode’sChannels window allows you to assign a remote addressa B-channel for SLIP or PPP connections.

Restore

Apply

Restore

Apply



Now


To display the window, selectChannels from theSetup field.

Figure 8-2. Channels Window

Understanding the Channels Window

TheChannels window allows you to select a B-channel for a single ISDPrimary Rate Annex and to assign a remote address to it. This winduses theChannels box andRemote Address field.

TheChannels box provides information about the ISDN Primary RateAnnex you selected. It includes the following categories:

• Annex Name displays the name or IP address of the Annex youselected in the main window.

• Channel # lists each channel in the Annex.

WARNING



ted.

.

• Remote Address lists the current address associated with eachchannel. If this column displays0.0.0.0, the Annex and the peerwill negotiate for an address.

The information in this box is current as of the time you selectedChannels from theSetup field.

TheRemote Address field assigns an address to the channel you selecYou can enter an IP address here.

Using Push Buttons

This window uses , , and buttons. For detailedinformation about push buttons, see Chapter 5.

Assigning Remote Addresses

Assigning Addresses To assign a remote address to a B-channel:

1. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex in the main window.

2. Display the Channels window.

3. Select a single channel from the Channels box.

4. Enter an IP address in the Remote Address field.

5. Press .

Annex Manager changes the channel’s address. The next call thatuses the channel you selected will use the address you enter here

Apply Help Close

Apply



Using the T1/PRI Line Window

TheT1/PRI Line window allows you to set a type of switch provided bythe telephone company for your T1/PRI line. The window displaysinformation in theT1/PRI Line box.

To display the window, selectT1/PRI Line from theSetup field.

Figure 8-3. T1/PRI Line Window

WARNING



es the

here

Understanding the T1/PRI Line Box

TheT1/PRI Line box displays information in theSwitch Type box. TheSwitch

Type box uses only theSwitch Type buttons.

• Switch Type defines the kind of switch the ISDN Primary RateAnnex uses. The value you select here depends on the switchprovided by your telephone company. You can select:

• 5ESS for AT&T’s 5ESS switch.

• NI-2 for the switch that supports National ISDN2.

• DMS100 for Nortel’s DMS100 switch.

• Default to set the switch value to a null string (“ “).

TheT1/PRI Line window selects theDefault andOther buttons based oncurrentSwitch Type settings:

• Default is selected ifSwitch Type is not set when you first use theT1/PRI Line window. If you do not choose another setting, theISDN Primary Rate Annex you selected will use5ESS for linesin the United States,ETS for European lines, andETS-AUS forAustralian lines.

• Other displays as selected if the Annex you chose is operatingoutside the United States. This setting indicates that the switchtype is set toETS or ETS-AUS. You can use CLI admincommands to check these values.

TheFDL Type box allows you to configure the FDL standard. It describthe facilities data link use. This allows the telephone company to readstatistics maintained by an Annex and to perform diagnostic tests. Tare four choices:

• none

• att

• ansi

• Other



You four

TheBuildout box allows adjustment of the cable loss measurementbetween the last T1 signal regenerator and your location. Thismeasurement is supplied by the telephone company at installation.need to adjust your buildout based on this measurement.There arechoices:

• odb

• 7.5db

• 15db

• 20.5db

Using Push Buttons

This window uses , , , and buttons. Fordetailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5.

Setting the Switch Type

Setting the Type To set a switch type

1. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex in the main window.

2. Display the T1/PRI Line window.

3. Select the 5ESS, NI-2, DMS100 or Default button.

Default will be selected if the switch type has not been set.Other

displays as selected when the ISDN Primary Rate Annex, operatingoutside the United States, has the switch type set toETS or ETS-

AUS.

4. Press .

Annex Manager sets the switch type.


Apply


te

Chapter 9Editing Modem Definitions

TheEdit Modem window allows you to change an existing modem’sdefinition for any Annex and to create a new modem definition or toremove modem definitions for Annexes other than ISDN Primary RaAnnexes.

We recommend that you use theEdit Modem window to changemodem definitions. You can, however, use the Configure menu’sEditConfiguration entry for the same purpose.

This chapter includes:

• Understanding the Edit Modem Window

• Creating and Changing Modem Definitions

• Understanding the Modem Database

• Editing the Configuration File


To display this window, press in theEdit Async Ports or Call

Defaults windows.

Figure 9-1. Edit Modem Window

Edit Modem

WARNING


Chapter 9 Editing Modem Definitions Part 2 Setup Mode

lt

llly

Understanding the Edit Modem Window

Modem definitions reside in the Annex configuration file. Default modemdefinitions are stored ininclude files. If you change a definition that uses defauvalues, Annex Manager copies the definition from theinclude file and places itin the Annex configuration file.

The definitions you create or change here apply to all ports and aAnnexes that use the same load host. Your changes may not appsolely to the Annexes or ports you selected.

Edit Modem uses the following fields:

• Modem Name specifies the type of modem attached to the portsor Annexes you selected. For Annexes with asynchronousports, this field automatically displays the name that appears intheEdit Async Port window’sModem Name field. For ISDNPrimary Rate Annexes, it displays the internal modem namefrom the Annex configuration file.

• If this field displays an existing modem name,Connect

Status String, Dialin Setup Command, andDialout Setup

Command display current values.

• If this field displays<undefined> or is blank, Annex Managerprovides default values inConnect Status String, Dialin Setup

Command, andDialout Setup Command. You can use thesedefault values or enter new values.

If you want to view or edit a definition for a modem otherthan the one listed in the window, press hereand select another name from the list.

(continued on next page)

OK


Chapter 9 Editing Modem DefinitionsPart 2 Setup Mode

p

If the Edit Modem window appears with a modem nameand you enter another existing name,Connect StatusString, Dialin Setup Command andDialout Setup Commandwill not automatically display values for the name youentered. If you press at this point, AnnexManager will change the definition for the name youentered to the values displayed in the window. You canuse this method to create a new definition with the samevalues as an existing one.

• Connect Status String contains the string the Annex uses when itinitiates an outbound call. This string lists all successfulconnect messages that the modem can return. You can enter uto 80 status codes.

• Dialin Setup Command contains the command the Annex sends toincoming modem ports before the first user connects to a port.The command should include all modem steps required toanswer a call coming into the Annex. For example, it shouldturn on the auto-answer feature and disable inbound modemconnect messages.

• Dialout Setup Command contains the command the Annex sendsto all serial device ports before they becomes active. Thiscommand should contain all configuration information requiredfor the Annex to initiate an outbound call. For example, itshould disable the auto-answer feature and enable modemconnect messages. You can enter up to 80 characters.

• Revert to default modem values displays default values for amodem when you have changed the default definition.

Apply



ion

rts:

Using Push Buttons

TheEdit Modem window uses the , , and pushbuttons. For Annexes with asynchronous ports, it uses thebutton:

• deletes modems defined in the Annex configurationfile. When you press , Annex Manager removes themodem name and definition from theEdit Async Port window’slist. When you press in theEdit Async Port window,Annex Manager deletes the modem definition from the Annexconfiguration file.

Creating and Changing Modem Definitions

TheEdit Modem window lets you change existing modem definitions,create new ones, and remove definitions from the Annex configuratfile.

Changing Definitions for Annexes with Ports

To edit or create a new definition for Annexes with asynchronous poChanging Definitionsfor Annexes withAsynchronous Ports

1. Display the Edit Async Ports window and choose the appropriatesettings in the Port Options box.

2. In the Modem box’s field, choose the modem whose definitionyou want to edit, or choose <undefined> to create a new definitionfrom default values and press .

TheEdit Modem window appears with current values for the modemyou selected.

OK Help Cancel

Remove

Remove

OK

Apply

Edit Modem



3. Enter new values or change existing values in the Modem Name,Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command, and Dialout SetupCommand fields.

For detailed information about these fields, seeUnderstanding theEdit Modem Window earlier in this chapter.

4. Press .

Annex Manager closes theEdit Modem window and returns you totheEdit Async Ports window.

5. Press

A confirmation window appears. You can press to

continue or to return to the window.

Figure 9-2. Modem Definition ConfIrmation Window

If you create a new modem definition or edit one thatexists in the Annex configuration file, your changesmodify the current file. If you edit a definition for whichdefaults exist, Annex Manager copies the definition andplaces it in the Annex configuration file. You can use theRevert to default modem values button in this case to seeoriginal values.

6. Copy the configuration file to alternate load hosts and to self-boot units

For more information, seeUnderstanding the Modem Databaselater in this chapter.

OK

Apply

OK

Cancel



Changing Definitions for ISDN Primary RateAnnexes

To edit a definition for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes:Changing Definitionsfor ISDN Primary RateAnnexes

1. Display the Call Defaults window and press .

2. Change existing values in the Connect Status String, Dialin SetupCommand, and Dialout Setup Command fields.

3. Press .

Annex Manager closes theEdit Modem window and returns you totheCall Defaults window.

4. Press



Figure 9-3. Modem Definition ConfIrmation Window

If you edit a modem definition that exists in the Annexconfiguration file, your changes modify the current file.If you edit a definition for which defaults exist, AnnexManager copies the definition and places it in the Annexconfiguration file. You can use theRevert to default modemvalues button in this case to see original values.

5. Copy the configuration file to alternate load hosts and to self-boot units

For more information, seeUnderstanding the Modem Databaselater in this chapter.

Edit Modem

OK

Apply

OK

Cancel



Removing a Definition

You can remove a modem definition only for Annexes that haveasynchronous ports. To remove a definition:

Removing Definitions 1. Display the Edit Async Ports window and choose the appropriatesettings in the Port Options box.

2. In the Modem box’s field, choose the modem whose definitionyou want to remove .

TheEdit Modem window appears with current values for the modemyou selected.

You can remove only those definitions you created ormodified. You cannot remove Annex Manager’s defaultdefinitions, since they exist ininclude files.

3. Press .



Figure 9-4. Remove Modem Definition Confirmation Window

When you press , Annex Manager displays theEdit Async

Port window. If you remove a definition that you created, it will notappear in the modem list. If you remove a definition that has adefault, the definition’s values revert to default values and its nameremains in the list.

Remove

OK

Cancel

OK



ored

4. Press .




Understanding the Modem Database

Annex Manager’s modem database consists of modem definitions stin the Annex configuration file and ininclude files. Annex Manager’sSetup mode gives you access to:

• The modems section of the Annex configuration file. TheAnnexes you select must use the same configuration file on thesame host and must use the same address for current anddefault boot hosts. The configuration file does not have toreside on the same host as does Annex Manager.

• Any include files referenced in the accessible Annexconfiguration files. Theseinclude files contain AnnexManager’s default modem definitions.

References toinclude files must follow modemdefinitions in the configuration file.

Apply



Editing Modem Definitions

You can use Annex Manager to edit any modem definition:

• If you edit a definition stored in the Annex configuration file,your changes overwrite current values in the file.

• If you edit a definition stored in aninclude file, Annex Managercopies the edited definition and places it in the Annexconfiguration file. If you edit the definition again, your changesoverwrite current values in the configuration file;include filedefinitions retain their original values.

Creating New Modem Definitions

You can create new modem definitions using theEdit Async Port (continued)

andEdit Modem windows.

• If you enter a new name in theEdit Async Port window’sModembox, Annex Manager creates a definition with default values inthe Annex configuration file. You can use these default valuesor change them in theEdit Modem window.

• If you enter a new name in theEdit Modem window’sModembox, Annex Manager copies the values that display at the timeyou enter the name and uses them in the new definition. Youcan use these values or edit them for the new definition.



ureu

Editing the Configuration File

Annex Manager allows you to edit modem definitions using the Configmenu. If you select Annexes that use different configuration files, yocannot edit the files.

Figure 9-6. Configuration File Window

Annex Manager identifies the configuration file by querying theAnnex, copying the file to a local host, and launching an editor withthe file. You must define the editor you want to use in theEDITORenvironment variable.

WARNING



Editing the File To edit the file:

1. Choose Edit Configuration from the Configure menu.

The configuration file appears.

2. Change, add, or remove modem definition information.

3. Save and close the file.

When you end an editing session, Annex Manager displays awindow informing you that you changed the configuration file.

Figure 9-7. Edit Configuration Window

You can select to update the file or to leave itunchanged. When you complete this window Annex Managercopies the file to its original location.

Yes No


s

Chapter 10Setting Security Values

TheSecurity window controls port security systems for the Annexeyou selected in the main window. This chapter includes:

• Understanding the Security Window

• Selecting Security Window Settings


To display theSecurity window, selectSecurity from theSetup field.

Figure 10-1. Security Window

WARNING


Chapter 10 Setting Security Values Part 2 Setup Mode

to

Understanding the Security Window

TheSecurity window divides settings intoIncoming, Outgoing, Host Access,andVCLI categories.

The Incoming box controls security for incoming ports and allows you select a PPP security setting.

• TheOn andOff buttons forModem Ports, Non-modem Ports, andPRI Calls set security for the Annexes you chose in the mainwindow. If you select theOn button, Annex Manager activatesthe ACP security server, including security for AppleTalk, CLI,IPX, and SLIP/PPP connections for the ports or calls youselected.

Modem Ports andNon-modem Ports do not apply for ISDNPrimary Rate Annexes.PRI Calls does not apply forAnnexes with asynchronous ports.

• ThePPP Security Protocol box defines the security check that theAnnex requires before it starts the network control protocol.You can select:

• None.

• Pap to use password authentication protocol.

• Chap to use challenge-handshake protocol.

• Chap/Pap to:

• Request the challenge-handshake protocol.

• Request password authentication protocol if the peer rejectsChap.


Chapter 10 Setting Security ValuesPart 2 Setup Mode

:
TheOutgoing box activates security for modem and non-modem ports
• TheOn andOff buttons forModem Ports andNon-modem Portscontrol host-based security for access through the port server.If you select theOn buttons, authorized users only have accessto the ports.

TheHost Access box providesRestrict buttons:

• The On and Off buttons for theRestrict field activate host-basedsecurity that authorizes connections from CLI to a networkhost. If you select theOn button, the security server authorizesa connection to a host from the Annex based on theacp_restrictfile.

TheVCLI box providesSecurity buttons:

• The On and Off buttons for the Security field control uservalidation on virtual CLI connections to an Annex. If youselect theOn button, the Annex uses the same user name andpassword validation for virtual CLI connections as it does forCLI security.

If the Annexes you chose currently use this security system, theOnbutton forModem Ports, Non-modem Ports, Restrict, andSecurity willbe selected when this window first appears. In this case, theenable_security parameter is set toenabled. If you change all securitysettings in this window toOff, Annex Manager deactivates securitybut does not change theenable_security parameter setting.

Using Push Buttons

TheSecurity window uses the , , , and

push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, refer toChapter 5.



Chapter 10 Setting Security Values Part 2 Setup Mode

Selecting Security Window Settings

Selecting Settings To select new security settings:

1. Display the Security window.

2. Select new settings.

If the Security window first appears with theModem Ports and/orNon-modem Ports On andOff buttons selected, theenable_security

parameter was set toenabled. If you select eitherOff button, AnnexManager deactivates security but does not change theenable_security setting.

3. Press .




Apply


to

Chapter 11Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT

Windows

Annex Manager’s Setup mode provides windows that allow you change frequently-used settings for AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LATprotocols. This chapter includes:

• Using the AppleTalk Window

• Using the IP Window

• Using the IPX Window

• Using the LAT Window

Using the AppleTalk Window

Annex Manager’sAppleTalk window allows you to define a zone for theAnnexes you selected in the main window.


To display the window, selectAppleTalk from theSetup field.

Figure 11-1. AppleTalk Window

WARNING


Chapter 11 Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT Windows Part 3 Customize Mode

s.

ter 5.

Understanding the AppleTalk Window

This window uses only theDefault Zone field:

• Default Zone provides the AppleTalk zone name that the Annexuses at start-up. You can enter a name using up to 32 characterYou must use spaces to separate words (e.g.,general engineeringlab). To escape embedded spaces, use the backslash (\).

Using Push Buttons

TheAppleTalk window uses the , , , and

push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chap

Changing AppleTalk Window Settings

Changing Settings You can enter new values for theAppleTalk window’sDefault Zone field:

1. Display the AppleTalk window.

2. Enter a new value for the Default Zone.

3. Press .

Annex Manager sets new values for theDefault Zone.


Apply


Chapter 11 Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT WindowsPart 3 Customize Mode

r

Using the IP Window

The IP window allows you to specify addresses and IP information fothe Annexes you selected in the main window.


To display the window, selectIP from theSetup field.

Figure 11-2. IP Window

WARNING



face

Understanding the IP Window

This window allows you to view and change IP addresses and interrouting information for the Annexes you selected.

• Internet Address defines the Annex's IP address. This 32-bitaddress contains four 8-bit fields separated by periods. Eachfield contains a number ranging from 0 to 255 or a hexadecimalnumber. The IP address always displays in decimal notation.You can use this field only when you select a single Annex inthe main window.

• Subnet Mask contains the IP subnet mask. This field’s initialdisplay is based on the network portion of the Annex’s IPaddress. Entering an incorrectSubnet Mask can cause routingproblems.

The Interface Routing box allows you to specify RIP versions.

• Accept RIP version controls the RIP versions that an Annexaccepts. You can enter:

• 1 to accept version 1 packets only.


• 1 and 2 to accept version 1 and 2 packets.

• Send RIP version controls the RIP versions that an Annex sendsover IP interfaces. You can choose:

• 1 to broadcast address.

• 2 to multicast address.

• 2 to broadcast address.



Using Push Buttons

The IP window uses the , , , and pushbuttons. For more information about these buttons, see Chapter 5.

Changing IP Window Settings

Changing Settings You can enter new values for theIP window’s address and changeselections for its RIP fields:

1. Display the IP window.

2. Enter new values or change existing ones.

3. Press .


Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the settings youchanged require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did notselectConfirm Auto Reset, Annex Manager rests Annexes withoutnotifying you.



Apply



he

Using the IPX Window

TheIPX window allows you to specify the type of IPX frame used by tAnnexes you selected.


To display the window, selectIPX from theSetup field.

Figure 11-4. IPX Window

WARNING



5.

Understanding the IPX Window

The IPX window uses only theFrame Type box.

• Frame Type defines framing used for IPX packets on theEthernet interface. You can select 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, orEthernet II.

Using Push Buttons

TheIPX window uses the , , , and pushbuttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chapter

Selecting IPX Window Settings

Changing Settings You can change theIPX window’sFrame Type:

1. Display the IPX window.

2. Select a new value.

3. Press .

Annex Manager sets theFrame Type you selected.


Apply



up

Using the LAT Window

TheLAT window allows you to view and change server names and grocodes for the Annexes you selected that use the LAT protocol.


To display the window, selectLAT from theSetup field.

Figure 11-5. LAT Window

WARNING



p

r

1,

Understanding the LAT Window

TheLAT window uses the following fields:

• Server Name identifies the Annex in the LAT protocol. Thename you enter should match the VMS host's node name usedin the HIC configuration file. The default value isLAT followedby the server’s physical ethernet address (e.g.,LAT_080002BF0020).

• Remote Group Codes specifies LAT protocol remote group codesthat can access local services offered by an Annex. To accessthese services, the Annex must have at least one enabled groucode that matches the service's group codes. You can enterall,none, a series of numbers separated by commas, (e.g., 1, 5, 7) oa range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 1, 5, 200-255).You can use any number between 0 and 255.

• Virtual CLI Group Codes specifies remote group codes that areassigned to virtual CLI users. All virtual CLI users have thesame group code. You can enterall to enable all groups,none todisable all groups, a series of numbers separated by commas(e.g., 1, 5, 7), or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 5, 200-255). You can use any number between 0 and 255.



5.

Using Push Buttons

TheLAT window uses the , , , and pushbuttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chapter

Entering LAT Window Settings

Entering Settings You can change theLAT window’s fields:

1. Display the LAT window.

2. Enter new values for the LAT server and/or group codes.

For detailed information about theLAT window, seeUnderstandingthe LAT Window earlier in this chapter.

3. Press .

Annex Manager sets the new values you entered.


Apply


tersyourtem

Chapter 12Using and Creating Parameter

Groups

Annex Manager’s Setup mode includes groups of related paramethat you can use to configure an Annex. In addition, you can create own groups. This chapter explains each group delivered with the sysand gives you directions for creating new groups. It includes:

• Working with Parameter Groups

• Creating Parameter Groups

Working with Parameter Groups

When you selectPre-defined Groups from the main window’sParameter

Options button, you can choose one of the following groups.

• AppleTalk

• Basic_Annex

• Basic_Async_Port

• Call_Defaults

• Channel

• Cmd_Line_Editing

• Dedicated_Port

• Flow_Control

• IPX

• Idle_Timer

• LAT

• MOP

• Modem


Chapter 12 Using and Creating Parameter Groups Part 3 Customize Mode

listter,19.

• Modem_Internal

• Nameserver

• PPP

• PRI_Line

• Printer_Port

• Routing

• SLIP

• Security

• Sync_Call_Defaults

• SysLog

• T1_DS0

• T1_DS1

• TMux

• TN3270

• Time_of_Day

• VCI_Interface

• Virtual_CLI

To see all parameters included in a particular group, select it from theand click the mouse twice. For information about a particular parameselect the parameter and click the mouse twice, or refer to Chapter


Chapter 12 Using and Creating Parameter GroupsPart 3 Customize Mode

pear

Creating Parameter Groups

Annex Manager’sUser-defined Parameter Groups command lets you selectindividual parameters to create your own groups. These groups apin the main window’s configuration area when you select theUser-Defined

Groups option. This section includes:

• Displaying the User Defined Parameter Groups Window

• Understanding the User Defined Parameter Groups WindowFormat

• Creating or Modifying a User Defined Group

Displaying the User Defined Parameter GroupsWindow


TheUser Defined Parameter Groups command does not depend oninformation you enter in the main window. To display the window:

1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and choose User DefinedParameter Groups.

TheUser Defined Parameter Groups window appears (seeFigure12-1).



dow.

lains

The example below shows the User-defined Parameter Groups win

Figure 12-1. User Defined Parameter Groups Window

Understanding the User Defined Parameter GroupsWindow Format

TheUser Defined Parameter Groups window consists of a parameter grouplist, a parameter list, a work area, and push buttons. This section expeach area in the window.



edingleon,

u

onlect

Using the Parameter Groups Box

When you display theUser-defined Parameter Groups window, theParameter

Groups box automatically includes the names of all existing user defingroups. You can use this list to display the parameters included in a sgroup by highlighting a group name and choosing the buttor by double clicking on a group name.

If you want to create a group by choosing individual parameters, yocan use theParameters box and theWork Area box. You do not haveto use theParameter Groups box.

Using the Parameters Box

TheParameters box includes an option button and the list box. The optibutton controls the parameter list that displays below it. You can seone of the following options.

• TheAnnex Only List option includes all parameters, excludingport parameters.

• TheAsync Port List option displays asynchronous portparameters.

• ThePrinter Port List option includes printer port parameters.

• TheEnet Port List option displays Ethernet port parameters.

• The DS0 Channel List option displays DS0 Channel parametervalues.

• The DS1 Line List option displays DS1 port parameter values.

View



l.

the

When you select one or more parameters from any list and choose, the parameters you selected appear in theWork Area. You can

then create a group that includes all parameters you selected.

You can also use this box with theParameter Groups box. If you select agroup, choose , and place individual parameters from theParameters box in theWork Area, the new or modified group you create wilinclude the group’s existing parameters as well as the ones you add

You can double-click on any parameter in theParameters orWork Areabox to display a help message about the parameter.

Using the Work Area Box

TheWork Area displays the parameters in an existing group and storesparameters you select in theParameter Groups andParameters boxes. Youcan select one or more parameters from theWork Area and choose

to remove the selected parameters from the list.and change an existing group or create a new one fromparameters in this list.

Using Push Buttons

User-defined Parameter Groups uses the following push buttons:

• displays the parameters that comprise an existinguser defined group. When you select a group from theParameter Groups box, parameters display in theWork Area.

• removes any selected group and its parameters fromAnnex Manager files.

Add >>

View

<< Remove Modify

Create

View

Delete



• overwrites parameters in an existing user definedgroup. It saves the parameters in theWork Area as newparameters, using the selected group name. For example, if youwant to add a parameter to an existing group or delete one fromit, you can display the parameters, use or

, and choose to store the amendedparameter group under the same group name. When you usethis button, Annex Manager asks you to verify your changes.

• uses the parameters in theWork Area to define a newgroup. When you use this button, theName Entry windowdisplays.

• displays a window explaining theUser-definedParameter Groups command.

• removes theUser-defined Parameter Groups windowfrom your display.

Creating or Modifying a User Defined Group

You can create your own groups or modify existing ones with theUser-defined Parameter Groups command.

Creating a Group To create a new group:

1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select User-definedParameter Groups.

TheUser-defined Parameter Groups window displays (seeFigure12-1).

2. Select the parameters you want in the new group from theParameters box and choose .

The parameters you choose appear in theWork Area.

If you add a parameter and then decide you do not needit in the group, select it in theWork Area and press

.

Modify

Add >>

<< Remove Modify

Create

Help

Close

Add >>

<< Remove



3. Choose .

TheName Entry window appears.

Figure 12-2. User-defined Parameter Groups Name Entry Window

You must enter a new name without using spaces in the field

labelledEnter parameter group name. You can choose

to create a new group or to return to theUser-defined

Parameter Groups window.

Modifying a Group To modify an existing group:

1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select User-definedParameter Groups.

TheUser-defined Parameter Groups window displays (seeFigure12-1).

2. Select an existing group from the Parameter Groups box and press or double click on the group name.

The group’s parameters appear in theWork Area.

3. Select the parameters you want to add from the Parameters boxand press , or select those you want to remove fromthe Work Area and press .

Annex Manager adds or deletes the parameters you choose in theWork Area.

Create

OK

Cancel

View

Add >>

<< Remove



4. Choose .

All parameters in theWork Area become part of the modified group.

If you change a group in the work area and press

without pressing , aConfirmation window appears. You

can then press to continue or to return tothe work area.

You can modify only those groups that you created.

Modify

Close

Modify

OK Cancel


indow

e

se,

Chapter 13Viewing and Changing Parameters

TheShow andSet commands allow you to view and change Annexparameters. These commands appear as push buttons in the main wand as entries in the Configure menu.Show andSet display values for theparameters that comprise parameter groups and lists.Show lets you viewinformation;Set lets you view and change parameter values.

This chapter describesShow andSet in the following sections:

• Viewing Parameter Values

• Changing Parameter Values

• Identifying Errors

Before You Use Showand Set Commands

The Show andSet commands are based on information you enter in thmain window. Before you useShow or Set, you need to:

1. Create an Annex list and select one or more Annexes from thelist.

Show andSet display information only for connected Annexes thatyou select.

2. Choose a Parameter Option.

The appropriate group or list appears in the box.

3. Select a single parameter group or one or more individualparameters.

Once you enter required information in the main window, you can utheShow andSet commands. For detailed information about the main windowrefer to Chapter 4.


Chapter 13 Viewing and Changing Parameters Part 3 Customize Mode

the the

e

Viewing Parameter Values

Show lets you see parameter values. You can use this command for parameter groups and for the individual parameters you choose frommain window’s parameter list. This section includes:

• Displaying the Show Window

• Understanding the Show Window Format

• Viewing Parameter Values

Displaying the Show Window


TheShow command originates in the main window or in the Configurmenu. To use this command:


For details about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. Select the Annexes and parameter groups or individualparameters you want to include.

3. Choose or move the pointer to the Configure menuand click Show.

TheShow window appears (seeFigure13-1).

To useShow again without closing the window, repeat step 2. AnnexManager saves all output in theShow window until you use

or .

Show

Clear Close


Chapter 13 Viewing and Changing ParametersPart 3 Customize Mode

and

The example below is theShow window for theBasic_Annex group.

Figure 13-1. Show Window

In this example, theShow window displays information for each Annexyou selected. This window includes all parameters that you selecteda value for each parameter.



l

ues,

you

andx.

Understanding the Show Window Format

The Show window consists of a check button, port type button, portnumber field, output box, and push buttons for clearing the window,saving output, and closing the window.

Controlling Output

TheShow window’sVerbose Output button allows you to determine the leveof detail that appears in the output box. When you selectVerbose Output,

the output box includes parameter names, MIB definitions, default valand current values. If you do not select it,Show includes only parameternames and current values.

Entering Port Information

The parameters you choose in the main window determine whetherneed to enter port or channel information forShow. If you selectparameters that require this information, you can select a port type enter port or channel numbers in fields located below the Output bo

Entering Port Typesand Port Numbers

To select a port type and enter port numbers:

1. Hold the mouse on the option button that displays Async Ports.

The menu displaysAsync Port(s), Printer Port(s), Enet Port(s)

DS0 Channel(s) andDS1 Line(s).

2. Highlight the port type you want and release the button.

You must enter a port type that matches yourParameter Options

selection. For example, if you choose theAsync Port List option,you should not selectEnet Port(s) here.



tput

s

electore

3. For Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), and DS0 Channel(s), enter one ormore port numbers or All in the field.

To enter specific ports, separate port numbers with commas orindicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you mightenter1,3,8 to specify three ports, or1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through3 and port 8. ForEnet Port(s), you must enter1. ForT1 ports,2displays automatically. You cannot change this value.

Reading the Output Box

The window’s output box lists parameter names and values. The oubox always includes:

• A message informing you that you may need to enter port orchannel information when you first useShow.

• A separate section for each Annex you selected. InFigure13-1, a line of asterisks separates information about twoAnnexes.

• All parameters included in a group or all parameters youselected.

• Parameters in groups display in the order in which theyappear in the group. If you choose a parameter that requiresport or channel information and you enter more than oneport number, the output box displays a separate line for eachport or channel.

• Parameters you select from the parameter lists appear inalphabetical order.

If Annex Manager cannot process theShow command based on your selectionin the main window, or if your choices are not valid for all the Annexes youselected, a warning window displays. For example, a warning windowappears if you entered a port type that does not match the group you sor a port number that does not exist on the Annex you select. For minformation about warning and error messages, seeIdentifying Errors onpage 13-16.



Using Push Buttons

Show provides push buttons at the bottom of the window:

• activates theShow command based on yourselections in the main window and on theVerbose Output button.

• removes current output from the window.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents of theShow window’s output box, or press to return to theShow window.

• displays a window that explains theShow command.

• removes theShow window from your display.

Viewing Parameter Values

Displaying Values To check parameter values with theShow command:

1. Select the level of detail you need using the Verbose Outputbutton.

When you selectVerbose Output, the output box includes parameternames, MIB definitions, default values, and current values. If youdo not select it, the output box includes only parameter names andcurrent values.

2. Select a port type and port number.

If you selected parameter groups that require port numbers, youmust use these fields. If your selections do not require thisinformation, you can skip this step.

3. Choose .

Values appear in the output box for the parameters you selected.The level of detail in the box depends on your use of theVerbose

Output button.

Apply

Clear

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close

Apply



nd

des:

Changing Parameter Values

TheSet command, like theShow command, displays parameter names avalues. In addition,Set allows you to change parameter values. Thissection discusses theSet window’s display options, explains the window’sformat, and gives instructions for changing parameter values. It inclu

• Displaying the Set Window

• Understanding the Set Window Format

• Changing Parameter Values

Displaying the Set Window


TheSet command originates in the main window. To display theSet

window:


For details about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. Select the Annexes and parameter options you want to include.

3. Choose or move the pointer to the Configure menuand click Set.

TheSet window appears (seeFigure13-2).

Set



The following example is aSet window that shows theBasic_Annex group’svalues for more than one Annex.

Figure 13-2. Set Window



tton and

you

t a the

Understanding the Set Window Format

TheSet window consists of a work area, a message box, a port type buand port number field, and push buttons. Its format allows you to seechange current parameter values and to review your work.


The parameters you choose in the main window determine whetherneed to enter port, interface, or channel information for theSet command.If you select parameters that require this information, you can selecport type and enter port or channel numbers in fields located belowWork Area.

Entering Port Typesand Port Numbers

To select a port type and enter port numbers:


The menu displaysAsync Port(s), Printer Port(s), Enet Port(s),

DS0 Channel(s), and DS1 Line(s).

2. Highlight the port type you want and release the button.

You must enter a port type that matches yourParameter Options

selection in the main window. For example, if you choose theAsync

Port List option, you should not selectEnet Port(s) here.

3. For Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), and DS0 Channel(s), enter one ormore port numbers or All in the field next to the port type button.

To enter specific ports, separate port numbers with commas orindicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you mightenter1,3,8 to specify three ports, or1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through3 and port 8. ForEnet Port(s), you must enter1. ForT1 ports,2displays automatically. You cannot change this value.



rentes or

o

s

Using the Work Area

When you use , theSet window’s work area can list values forthe parameters you selected in the main window. You can verify curvalues, mark the parameters you want to change, and enter new valuoptions here.

For each parameter, several components appear:

• A check button ( ) precedes each parameter name. You need tselect this button in order to mark a parameter and select orenter the values you want to change.

• Parameter names provide access to additional information. Youcan highlight any parameter name or the corresponding valuefield and press or to display a message about theparameter.

• Text fields or option buttons follow each parameter name. If theAnnexes or ports you selected have the same value, these fieldand buttons display that value. Once you select the checkbutton, you can enter new values or select new options here.

• The (Display Differences) button follows a text field oran option button if the combination of Annexes and ports youselected or ports you selected from one Annex do not have thesame parameter value (seeFigure13-2). When the buttonappears, text fields or option buttons remain blank.

You can click to display parameter values. Formore information, refer toChanging Parameter Valueson page 13-7.

Show Values

F1 Help

Dsp Diffs

Dsp Diffs



s, ifes

s, or IP

Reading the Message Box

The message box monitorsSet operations. It includes:

• The operation’s name surrounded by asterisks. InFigure13-2, *****Set Operation***** displays.

• A status message confirming the current operation.Setting thefollowing parameters is the status message inFigure13-2.

• All parameters included in the group or all parameters youselected.

• TheSet values complete message indicating that processing iscomplete.

• Current values when theSet operation ends. Annex Managerperforms aShow operation automatically on the markedparameters to confirm your changes. Messages related to thisoperation appear in the box.

Message boxes contain error messages if you enter incorrect valueAnnex Manager cannot find values for parameters, if the process timout and Annex Manager cannot set values for all marked parameterif you enter an incorrect format for fields that require an integer or anaddress. For more information, seeIdentifying Errors on page 13-16.

Using Push Buttons

Set provides the following push buttons:

• changes values for marked parameters. Themessage box reflects this operation and provides errormessages if necessary. TheConfirmation window allows you toverify theSet command. If you selected theConfirm Auto Resetoption and parameters that require an Annex reset, theResetParameters window follows.

Apply



,

xes,lues

• displays parameter values in the work area and listsparameters in the message box. When you use this button toverify current values, it erases new values you entered but doesnot deselect marked parameters.

An asterisk appears in the button if you use and thenchange the main window’s Annex list or port information, orthis window’s port numbers. The asterisk indicates that themessage box values may not be current. It disappears whenyou press again.

• deletes current information from the message boxand deselects marked parameters. It does not change valuesdisplayed in the work area.

• displays the standardFile Selection window. You canenter a file name in theSelection field and press tostore the contents of theSet window’s output box, or press

to return to theSet window.

• displays a window explaining theSet command.

• removes theSet window from your display.

You can leave the window displayed and useSet again to select aparameter option that differs from your original selection. In this caseyou must choose again in the main window to displaythese new parameters.

Changing Parameter Values

Set allows you to change parameter values. You can select new Anneports, parameter groups, individual parameters, or check original vaduring this process.

Show Values

Show Values

Show Values

Clear Display

Save Msgs

OK

Cancel

Help

Close

Set



s

Changing Values To change values:

1. Complete the main window and choose .

2. Enter port information in the fields below the Work Area.

If your selections in the main window require port or channelinformation you must enter a port type and a port or channelnumber.

3. Choose .

TheWork Area displays values for the parameters you selected. TheMessage Box lists each parameter name. You can skip this step ifyou do not want to see current values.

The button indicates that the Annexes, ports, or channelsyou selected do not have the same parameter value. You can presthis button to display a window showing the parameter’s value foreach Annex and port.

Figure 13-3. Differing Values Window

Set

Show Values

Dsp Diffs



This window, which contains values for all parameters thathave the button, scrolls automatically to the parameteryou selected. You can use scroll bars to view other parametervalues.

4. Click the check button ( ) or drag the cursor through a range ofcheck buttons for each parameter you want to change.

The check button appears filled. This marks each parameter thatwill change.

5. Enter new values or select new options for any markedparameter.

6. Choose .

This step triggers several operations.

• A Confirmation window displays, allowing you to checkyour work before values change. You can choose

to return to theSet window, or tocontinue theSet process and change parameter values.

Figure 13-4. Set Command Confirmation Window

Dsp Diffs

Apply

Cancel OK



• A Reset Parameters window appears if you selected theConfirm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu andchanged parameters that require an Annex to be reset. You

can choose to continue the process, or

to return to theSet window. If you did not selectConfirm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes withoutnotifying you.

Figure 13-5. Set Command Reset Parameters Window

• Set changes marked parameters that have valid values. Forparameters that did not change, the message box lists errorconditions. For more information about errors, seeIdentifying Errors in this chapter.

• The work area displays current values. If you enteredincorrect values, original values appear in the work areaand error messages appear in the message box.

Reset

Cancel



ageor on

ow

.

Identifying Errors

TheShow andSet commands notify you about error conditions bydisplaying warning windows and by listing errors in output and messboxes. You can encounter errors based on main window selections parameter value limitations. This section includes:

• Understanding Warning Windows

• Understanding Output and Message Boxes

Understanding Warning Windows

Warning windows appear based on your selections in the main windand in theSet window. They appear if you:

• Do not enter complete information.

• Select an unreachable Annex.

• Do not enter port information and then select a parameter groupor list that requires this information.

• Select a port type that does not match one or more parameterport types. For example, a warning window displays if youchoosePrinter port type and theBasic_Async_Port group, or ifyou enter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex

When information does not match, the warning windowinforms you that Annex Manager will not use certainparameters. While theShow or Set windows will appear and theoperation will continue, message boxes reflect errorconditions:

• Show does not list these parameters.

• Set lists all parameters in the work area, but does not changeor show values for parameters with errors.



rors

Understanding Output and Message Box Errors

TheShow command’s output box and theSet command’s message boxinclude error messages about specific parameters. They display erwhen:

• Annex Manager cannot read one or more parameters.

• You do not mark at least one parameter when you useSet.

• Communication with the Annex times out.

• You choose and theSet operation cannot change oneor more marked parameters. The message box lists all markedparameters, with error messages for those that could notchange. In addition, theSet complete with errors messageappears. This message indicates that Annex Manager hascompletedSet processing and has changed some, but not allparameters due to error conditions.

If your selections result in theSet complete with errorsmessage, the automaticShow process displays theoriginal values for parameters that did not change.

Apply


tone or

terndardurepply

et

one

).

Chapter 14Viewing, Creating, and Executing

Scripts

Script commands allow you to create a set of parameter values,store them as a script, and to apply a script’s parameter values to omore Annexes.

A script is a text file. Each line in the file defines an Annex paramevalue. You can use Annex Manager to create a script by capturing aAnnex’s parameter values, or you can create a script using any stantext editor. After you store a script in a file, you can use it to configa new Annex, to save an Annex’s parameter values for backup, or to aa special configuration.

This chapter describes theScript commands. It includes:

• Viewing Script Contents

• Creating New Scripts

• Changing Annex Values Using Scripts

Annex Manager provides predefined scripts that you can use to resAnnex parameters to their factory default values.View Script displays thecontents of predefined or site-specific scripts.Execute Script allows you toreset Annex parameters to their factory default values when you useof the predefined scripts.

If you want to use site-specific default values for any script, youshould copy the script file and then edit it.

Some scripts contain lines that begin with the comment symbol (#If you remove this symbol when you edit the file, the script will usethese parameters.


Chapter 14 Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts Part 3 Customize Mode

View Script andExecute Script provide the following pre-defined scripts:

• AppleTalk contains Annex port and AppleTalk parameters.

• Basic_Annex contains basic Annex parameters. If you want touse parameters marked with the comment symbol (#), youshould copy the script file, remove the symbol, and enter yourown site-specific defaults, since factory default values may notbe appropriate.

• Basic_Async_Port contains basic asynchronous port parameters.

• Cmd_Line_Editing contains the terminal port editing parameters.If you use framed protocols (PPP, IPX, etc.), you may want toleave these parameters at their default settings.

• Dedicated_Port contains port parameters for dedicated portmode.

• Modem contains port modem configuration parameters.

• Modem_Internal contains port modem configuration parametersfor the CSMIM-MODMIM product and other products withinternal modems.

• Nameserver contains nameserver parameters.

• PPP contains port parameters for PPP.

• Printer_Port contains port parameters for a parallel printer. SomeAnnexes do not have parallel printer ports.

• Routing contains Annex and port parameters for routing.

• SLIP contains Annex and port parameters for SLIP.

• Security contains Annex and port security parameters.

• SysLog contains Annex syslog parameters.

• TMux contains TMux protocol parameters.


Chapter 14 Viewing, Creating, and Executing ScriptsPart 3 Customize Mode

ouew

r, or

• TN3270 contains port parameters for tn3270.

• Time_of_Day contains Annex timeserver parameters.

• VCIInterface contains a port’s DecServer user interfaceparameters. If you do not use the DecServer interface, youshould leave these parameters at their default settings.

• Virtual_CLI contains virtual CLI parameters.

Viewing Script Contents

TheView Script command displays the contents of any existing script. Ycan use this command to determine whether you need to create a nscript, to check the contents of scripts delivered with Annex Manageto verify the contents of scripts you created. This section includes:

• Displaying the View Script Window

• Understanding the View Script Window Format

• Displaying Script Contents

Displaying the View Script Window


View Script originates in the File menu. It displays all parameters andvalues included in a single script. To display theView Script window:

1. Move the pointer to the File menu and click on View Script.

TheView Script window appears (seeFigure14-1).



The following example shows theView Script window with a script’scontents displayed.

Figure 14-1. View Script Window

Understanding the View Script Window Format

TheView Script window allows you to select or enter a path to displaydetails about a single existing script.



Using Boxes and the Text Field

This window uses list and message boxes and a text field.

• TheScript List box displays all files in Annex Manager’s defaultscript directory, which stores the scripts delivered with AnnexManager. You can select any script displayed here. Thisdirectory is the default for the scripts you create, but you canstore new scripts in any directory.

AlthoughView Script lets you display scripts stored inanother directory, theScript List box does not changewhen you enter another directory’s path.

• TheSelection field below theScript List box displays the defaultscript directory. When you choose a script from the list box,this field changes to display your selection. If you need todisplay a script stored in another directory, you can enter a pathhere.

• TheScript Contents box displays the script listed in the text field,with the script’s name in parentheses above the box. This boxdisplays one script at a time: if you display one script and thenselect a second script, this box will contain only the most recentselection.

Every script file includes the:

• Parameter name.

• Port type ornone if the parameter does not use port information.

• Port or channel number, zero (0) if the port type isnone, or anasterisk (*) if the value is a wildcard indicator.

• Parameter value.



:

ou

3.

Using Push Buttons

View Script provides the following buttons at the bottom of the window

• activates theView Script command and displays ascript’s contents.

• displays a window that explains theView Scriptcommand.

• removes theView Script window from your display.

To verify a script’s contents when you use theCreate Script orExecuteScript commands, do not close theView Script window. You can returnto this window to verify your work.

Viewing a Script

Using the View ScriptCommand

TheView Script command displays all parameter values in the script yselect. To view a script:

1. Select View Script from the Commands menu.

TheView Script window appears (seeFigure14-1).

2. Select a single script from the Script List box.

The field below this box displays your selection. You can enter apath in the field to see a script stored in another directory. In thiscase, the Script List box does not change.

3. Choose .

The script listed in the text field appears in the Script Contents box.

If you need to display more than one script, repeat steps 2 andThe Script Contents box does not save previous selections.

View

Help

Close

View



ex’sdard

ers

Creating New Scripts

TheCreate Script command lets you create new scripts based on an Anncurrent values. Once you create a script you can edit it using any stantext editor.

For security reasons, you can create a script for any Annex parametexcept the Internet address (inet_addr), the administrative password(password), the port password (port_password), the access controlprotocol key (acp_key), the Local Area Transport key (lat_key), theoption key (option_key), and the virtual CLI password(vcli_password) parameters.

This section includes:

• Displaying the Create Script Window

• Understanding the Create Script Window Format

• Creating a Script

• Editing Script Files

If you leave theView Script window open as you create a script, youcan check your work easily.



Displaying the Create Script Window


TheCreate Script window originates in the File menu. To display thewindow:

1. Select a single Annex from the main window.

2. Hold the mouse button on the File menu and choose CreateScript.

TheCreate Script window appears (seeFigure14-2).

You can selectCreate Script from the menu first, and then return tothe main window to select an Annex. The order in which you performthese steps does not affect processing.

The following example shows theCreate Script window.

Figure 14-2. Create Script Window



It push

ew

Understanding the Create Script Window Format

The Create Script window lets you select parameters for a new script. includes an option box containing check buttons, a message box, andbuttons.

Choosing Create Script Options

TheCreate Script Option box includes check buttons that categorize the nscript’s parameters:

• Main Window Parameters creates a script using the Annex andparameters you chose in the main window. For example, if youchose theBasic_Annex group, each parameter in the group andthe values for the Annex you selected become the new script.

• All Parameters creates a script from all parameters of the Annexyou selected, including port parameters.

• All Annex Only Parameters creates a script from the Annex’sparameters, excluding port parameters.

• All Async Port Parameters creates a script from the Annex’sasynchronous port parameters.

• All Printer Port Parameters creates a script from the Annex’sprinter port parameters.

• All Enet Port Parameters creates a script from the Annex’sEthernet parameters.

• All DS0 Channel Parameters creates a script from the Annex’s T1DS0 Channel parameters.



pleteboxs:

• All DS1 Line Parameters creates a script from the Annex’s DS1parameters.

You can select any combination ofAll Annex Only Parameters,All AsyncPort Parameters,All Printer Port Parameters,All Enet Parameters,All DS0Channel Parameters, andAll DS1 Port Parameters. If you selectMainWindow Parameters or All Parameters, you cannot use other checkbuttons.

After you select options,Create Script may display a second window. Ifyou selected parameters that require port or channel information, theScript

Port Entry window appears first, followed by theScript File Selection window.For detailed information about these windows, seeCreating a Scriptinthis chapter.


TheCreate Script window’s message box includes the status and errormessages that result from the script creation process. After you comthe port entry window and/or the file selection window, this message monitors Annex Manager’s script creation process. The box display

• TheCreating script... status message, indicating that processingis active.

• TheScript creation complete message, indicating that the processhas taken place.

• Error messages. If your selections contain parameters that arenot eligible for scripts, or that do not exist, the message boxinforms you about error conditions. For more information, seeIdentifying Errors in this chapter.



to

Using Push Buttons

Create Script provides the following push buttons:

• displays theScript File Selection window and maydisplay theScript Port Entry window. When you complete thesewindows, Annex Manager displays status and error messages inthe message box and creates a new script.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents of theCreate Script window’s message box, or press toreturn to theCreate Script window.

• displays a window that explains theCreate Scriptcommand.

• removes theCreate Script window from your display.

Creating a Script

You can useCreate Script to select the parameters and values you wantsave in a script.

Using the CreateScript Command

To create a script:

1. Select a reachable Annex in the main window.

2. Select Create Script from the File menu.

TheCreate Script window appears (seeFigure14-2).

3. Select the Create Script Options you need.

For more information, seeChoosing Create Script Options on page14-9.

Apply

Save Msgs

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



4. Choose .

The Annex you selected and the options you chose determine thenext windows that appear:

• TheScript Port Entry window appears if you select:

• Any combination of theAll Async Port Parameters, All Printer

Port Parameters, All DS0 Channel Parameters, All DS1 Port

Parameters, andAll Enet Parameters, options.

• TheMain Windows Parameters option and a main windowparameter option that includes one or more port parameters.

• TheAll Parameters option.

• If you selectAll Annex Only Parameters, or non-portparameters from the main window, theScript File Selection

window displays. TheScript Port Entry window does notdisplay in this case.

5. When the Script Port Entry window appears, enter port informationand choose .

Figure 14-3. Create Script Port Entry Window

Apply

Apply



This window allows you to specify one or more port or channelnumbers that Annex Manager will use to create a script. TheScript

Port Entry window includes:

• All port types and a port number field for each type. AnnexManager highlights one or more port types based on theAnnex and options you selected. You can enter one or moreport or channel numbers or a range of numbers for anyhighlighted type. In the example above, the configurationhas no printer ports, soPrinter Port(s) will not accept portnumbers.

• Buttons that allow you to define wildcard characters. If youentered a single port or channel number in all fields above,you can create a script with wildcard indicators.

• Use the specified port number uses only the port numbersyou entered as part of the new script. This button is thedefault.

• Create wildcard port entries enters an asterisk (*) as thescript’s port or channel number and allows you to usethe script for any port number you enter in theExecute

Script command.

You can choose to return to theCreate Script window.

When you choose , the file selection window displays.

Cancel

Apply



ith

6. When the Script File Selection window displays, enter a script filename for the new script and choose .

Figure 14-4. Script File Selection Window

TheScript File Selection window displays the default script directory. Itallows you to:

• Overwrite an existing script that you created previously byselecting its name. When you select an existing script name, awindow appears that allows you to verify your choice. Youcannot overwrite a script that someone else created.

• Enter a new script name.

When you choose , Annex Manager creates a new script wthe name you specified.

OK

OK



ith:

r 19.

Editing Script Files

You can use an ascii editor to change saved script files.Annex Manager

verifies each file according to its first four lines.When you edit these files,you must use Annex Manager conventions. Script files always begin w

## DB_VERSION: V1.0# FORMAT: Parameter Name | Port Type | Port Number | Value#

For example, you might enterlock_enable| none | 0 | enabled. Script filesaccept:

• 0 in thePort Number field when you select non-port parameters.

• A port or channel number or an asterisk (to specify a wildcardport) in thePort Number field.

• Asy, ptr, eth, 2 (for DS1 ports) ornone (for All Annex Onlyparameters) in thePort Type field.

• Comment lines as long as each line begins with#. AnnexManager processing ignores these lines.

For detailed information about each parameter’s values, see Chapte



Theect.

Changing Parameter Values Using Scripts

You can use any existing script to reconfigure one or more Annexes. Execute Script command applies a script’s values to the Annexes you sel


• Displaying the Execute Script Window

• Understanding the Execute Script Window Format

• Executing a Script

Displaying the Execute Script Window

TheExecute Script window originates in the Configure menu. You canexecute an existing script for one or more Annexes.


To display the window:

1. Select one or more reachable Annexes from the main window.

2. Hold the mouse button on the Configure menu and chooseExecute Script.

TheExecute Script window appears (seeFigure14-5).

You can selectExecute Script from the menu and then return to themain window to select an Annex. The order in which you performthese steps does not affect processing.



toow.

The following example shows theExecute Script window.

Figure 14-5. Execute Script Window

Understanding the Execute Script Window Format

TheExecute Script window allows you to choose an existing script and apply its parameter values to Annexes you selected in the main wind

Using the List Box and Text Field

This window uses a list box, text field, and a message box:

• TheScript List box displays all files in Annex Manager’s defaultscript directory. You can select any script displayed here.

• The text field below theScript List box initially displays thedefault script directory. When you choose a script from the listbox, this field changes to display your selection. If you need toexecute a script stored in another directory, you can enter a pathand file name here.



f

r

nd

,


TheExecute Script window’s message box includes status and errormessages. It displays:

• TheExecuting script... status message, indicating that processingis taking place.

• TheScript execution complete message, indicating that theprocess has taken place without errors.

• Error messages. If the script you are executing contains portparameters that are not applicable for the Annex you selected, iyou enter integers or an IP address in an incorrect format, or ifprocessing times out, the message box informs you about erroconditions. For more information, seeIdentifying Errors onpage 14-22.

Using Push Buttons

Execute Script provides the following push buttons:

• activates the execution process. When you use thisbutton, the message box displays status and error messages aAnnex Manager applies the eligible values in your script to theAnnexes you selected.

If the script you selected contains wildcard indicators, theScriptPort Entry window appears. TheConfirmation window follows.You need to complete this window before you can execute thescript.

TheReset Parameters window appears if the parameterschanged by the script require Annex Manager to reset Annexesand if you selected theConfirm Auto Reset option in the pull-down menu.

Apply



r

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents of theExecute Script window’s message box, or press toreturn to theExecute Script window.

• displays a window that explains theExecute Scriptcommand.

• removes theExecute Script window from yourdisplay.

Executing a Script

You can useExecute Script to apply a script’s parameter values to one omore Annexes.

Using the ExecuteScript Command

To execute a script:

1. Select one or more reachable Annexes in the main window.

2. Select Execute Script from the Configure menu.

TheExecute Script window appears (seeFigure14-5).

3. Select the script name you need.

You can select a script from theScript List box or enter a file nameor a path and file name in the text field below this box.

4. Choose .

If you selected a script with one or more wildcard indicators, theScript Port Entry window appears.

Save Msgs

OK

Cancel

Help

Close

Apply



Figure 14-6. Script Port Entry Window for Execute Script

This window allows you to enter one or more port numbers thatAnnex Manager will use in place of the script’s wildcard indicator.

The window highlights only the port types that need numbers. Youcan:

• Enter one or more port numbers, a range of numbers orall forany highlighted type.

• Choose to return to theExecute Script window.

• Choose to execute the script.

If you select a script with wildcard indicators and donot enter a port number here, Annex Manager willexecute the script but will not use wildcard parameters.Error messages will identify these parameters.

Cancel

Apply



A window displays to confirm script execution for the Annexesyou selected.

Figure 14-7. Execute Script Confirmation Window

You can choose to execute the script orto return to theExecute Script window.

• TheReset Parameters window appears if you selected theConfirm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if theparameters changed by the script require Annex Manager toreset Annexes. If you did not selectConfirm Auto Reset, AnnexManager resets Annexes without notifying you.

Figure 14-8. Execute Script Reset Parameters Window

OK Cancel



ingrrorsThis

Identifying Errors

Script commands notify you about error conditions by displaying warnwindows and by listing errors in message boxes. You can encounter ebased on main window selections or on parameter value limitations. section includes:

• Create Script Command Errors

• Execute Script Command Errors

Create Script Command Errors

Create Script displays warning windows if you:

• Use theMain Window Parameters option for a list with more thanone Annex, and do not select an Annex and a main windowparameter option.

• Select an option that does not match the Annex or parametersyou select in the main window. For example, a warningappears if you select theAll Sync Port Parameters option and anAnnex that does not have synchronous port parameters.

• Use theMain Window Parameters option and do not enter port orchannel information for parameters that require thisinformation.



• Attempt to replace an existing script created by someone elsewith a new script you created.

• Select a port type that does not match one or more parameterport types. For example, a warning window appears if youchoosePrinter ports and theBasic_Async_Port group, or if youenter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex.

The message box includes error information when:

• Annex Manager cannot read or find values for one or moreparameters.

• Communication with the Annexes you selected times out.

• TheCreate Script operation does not use one or moreparameters, or finds specified parameters that are not eligiblefor scripts. In this case, theScript creation complete with errorsmessage appears.

Execute Script Command Errors

TheExecute Script command displays warning windows when you:

• Do not select a script from the list.

• Do not select an Annex when the list contains more than oneAnnex.



The message box includes error information when:

• Annex Manager cannot find the value of one or moreparameters.

• TheExecute Script operation does not use one or moreparameters, or finds specified parameters that are not eligiblefor scripts. In this case, theScript execution complete with errorsmessage appears.

Annex Manager will not execute a script if you enter an incorrectformat for an IP address or for an integer.


s

ands

oandhis

lect and

Chapter 15Comparing and Copying Parameters

and Values

Annex Manager’sCompare command verifies parameters and valuein existing Annexes and scripts; theCopy command lets you apply oneAnnex’s parameter values to other Annexes. You can use these commto review and change Annex configurations.


• Comparing Parameters and Values

• Copying Parameter Values

• Identifying Errors

Comparing Parameters and Values

TheCompare command lets you match parameters and values for twAnnexes, an Annex and a script, or two scripts. You can use this commto check existing values before you change an Annex configuration. Tsection includes:

• Displaying the Compare Window

• Understanding the Compare Window Format

• Comparing Parameter Values

Displaying the Compare Window

TheCompare command appears in the Configure menu. It lets you sethe Annexes and scripts Annex Manager uses to match parametersvalues.


Chapter 15 Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values Part 3 Customize Mode


To display theCompare window:

1. Create an Annex List.

You must create an Annex list if you want to compare two Annexesor an Annex and a script. You can create a list before you displaytheCompare window, or you can display theCompare window first,return to the main window to create the list, and chooseCompare

again. If you want to compare two scripts, you can skip this step.

2. Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose Compare.

TheCompare window appears.

Figure15-1 shows the Compare window for two Annexes.

Figure 15-1. Compare Window


Chapter 15 Comparing and Copying Parameters and ValuesPart 3 Customize Mode

s

ourlains

th

s are

lect

Understanding the Compare Window Format

TheCompare window allows you to choose the Annexes and/or scriptyou want to match. Once you select an option for comparison, theremaining boxes and fields in the window change to correspond to ychoice. This section describes the options you can select, and expthe boxes, fields and remaining buttons in the window.

You can compare and copy parameters as long as they exist in boAnnexes and scripts you select. For example, you cannot copyparameters from a Annex Primary Rate Annex to an Annex that haasynchronous ports, because the parameters sets in each Annexnot the same.

Choosing Compare Options

Compare uses option buttons at the top of the window to control thecontents of list boxes and the fields.

The left-hand button lets you choose a comparison type. You can sethe:

• Annex vs. Annex option to compare two Annexes,and/or ports, or two ports from a single Annex.

• Annex vs. Script option to compare one Annex and an existingscript based on the script’s parameters and values.

• Script vs. Script option to compare the parameters in two existingscripts.



ect

ou

you

The right-hand button appears only when you select theAnnex vs. Annex

option. This button lets you narrow comparison criteria. You can selthe:

• Main Window Params option to compare values based on theparameter options you selected in the main window.

• Annex Only Params option to compare all parameters, excludingport parameters.

• Async Port Params option to compare asynchronous portparameter values.

• ThePrinter Port Params option to compare printer port parametervalues.

• TheEnet Port Params option to compare Ethernet port parametervalues.

• The DS1 Line Params option to compare T1 DS1 port parametervalues.

The message below these buttons summarizes your selections. If ychoseAnnex vs. Annex and theMain Window Params options, the messageincludes information from the main window. If you change yourselections, this message reflects your changes.

After you select an option, you can choose the Annex and/or scriptswant to compare.



to

elds

r

Selecting Annexes and Scripts for Comparison

TheCompare command uses two list boxes and corresponding fields define the Annexes or scripts whose parameters will be matched. AComparison Output box monitors the results of the process.

Compare displays reachable Annexes only. If your Annex list includesan unreachable Annex, its name will not appear in theComparewindow’s list box.

Using List Boxes, thePort Type Button, andFields

The comparison option you select determines the kind of boxes and fithat display. When you compare:

• Two Annexes, each box displays your Annex lists, a port typebutton, and a port number field for each Annex list. A messageappears below theCompare Options reminding you that thecomparison will be based on your selections in the mainwindow. You can select one Annex from each box, and a porttype and number for each Annex.

Annex Manager compares two Annexes based on the parameteoptions you selected. If you selectMain Window Params and aparameter option that includes port parameters, the port typeyou enter must match your main window selections.Figure15-2 shows the window that compares two Annexes.

Figure 15-2. Compare Window for two Annexes



• An Annex and a script, the left-hand box displays the Annexlist and the right-hand box displays the default script directory.A message can appear below theCompare Options remindingyou that the port you enter will substitute for the script’swildcard ports. The port type button and port number fielddisplay below the Annex list box. You can select a singleAnnex from the list. If the script you select contains wildcardports, you must enter a port type and number.

The script selection field displays below theScript List box. Ifyou select an existing script, its directory and file name appearin the field. If you want to compare a script stored in anotherdirectory, you can enter its directory and name in the selectionfield. The example below shows the window for theAnnex vs.Script option.

Figure 15-3. Compare Window for Annex and Script



iffer,teru

• Two scripts, both boxes display the default script directoryfollowed by script selection fields. When you select an existingscript from each list, the script's path and file name appear inthe selection box. If you want to use a script that is not stored inthe default directory, you can enter its directory and name ineither selection box. The following example shows theComparewindow for two scripts.

Figure 15-4. Compare Window for Two Scripts

Reading theComparison Outputbox

TheComparison Output box reports the differences in parameter valuesbetween the Annexes and/or scripts you select. If parameter values dor if a parameter name does not exist, the box displays the parameinformation. TheComparison Output box format depends on the option yochoose.Table15-1 describes these formats.



eter

ces

Table 15-1. Comparison Output Box Information

TheCompare process considers the wildcard indicator (an asterisk(*)) as a special port number. If you selectScript vs. Script and the twoscripts have the same parameter but one uses a wildcard, the paramappears in the output box.

When Annex Manager completesCompare processing, the box lists thenumber of differences found. If you repeat theCompare command foranother combination of Annexes and scripts, new information replathe original display.

If values differ and youselect:

The Output Box includes:

Annex vs. Annex Parameter name followed by each Annexname, port number (if necessary) and theparameter value.

Annex vs. Script Parameter name followed by the Annexname and value, and the script name andvalue.

Script vs. Script Parameter name followed by each scriptname. Parameter values appear if aparameter exists in both scripts but valuesare different. If a parameter exists in onescript but not in the other, the box lists theparameter name and explains which scriptstores the parameter.



Using Compare Window Buttons

Compare provides the following push buttons:

• activates theCompare command based on theAnnexes, scripts, and parameters you selected.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents of theoutput box or press to return to theComparewindow.

• displays a window explainingCompare.

• removesCompare from your display.

Comparing Parameters and Values

Using the CompareCommand

To use theCompare command:

1. Select Compare from the Configure menu.

TheCompare window displays (seeFigure15-1).

2. Select the Compare Option you need.

The list boxes and fields change depending on the option youchoose (seeUsing List Boxes, the Port Type Button, and Fieldsearlier in this chapter). If you selectAnnex vs. Annex, you mustchoose aParameter Option from the main window.

If you selectAnnex vs. Annex orAnnex vs. Script, go to step3. If you selectScript vs. Script, skip steps 3 and 4 and goto step 5.

Apply

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



3. Choose an Annex from each Annex List box that displays.

If your list has one Annex, you do not need to select it. If you wantto compare two ports on the same Annex, select the same Annexin both list boxes.

4. Select one port type and a port number for each Annex List.

If you selected theAnnex vs. Annex option, you must select a porttype that matches the parameters you selected. For all otherCompare Options, you can select only the appropriate port type. Ifyou selected the same Annex in both list boxes, you must selectdifferent port numbers here. If you selectDS1 Line, 2 displaysautomatically; you cannot change this number.

If you selected Annex vs. Annex, go to step 6.

5. Choose an existing script from each Script List box that displays,or enter a script stored in another directory in the scriptselection field.

If you selected theAnnex vs. Script option and the script you usehas wildcard indicators, the comparison will be based on the portnumber you enter here.

If you selectedScript vs. Script and parameters match, but one scripthas wildcard indicators,Compare considers this a difference in portnumbers.

6. Choose

TheComparison Output box lists the parameters and values thatdiffer, displays the number of differences in theCompare process,and if necessary, lists error conditions. For more information abouterrors, seeIdentifying Errorsin this chapter.

Apply



torize

net

Copying Parameter Values

TheCopy command lets you copy a single Annex’s parameter valuesone or more Annexes. This command provides options that categothe parameters you can copy.

For security reasons, you can copy any parameter except the Interaddress (inet_addr), the administrative password (password), theport password (port_password), the access control protocol key(acp_key), the Local Area Transport key (lat_key), the option key(option_key) and the virtual password (vcli_password) parameters.


• Displaying the Copy Window

• Understanding the Copy Window Format

• Copying Parameter Values

Displaying the Copy Window


TheCopy command appears in the Configure menu. To display thewindow:

1. Create an Annex List.

2. Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose Copy.

TheCopy window appears.

Figure15-5 shows theCopy window.



Figure 15-5. Copy Window

Understanding the Copy Window Format

TheCopy window uses an option button, Annex list boxes, portinformation, and a message box. This section explains eachCopy windowelement.



ied.

ou

es

ld

Choosing Copy Options

The Copy Option button defines the parameters whose values will be copYou can select one of the following buttons:

• Main Window Params copies values for the parameters youselected in the main window. If you use this option with aparameter group or list that includes port parameters or withindividual port parameters, you can copy values from one portonly.

• Annex Only Params copies the parameters, excluding portparameters, from the Annex you select.

• Async Port Params copies asynchronous port parameter valuesfrom one Annex and port.

• Printer Port Params copies printer port parameter values from oneAnnex and port.

• Enet Port Params copies Ethernet port parameter values from oneAnnex and port.

• The DS1 Line Params copies DS1 line parameter values from oneAnnex and port.

The message below these buttons summarizes your selections. If ychoseMain Window Params, the message includes information from themain window. After you select an option, you can choose the Annexand ports you want for the copying process.

Copy does not provide an option for copying all parameters. If youwant to copy all parameters from one Annex to another, you shouuse theCreate Script andExecute Script commands explained inChapter 14.



ndion

t

port

Selecting Annexes and Ports for Copying

TheCopy window provides two Annex list boxes, a port type button atwo port number fields that allow you to specify the origin and destinatof parameter values.

Using Annex ListBoxes

Copy includes two Annex list boxes.

• TheCopy From box displays the Annex list you created in themain window. You can select a single Annex from this list. Ifyou need to add an Annex to the list, you can return to the mainwindow and reissue theCopy command.

• TheCopy To box displays the same list as does theCopy Frombox, and allows you to return to the main window to add anAnnex as well. In this window, however, you can select morethan one Annex. If you intend to copy port parameter valuesfrom one port to another on the same Annex, you need to selecthe same Annex in both boxes.

Selecting Port Types The port type button defines the kind of port parameters that will becopied. All Annexes involved in the copy process must use the sametype. This button displays based on theCopy Option you select at the topof the screen. If you select:

• Main Window Params, you can select the appropriate port type forthe parameter group or list you chose. For example, if you use agroup that includes asynchronous ports and you select printerports here, the copy command displays a warning and will notuse all asynchronous parameters. For more information, refer toIdentifying Errors in this chapter.

• Annex Only Params, you cannot use the port button or fields. Youcannot change port parameters.



s.ome ofing

es:

• DS1 Line Params, the corresponding option displaysautomatically, as does port2. You cannot change thisinformation.

• Async Port Params, Printer Port Params, or Enet Params, thecorresponding option displays automatically. You cannotchange the port type button.

Entering PortNumbers

The two port number fields list the ports involved in the copy procesYou can enter one port number in the left-hand field for the Annex frwhich you are copying values, and one or more numbers (or a rangnumbers) in the right-hand field for the Annex to which you are copyvalues.


TheCopy window's message box monitors copy operations. It includ

• A status message indicating that Annex Manager is obtainingparameter values from one Annex. For example, if you selectan Annex calledEmma, the box displays***Getting copy valuesfrom Emma***.

• TheCopying... status message indicating that the process istaking place, followed by a message for each Annex to whichyou are copying values. For example, if you copy values to anAnnex calledAlvin, thePerforming copy for Alvin messagedisplays.

• All parameters that were copied successfully.

• A message indicating that the process is complete. If there areno errors, the box displaysCopy completed. If error conditionsexist,Copy completed with errors displays. For more information,seeIdentifying Errors on page 15-19.



t.

ex

Using Push Buttons

Copy provides the following push buttons:

• activates theCopy command based on the Annexesand/or scripts you selected. When you press , theConfirmation window appears, allowing you to verify theCopycommand. TheReset Parameters window follows if youselectedConfirm Auto Reset from the pull-down menu and if theparameter values you are copying require an Annex to be rese

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the Output boxcontents or press to return to theCopy window.

• displays a window that explains theCopy command.

• removes theCopy window from your display.

Copying Parameter Values

Using the CopyCommand

You can use theCopy command to copy parameter values from one Annor port to one or more Annexes or ports. To use this command:

1. Create an Annex List in the main window.

Copy works only for reachable Annexes. For more informationabout Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. Move the pointer to the Configure menu and select Copy.

TheCopy window displays (seeFigure15-5).

Apply

Apply

Save Msgs

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



3. Select one option from the Copy Options button.

If you selectMain Window Params, you must choose a parametergroup or one or more parameters in the main window.

4. Choose one Annex from the Copy From window.

This list displays reachable Annexes only. If you need to add anAnnex to the list, you can return to the main window and reissuetheCopy command. If your list contains one Annex, you do notneed to select it.

5. Choose a port type.

You can choose a port type only if you chose theMain Window

Params option. The port type you choose must correspond to theport type in the parameters you selected in the main window.

If you selected an option other thanMain Window Params,skip this step and go to step 6.

6. Enter a port number in the field next to the port type button ifyou selected Main Window Params that require port information,Async Port Params, Printer Port Params, DS1 Line Params, or Enet PortParams.

If you chose Main Window, this port type must match those in theparameters you selected.

If you choseAnnex Only Params, or T1 DS1 Params, youdo not need to complete this field: skip this step and goto step 7.

7. Select one or more Annexes from the Copy To window.

If you need to add an Annex to the list, you can return to the mainwindow and reissue theCopy command. If your list contains onlyone Annex, you do not need to select it.

8. Enter one or more port numbers, or a range of port numbers inthe field below the Copy To box.



ts

9. Choose .

This step triggers several operations:

• A Confirmation window appears, listing the Annexes whoseparameter values will change.

Figure 15-6. Copy Command Confirmation Window

The message box displays status messages, and, if necessary, it liserror messages. For more information about errors, seeIdentifyingErrors in this chapter.

• TheReset Parameters window appears if you selected theConfirm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and ifthe parameters you are copying require Annex Manager toreset Annexes. If you did not selectConfirm Auto Reset,Annex Manager resets Annexes without notifying you.

Figure 15-7. Copy Command Reset Parameters Window

Apply



ageor on

Identifying Errors

TheCompare andCopy commands notify you about error conditions bydisplaying warning windows and by listing errors in output and messboxes. You can encounter errors based on main window selections parameter value limitations. This section includes:

• Compare Command Errors

• Copy Command Errors

Compare Command Errors

Warning Windows Compare displays warning windows if you:

• Do not select an Annex or a script from list boxes that containmore than one Annex or script.

• Use theAnnex vs. Annex option for a list with more than oneAnnex and do not select an Annex and parameters.

• UseAnnex vs. Annex, do not enter port information and thenselect parameters that require this information.

• UseScript vs. Script and select the same script in each window.

• Select a port type that does not match one or more parameterport types. For example, a warning window appears if youchooseEnet Port type and theBasic_Async_Port group, or if youenter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex.

Output Box • The output box displays errors whenCompare cannot findvalues for selected parameters or when communication with theAnnexes you selected times out.



Copy Command Errors

Warning Windows TheCopy command displays warning windows when you:

• Do not create an Annex list.

• Do not select an Annex from a list that contains more than oneAnnex.

• Use theMain Window Params option and do not selectparameters.

• Use theMain Window Params option and do not enter portinformation for parameter groups that require this information.

Message Box The message box includes error information when:

• Annex Manager cannot read or copy one or more parameters.

• You choose and theCopy operation cannot changeone or more parameters. The message box includes errormessages for those parameters that could not change. Inaddition, theCopy complete with errors message appears.

• Communication with the Annexes you selected times out.

Apply


canunyapter

ou thehis

Chapter 16Booting and Resetting Annexes

When you use a command that changes parameter values, youuse theBoot or Reset commands to apply new Annex configurations. Yocan useBroadcast to notify Annex users about a boot or reset, or send amessage to all devices connected to the Annexes you select. This chexplains these commands in the following sections:

• Booting Annexes

• Resetting an Annex Configuration

• Broadcasting Messages

• Configuring PRI Internal Modems

For detailed information about Annex configurations, refer to your Annexhardware guide.

Booting Annexes

TheBoot command allows you to boot one or more active Annexes. Ycan choose to boot Annexes immediately, set a time in the future forboot to take place, and send an explanatory message to all users. Tsection gives you directions for using theBoot command. It includes:

• Displaying the Boot Window

• Understanding the Boot Window Format

• Booting an Annex

TheBoot command terminates all active connections to an Annex.You cannot return to the main window once you display theBootwindow.


Chapter 16 Booting and Resetting Annexes Part 4 Control and Status Commands

Displaying the Boot Window


TheBoot command originates in the Configure menu. To display thewindow:

1. Create an Annex list in the main window.

For more information about Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. Select one or more Annexes from the list.

3. Hold the mouse button on the Configure menu, choose Boot andrelease the mouse button.

TheBoot window appears (seeFigure16-1).

The example below shows the Boot window for a single Annex.

Figure 16-1. Boot Window


Chapter 16 Booting and Resetting AnnexesPart 4 Control and Status Commands

uestwo

xtssageand.

r

In this example, thePref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr, andBoot Image fieldsdisplay values automatically. If you select multiple Annexes whose valdiffer, these fields do not contain values. For example, if you select Annexes with the samePref Load Addr and different values forPref Dump

Addr, a warning window will appear and thePref Dump Addr field will notdisplay a value.

Understanding the Boot Window Format

TheBoot window’s radio buttons define the type of boot operation. Tefields control the boot image, load and dump addresses, time, and meto users. Annex Manager’s standard push buttons activate the commThis section describes each window element.

Defining Boot Options

You can choose one of the followingBoot Option buttons:

• Immediate boots selected Annexes as soon as you activate thecommand.

• Delayed accepts aBoot Time at which the boot will occur. Youcan enter more than one delayed request. However, if you entea second request for a time earlier than an existing request, theselected Annexes will boot at the earlier time and all otherexisting boot requests will be deleted.

• Dump saves the current image to the address you enter in thePref Dump Addr field.

• Diagnostic places an Annex in test mode and begins diagnostictests. When these tests end, the Annex is in ROM Monitormode and cannot respond to Annex Manager requests until youboot it.



g.n.

,

• Abort cancels all delayed boot requests.

• Quiet boots the Annexes you selected without sending awarning message to users.

• Save In Flash loads the boot image and saves it in flash memory.When you reboot, you can use the image in the flash memoryrather than an image from a server on the network.

For Boot Options other thanQuiet, Annex Manager sends a statusmessage to all terminals connected to the Annexes you are bootinEach message contains Annex names and an indication of shutdowFor Delayed, the message includes the boot time. ForAbort, themessage indicates cancellation.

Using Text Fields

The window’s text fields control theBoot command’s addresses, sourcetime, image, and message to users:

• Pref Load Addr stores the address from which the boot commandwill load the image.

• Pref Dump Addr accepts the address to whichBoot will dump thecurrent image. You can use this field only when you select theDump option.

• Load Dump Gateway accepts the address of a gateway that anAnnex uses when it loads or dumps an image to a host locatedon a different network or subnetwork.

• Boot Time lets you enter the time at which the boot operationwill occur. You can use this field only when you select theDelayed option. You can enter a time in HH:MM format, or youcan enter a plus sign (+) followed by a time in HH:MM formatto indicate an amount of time in the future.



• Boot Image accepts the path and file name for the operationalcode that will be loaded. If you change theBoot Image, be surethat the new image is appropriate for the Annex types youselect. If you do not specify an image name, each Annex youselected will boot using the current default image for thatAnnex.

• Boot Message allows you to add your own text to the standardboot message. The text you enter displays on every terminalconnected to the Annexes you select for booting. You cannotuse this field if you selected theQuiet option.

ThePreferred Load Address, Preferred Dump Address, andBoot Imagefields use the default addresses and image. If you select:

• A single Annex,Boot displays the default addresses and image.

• Two or more Annexes with the same preferred load and dumpaddress and default image,Boot displays these addresses andimage.

• Two or more Annexes with different default values for load ordump addresses and images,Boot displays a warning messageinforming you about this condition and leaves the fields blank.

If you leave these fields blank,Boot uses the default value forPreferred Load Address, Preferred Dump Address andBoot Image foreach Annex you selected.

Using Boot Window Buttons

Boot uses the following push buttons:

• activates theBoot command for the Annexes youselected.

• displays a window that explains theBoot command.

• removes theBoot window from your display.

Apply

Help

Close



ctedions

ard

er

Understanding Boot Command Messages

TheBoot command sends a standard message to all terminals conneto the Annexes you are booting. Message text depends on the optyou select. If you select:

• Immediate, Dump, Diagnostic, or Save in Flash, the message textincludes the Annex names and an indication of shutdown. Forexample, booting an Annex named “Emma” sends thefollowing message:***Annex (emma) shutdown message from NAby SNMP@network manager***.

• Delayed, the message contains the boot time and amount of timeuntil the boot will take place. For example, if you schedule aboot for 11:50 a.m. on Thursday, the message would say***Annex (emma) shutdown message from NA by SNMP@networkmanager*** Annex (emma) going down in 57 minutes (11:50 Thu).

• Abort to stop a scheduled boot, the message indicates that theboot has been cancelled. For example, if you cancel the bootscheduled for 11:50 a.m. on Thursday, the message readsAnnex(emma) boot at 11:50 is canceled.

• Quiet, no boot messages are sent.

For all options exceptQuiet, you add your own message by using theBoot

Message field. If you create your own message, its text follows the standboot message.

Booting Annexes

You can use theBoot command for one or more Annexes. Annex Managchanges values for thePref Load Addr andPref Dump Addr parameters beforethe boot takes place.



Using the BootCommand

To boot an Annex:

1. Create an Annex List and select one or more Annexes.

For more information about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. Select Boot from the Configure menu.

TheBoot window appears (seeFigure16-1). You cannot return tothe main window unless you close theBoot window.

3. Choose the Boot Option you need.

Refer toDefining Boot Operations earlier in this chapter fordetailed information about each option.

4. Enter information in the window’s text fields.

Text fields may be required or may not be available, depending ontheBoot Option you choose. If you selected:

• Immediate, Diagnostic, or Save in Flash, you can enter text inthePref Load Addr, Boot Image, andBoot Message fields.

• Delayed, you must complete theBoot Time field. You canenter a time in HH:MM format, or you can enter a plus sign(+) followed by a time in HH:MM format to indicate anamount of time in the future. You can enter text in thePref

Load Addr, Boot Image, andBoot Message fields.

You can enter more than one delayed request. However, ifyou enter a second request for a time earlier than an existingrequest, the selected Annexes will boot at the earlier timeand all other existing boot requests will be deleted.



• Dump, you can enter text in thePref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr,Boot Image, and Boot Message fields.

• Abort, you can enter text in theBoot Message field. You cannotcomplete other fields.

• Quiet, you can enter values in thePref Load Addr andBoot Imagefields, but you cannot enter text in theBoot Message field.

If you select a single Annex, Pref Load Addr, Pref DumpAddr, and Boot Image display the Annex’s currentaddresses and image.

If you select multiple Annexes whose values differ forPref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr, orBoot Image, values donot appear. If you leave these fields blank,Boot willuse the current load and dump addresses for eachselected Annex, and will use the value in thedefault_image_name parameter forBoot Image. Youcan enter new values in any available field.

5. Choose .

A Confirmation window appears.

Figure 16-2. Boot Command Confirmation Window

Apply

WARNING



ers.

You can choose to activate the boot or to

return to theBoot window. When you choose , AnnexManager notifies the console and all terminals connected to theAnnexes you selected about the boot.

Once the boot takes place, a warning window appears. This windowlists the Annexes where the boot transmission was successful and,if necessary, lists Annexes where the boot transmission wasunsuccessful.

If you boot an active Annex, its status in the mainwindow’s list changes toNOT REACHABLE. In fact,although the Annex is not available while bootprocessing takes place, a successful boot does restorethe Annex on your network. You can useVerify AnnexState to restore the display.

Resetting Annex Configurations

You can use theReset command to change a specific Annex or portconfiguration without booting. This command lets you reset port andinterface settings, several configuration file options, and name servThis section explains theReset command in the following sections:

• Displaying the Reset Window

• Choosing a Reset Option

• Resetting an Annex

OK Cancel

OK



s

Displaying the Reset Window


TheReset command originates in the Configure menu. To display thiwindow:




3. Hold the mouse button on the Configure menu, choose Resetand release the mouse button.

TheReset window appears (seeFigure16-3).

The following example shows the Reset window.

Figure 16-3. Reset Window



s, you

er

e

Understanding the Reset Window Format

TheReset window uses radio buttons, port type and port number fieldand push buttons to apply parameter value changes to the Annexesselect.

Choosing a Reset Option

TheReset window’s radio buttons define the options that Annex Managwill change.

Reset terminates active connections to an Annex when you use thAll, All Async Ports, All Printer Ports, All Virtual Ports, All T1 DS1 Ports(Hard), All T1 DS1 Ports (Soft), All Internal Modems, Individual Ports, AllInternal Modems, Individual Internal Modems, Individual Internal Modems,andPRI Line options.

You can choose one of the following buttons:

• All resets all items listed in the remaining buttons.

• Annex All resets all items included in theLAT, Macros, Message ofthe Day, Name Server, andSecurity buttons.

• All Async Ports resets the asynchronous ports.

• All Printer Ports resets the parallel printer ports.

• All Virtual Ports resets the virtual connections.

• All T1 DS1 Ports (Hard) resets the T1 engine and terminates theT1 Drop/Insert interface and modem sessions.

• All T1DS1 Ports (Soft) resets parameters and will disrupt serviceonly on DS0 channels that have been changed.

• All T1 DS1 ESF Counters resets all T1 engine statistics.



• All Interfaces resets the interface parameters.

• All Internal Modems resets entries for internal modems only.

• Individual Ports resets only the port type you enter in the optionbutton below theReset Option box and the port numbers youenter in the adjacent field.

• Individual Internal Modems resets one or more internal modemsyou enter in the option button below theReset Option box andthe modem numbers you enter in the adjacent field.

• Dialout resets entries used for dialing out from a Unix host to aremote node over a port in slave mode.

• LAT resets LAT (Local Area Transport) parameters. When youuse this option, existing connections keep their current values:new parameter values apply only to LAT connectionsestablished after you useReset.

• Macros resets macros after you customize them in the Annexconfiguration file.

• Message of the Day resets the file for the message that appearswhen you establish a connection to an Annex.

• External Modems resets modem entries for external modemsonly.

• PRI Line resets a PRI line for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex.

• PRI Sessions reloads session parameter blocks in theconfiguration file for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex’s session

• Name Server resets the parameters and host table that control anAnnex’s ability to translate addresses to names.

• Security resets security parameters.



e:

Entering Port and Modem Information

If you choose theIndividual Port or Individual Internal Modem option, you mustcomplete the field located below the Reset Options box.

Entering Port orModem Numbers

To choose a port type and port numbers or an internal modem nam


If you choseIndividual Ports, the menu displaysAsync Port(s), andPrinter Port(s). If you chose Individual Internal Modems, the menudisplays Internal Modem(s). If you chosePRI Line, the menu displaysDS1 Line(s).

2. Highlight the selection you want and release the button.

If you choseIndividual Internal Modems, you do not have to selectan option here. If you chosePRI Line, 2 displays automatically.

3. Enter one or more port, line, or modem numbers in the field.

To enter specific ports or modems, separate numbers with commasor indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, youmight enter1, 3, 8 to specify three ports, or1-3, 8 to specify ports1 through 3 and port 8.

Using Push Buttons

Reset uses the following push buttons:

• activates theReset command for the Annex youselected.

• displays a window that explains theResetcommand.

• removes theReset window from your display.

Apply

Help

Close



Resetting an Annex

Using the ResetCommand

To reset an Annex:

1. Create an Annex List and select one or more Annexes.

2. Select Reset from the Configure menu.

TheReset window displays (seeFigure16-3).

3. Choose the Reset Option you need.

You can select one option. For detailed information about theseoptions, refer toChoosing a Reset Optionearlier in this chapterand to the Remote Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX.

Reset terminates active connections to an Annex when you use theAll, All Async Ports, All Printer Ports, All Virtual Ports, All T1 DS1 Ports

(Hard), All T1 DS1 Ports (Soft), All Internal Modems, Individual Ports

andIndividual Internal Modems options.

If you selected theIndividual Ports ortheIndividual InternalModem option, continue to step 4. For all other options,skip step 4 and go to step 5.

4. Enter a port type and port or modem number information in thefields below the Reset Options box.

You can use these fields only if you selected theIndividual Ports orthe Individual Internal Modems option.

5. Choose .

A Confirmation window appears.

Apply



rith

des:

Figure 16-4. Reset Command Confirmation Window

You can choose to reset an Annex or toreturn to theReset window.

Once you reset an Annex, a warning window appears. This windowlists the Annexes that were reset and, if necessary, lists AnnexeswhereReset was unsuccessful.

Broadcasting Messages

TheBroadcast command lets you send messages to all ports on one omore Annexes. You can use this command to communicate quickly wall terminals connected to the Annexes you select. This section inclu

• Displaying the Broadcast Window

• Understanding the Broadcast Window Format

• Sending a Broadcast Message

WARNING

OK Cancel



he

tonslains

Displaying the Broadcast Window


TheBroadcast command appears in the Configure menu. To display twindow:




3. Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose Broadcast.

TheBroadcast window appears (seeFigure16-5).

The following example shows the Broadcast window.

Figure 16-5. Broadcast Window

Understanding the Broadcast Window Format

TheBroadcast window uses radio buttons, a message box, and push butto transmit a message to the Annexes you selected. This section expthese window elements.



ort to

date

nex

Choosing a Broadcast Destination

Before you broadcast a message, you need to choose the type of pwhich you will send it. The window’sBroadcast Destination buttons specifyport types. You can select one of the following buttons:

• All sends your message to all asynchronous ports and to thosethat have virtual connections to the Annexes you select.

• Async sends your message to all asynchronous ports on theAnnexes you select.

• Virtual sends your message to all virtual connections on selectedAnnexes.

When you choose a destination, you can enter message text.

Writing a Message

This window’sBroadcast Message box lets you enter the text of yourmessage. Your message can:

• Use 1 to 128 characters.

• Contain any number of lines. You can change theBroadcastwindow’s size to display a message that exceeds the standardmessage box, or you can use and to display any part ofyour message.

TheBroadcast command uses the standard message followed by the and time information and by the text you entered. For example, abroadcast message sent to warn users that you want to boot an Anmight read ***Broadcast from SNMP net manager

[Thu Aug 18 11:16:34 1994]*** Please log off Emma immediately for reboot.



.

Using Push Buttons

Broadcast uses the following push buttons:

• activates theBroadcast command for the Annexesyou selected.

• displays a window that explains theBroadcastcommand.

• removes theBroadcast window from your display.

Sending a Broadcast Message

Using the BroadcastCommand

You can useBroadcast when you need to communicate quickly with allterminals connected to an Annex. To send a message:



2. Select Broadcast from the Configure menu.

TheBroadcast window displays (seeFigure16-5).

3. Choose the Broadcast Destination you need.

You can selectAll, Async or Virtual. For detailed information, referto Choosing a Broadcast Destinationearlier in this chapter.

4. Enter message text in the Broadcast Message box.

Your message can use up to 128 characters in any number of lines

5. Choose .

Annex Manager sends your message to all users connected to theAnnexes you selected.

Apply

Help

Close

Apply



ex.

o

Configuring PRI Internal Modems

ThePRI Internal Modems command allows you to select and change thestatus of one or more internal modems for an ISDN Primary Rate AnnThis section includes:

• Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window

• Understanding the Set PRI Internal Modems Window

• Changing Internal Modem Status

Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window


TheSet PRI Internal Modems command appears in the Configure menu. Tdisplay the window:




3. Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose PRI InternalModems.

The window appears (seeFigure16-6).



e

The following example shows theSet PRI Internal Modems window.

Figure 16-6. Set PRI Internal Modems Window

Understanding the Set PRI Internal ModemsWindow

You can use theSet PRI Internal Modems window to view the current statusof individual internal modems or to change the status of one or mormodems. This window uses a list box and radio buttons.

WARNING



yere.

s.

ur

Using the Modems List Box

TheModems List box includes all internal modems for the ISDN PrimarRate Annexes you selected. You can select one or more Annexes hThis box includes:

• TheAnnex name.

• TheModem # number for each internal modem.

• The current Status for each modem:

• Available indicates that the modem is in working order andis not being used.

• Busy indicates that the modem has been set to this status tomake it unavailable.

• Used indicates that the modem is handling a call.

• Failed indicates that the modem is not working.

Using the Modem Status Button

TheModem Status button allows you change an internal modem’s statuYou can select:

• Available to make a modem available when its current status isBusy or Failed. You cannot chooseAvailable for modems that arein use.

• Busy to prevent an ISDN Primary Rate Annex from selecting amodem that may not be operating properly. If you selectBusyfor a modem with aUsed status, theBusy status will not takeeffect until the current call terminates.

When you change a modem status, the Modem List box reflects yochanges immediately.



als

Using Push Buttons

Set PRI Internal Modems uses the following push buttons:

• activates the PRI Internal Modems command for themodems you selected.

• gives you the current status of each internal modem.

• displays a window that explains the PRI InternalModems command.

• removes theSet PRI Internal Modems window fromyour display.

Changing Internal Modem Status

Using the BroadcastCommand

You can use when you need to communicate quickly with all terminconnected to an Annex. To send a message:



2. Select PRI Internal Modems from the Configure menu.

TheSet PRI Internal Modems window displays.

3. Select one or more modems from the Modems List box.

The system highlights your choices

4. Choose the Modem Status you need.

If you are setting modems toAvailable, you can skip this step.

5. Press .

Annex Manager changes status for the modems you selected.

Apply

Update

Help

Close

Apply


ex,

ion,

ingions:

ds

Chapter 17Displaying Status Information

Annex Manager retrieves information about the status of an Annits ports, and its interfaces. Status commands display hardware andsoftware information as well as basic performance statistics. In additAnnex Manager provides theDiscover Annexes command. This commandidentifies all Annexes known to a search device by retrieving its routtable. This chapter describes these commands in the following sect

• Displaying Annex Status Information

• Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information

• Displaying Interface Status Information

• Displaying PRI CSU Internal Status Information

• Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information

• Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information

• Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information

• Displaying Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information

• Identifying Annexes

All status windows are snapshots of current values: status commando not provide active polling of data. These commands and theDiscover Annexes command provide information for display only anddo not change Annex configurations.

Displaying Annex Status Information

You can display basic information about a single Annex using theAnnex

Status command. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex Status Window

• Understanding the Annex Status Window


Chapter 17 Displaying Status Information Part 4 Control and Status Commands

Displaying the Annex Status Window


TheAnnex Status command originates in theStatus menu.Figure17-1. Todisplay the window:


For more information about Annex lists, seeChapter4.

2. Select a single Annex from the list.

3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Annex Status,and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex Status window appears (seeFigure17-1). The name ofthe Annex you selected appears in the window’s title bar.

The example below shows the window.

Figure 17-1. Annex Status Window

WARNING


Chapter 17 Displaying Status InformationPart 4 Control and Status Commands

aion

g

Understanding the Annex Status Window

TheAnnex Status window uses text fields to display information about single Annex. This command does not allow you to change informatin the window.

Annex Status displays information inLoading, Mbufs, andMemory boxes.Each box groups information in text fields.

Understanding the Loading Box

TheLoading box provides information about activity on the Annex usinthe following fields:

• System Up Time provides the time since the Annex was bootedin days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

• Rescheds (min/tot) displays the number of processes whose timeslice expired in the last minute followed by the number ofprocesses whose time slice expired since the Annex wasbooted.

• CPU % Utilization displays the percentage of CPU resourcescurrently being used.

• Switches (min/tot) lists the number of context switches in the lastminute(min) followed by the number of context switches sincethe Annex was booted (tot).

• Procs (act/most/max) displays the number of currently activeprocesses (act), the largest number of active processes since theAnnex was booted (most), and the total number of processstructures allocated (max).

• Activates (min/tot) supplies the number of processes activatedduring the last minute (min), followed by the number ofprocesses activated since the Annex last booted (tot).



er

Understanding the Mbufs Box

TheMbufs (memory buffer) box provides information about the numband use of memory buffers in the Annex.

• Total indicates the number of memory buffers allocated by theAnnex kernel.

• Free provides the number of currently available memorybuffers.

• Min Free shows the smallest number of memory buffers that hasbeen available since the Annex was booted.

• Denied indicates the number of times a process was denied amemory buffer because the buffer was not available.

Understanding the Memory Box

TheMemory box gives you statistics about an Annex’s memory:

• Total shows the Annex’s total memory measured in bytes.

• Free indicates the amount of currently available memory.

• Min Free provides the lowest amount of free memory that hasbeen available since the Annex was booted.

• Avail indicates the amount of memory that was availableimmediately after the Annex was booted.

There may be a problem with Annex software if:

• Denied shows a number other than zero.

• Min Free displays zero or its value slowly decreases overtime.

If you encounter these circumstances, please contact BayNetworks technical support.



e

Using Push Buttons

Annex Status uses the following push buttons:

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents oftheAnnex Status window’s output box, or press toreturn to theAnnex Status window.

• removes theAnnex Status window from your display.

Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information

TheAnnex Async Port Status command provides information about one ormore asynchronous ports for an Annex. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window

• Understanding the Annex Async Port Status Window

• Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information

Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window


TheAsync Port command originates in the Status menu. To display thwindow:


For more information about creating Annex lists, seeChapter4.


3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Async PortStatus and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex Async Port Status window appears (seeFigure17-2). Thename of the Annex you selected appears in the window’s title bar.

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Close


Chapter 17 Displaying Status Information

17


ts.

etion

The following example shows the window for two asynchronous por

Figure 17-2. Annex Async Port Status Window

Understanding the Annex Async Port StatusWindow

TheAnnex Async Port Status window displays information in thePort Totals

andPort Information boxes. In addition, it includes a port number field. Likall Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex configurafrom this window.

Annex Manager User Guide-6


s the


Before you can display port statistics, you must complete theAsync Port(s)

field located below thePort Information box.

Entering PortNumbers

To enter port numbers:

Enter one or more port numbers in the Async Port(s) field.

To enter specific ports, separate port numbers with commas orindicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you mightenter1,3,8 to specify three ports, or1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through3 and port 8. In addition, you can enterall.

When you use , port statistics appear.

Understanding the Port Totals Box

Annex Async Port Status displays information in thePort Totals andPort

Information boxes.ThePort Totals box gives you statistics for all asynchronouports from the time the Annex was last booted or reset. This box includesfollowing fields:

• Num Ports displays the total number of asynchronous ports onthe Annex you selected.

• Input Chars shows the total number of characters received.

• Output Chars lists the total number of characters transmitted.

• Parity Errors indicates the total number of parity errors detected.

• Overrun Errors displays the total number of overrun errors.

• Framing Errors displays the total number of framing errorsdetected.

Apply



17


he

Understanding the Port Information Box

ThePort Information box displays statistics for each port you entered in tAsync Port(s) field. This box includes the following categories:

• Port Number shows the port numbers you entered. Each numberappears on a separate line.

• In Flow State shows the current status of input flow control. Ifthe field displays:

• Go, flow control is allowed.

• Stop, flow control is not allowed.

• None, flow control is not applicable for this port.

• Unknown, the flow control status cannot be identified.

• Out Flow State indicates the current status of output flow control.If the field displays:

• Go, flow control is allowed.

• Stop, flow control is not allowed.

• None, flow control is not applicable for this port.

• Unknown, the flow control status cannot be determined.

• In Chars displays the number of characters received by eachport.

• Out Chars indicates the number of characters transmitted fromeach port.

• Session Number provides the number of open sessions on theport that are connected, connecting, or disconnecting.



• Oper Status shows a port’s operational state independent of flowcontrol. If this field displays:

• Up, the port is functioning normally.

• Down, the port is not functioning.

• Active, the port is up and has a user logged in.

• Current User identifies the user logged in to the ports youselected.

• Login Time displays the day and time that the port was openedaccording to the Annex clock.

• Port Proto defines the protocol that is active on a port. This fieldcan display the following codes.

• Cli indicates that this is a CLI port opened by a deviceconnected to the port or by a connection from a host as avirtual CLI.

• psvr indicates that this is a slave port.

• vcli indicates that this is a virtual port.

• dp defines a dedicated port.

• lpd indicates that the port is using the Annex line printerdaemon.

• ppp indicates that the PPP protocol is active.

• slip indicates that the SLIP protocol is active.

• arap indicates that the ARAP protocol is active.

• ftp indicates that the port is an FTP interface.

• ndp indicates that the port is a Novell dedicated port.

• ipx indicates that the port is a dedicated IPX port used onlyfor dial-in access.

• dyndial defines a dynamic dial port.



17


Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex Async Port Status command uses the following push buttons:

• displays status information about the asynchronousports you selected.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofboth boxes, or press to return to theAnnex Async PortStatus window.

• displays a window explaining theAnnex Async PortStatus command.

• removes theAnnex Async Port Status window fromyour display.

Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information

Using the Command To display information about the asynchronous ports you entered:

1. Create an Annex List in the main window and select a singleAnnex.


2. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Async PortStatus and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex Async Port Status window appears.

3. Enter the port numbers you need in the Async Port(s) field.

You can enter one or more numbers, a range of numbers separatedby commas or dashes, orall.

4. Press .

Port status information appears in the Port Totals and PortInformation boxes.

Apply

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close

Apply



’s

ow:

Displaying Interface Information

TheAnnex Interface Status command provides information about an Annexinterfaces. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window

• Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window

Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window


TheInterface command appears in the Status menu. To display the wind




3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Interface andrelease the mouse button.

TheAnnex Interface Status window appears (seeFigure17-3). Thename of the Annex you selected appears in the window’s title bar.



17


ge

x

.

The following example shows anAnnex Interface Status window.

Figure 17-3. Annex Interface Status Window

Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window

TheAnnex Interface Status window displays information inGeneral Information

andStatistics boxes. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot chanan Annex configuration from this window.

Reading the General Information Box

TheGeneral Information box gives you basic interface information for the Anneyou selected. This box includes the following categories:

• Intf Name provides a text description of the interface. This caninclude the interface name, manufacturer, and version identifier



.oing

-

• Type categorizes the interface according to the physical/linkprotocols immediately below the network layer.

• MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) shows the size of thelargest packet (in octets) that the interface can send or receive.

• Speed displays an estimate of the interface’s current bandwidthin bits per second.

• Oper Status shows the interface’s current operational state. Thisfield can displayUp or Down.

• Last Change indicates the time at which the interface entered itscurrent operational state.

Reading the Statistics Box

TheStatistics box displays statistics related to traffic on each interfaceThis box uses a separate line for information about incoming and outgtraffic. It includes the following categories:

• Intf Name provides a text description of the interface.

• Octets shows the total number of octets received or transmittedon the interface, including framing characters.

• Ucast Pkts lists the number of subnetwork-unicast packetsreceived from or delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

• NUcast Pkts lists the number of subnetwork-broadcast orsubnetwork-multicast packets received from or sent to a higherlayer protocol.



17


• Discards displays the number of inbound or outbound packetsthat could not be delivered to a higher-layer protocol. Packetsmay have been discarded due to lack of buffer space, and maynot have had errors.

• Errors provides the number of packets that could not be receivedor transmitted due to errors.

• Unknown Protocols lists the number of inbound packets discardedbecause of unknown or unsupported protocols.

• Queue Length displays the number of outbound packets in thepacket queue.

Using Push Buttons

Annex Interface Status uses the following push buttons:

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents of theAnnex Interface Status window’s output box, or pressto return to theAnnex Interface Status window.

• removes theAnnex Interface Status window from yourdisplay.

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Close



ex.

he

Displaying PRI Channels Status Information

The Annex PRI Channels Status command provides information about Bchannels with established calls on a single ISDN Primary Rate AnnThis section includes:

• Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window

• Understanding the Annex PRI Channels Status Window

• Viewing PRI Channels Status Information

Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window


ThePRI Channels command originates in the Status menu. To display twindow:



2. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex from the list.

3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select PRI.

4. Choose Channels, and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex PRI Channels Status window appears (seeFigure17-4).



17


ot

The following example shows theAnnex PRI Channels Status window.

Figure 17-4. Annex PRI Channels Status Window

Understanding the Annex PRI Channels StatusWindow

TheAnnex PRI Channels Status window displays information in theAsync

Information and Sync Information boxes. In addition, it includes theChannel(s)

field andSort Options buttons. Like all Annex status commands, you cannchange an Annex configuration from this window.



the

Entering Channel Information and Sorting Options

Before you can display PRI channels statistics, you must complete Channel(s) field located below theSync Information box. If you want tochange the sorting order for statistics, you can use theSort Options buttons.

Entering ChannelInformation

To enter specific channels: TheChannel(s) field accepts one or moreB-channel numbers.

1. Enter one or more B-channel numbers.

You can separate numbers with commas or indicate a range ofnumbers using dashes. For example, you might enter1, 20 tospecify two channels, or1-10, 20 to specify channels 1 through 10and channel 20. In addition, you can enterall.

2. Press .

ISDN Primary Rate Annex statistics appear (seeFigure17-4).

Choosing SortOptions

TheSort Options buttons control how theAsync Information andSync

Information boxes list information.

Select an option.

You can chooseChannel to sort information according to channelnumber orUser to sort information by user name.

Apply



17


xannel

Understanding the Information Boxes

Annex PRI Channels Status window displays information in theAsync

Information, andSync Information boxes. Since the ISDN Primary Rate Anneassigns calls to channels based on a call’s characteristics, a single chcan appear in theAsync Information or Sync Information box.

• The Async Information box lists information about asynchronousor V.120 calls.

• The Sync Information box includes information aboutsynchronous calls.

Each box lists information in the following categories:

• Channel lists the B-channel number you entered in theChannel(s) field.

• Call Type categorizes a call using a code and a numberrepresenting the modem or the logical connection assigned to acall.

• TheAsync Information box lists asynchronous calls asasy andV.120 calls asta.

• TheSync Information box lists calls assyn.

• Called # identifies the telephone number the user entered to dialinto the Annex.

• Calling # identifies the telephone number from which the calloriginated.

• User lists the user name.



Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex PRI Channels Status window uses the following push buttons:

• displays status information about the ISDN PrimaryRate Annex you selected.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofall boxes, or press to return to theAnnex PRIChannels Status window.

• displays a window explaining the Annex PRIChannels Status command.

• removes the Annex PRI Channels Status window fromyour display and returns you to the main window.

Viewing PRI Channels Status Information

Using the Command To display Information about thePRI channels you entered:

1. Create an Annex List in the main window and select a singleISDN Primary Rate Annex.



3. Choose Channels and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex PRI Channels Status window appears.

4. Enter one or more channel numbers.

You can enter one number, a range of numbers separated bycommas or dashes, orall.

Apply

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



17


ay

5. Select a Sort Option.

You can enterChannel or User.

6. Press .

ISDN Primary Rate Annex status information appears in theAsync

Information andSync Information boxes.

Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information

TheAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status command provides T1 line informationabout the Annex T1 network interface. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window

• Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window

• Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information

Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU StatusWindow


ThePRI Internal CSU command originates in the Status menu. To displthe window:



2. Select a single Annex that contains a CSU interface from thelist.


4. Choose Internal CSU and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status window appears(seeFigure17-5).

Apply



tion

The following example shows theAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status window.

Figure 17-5. Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window

Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU StatusWindow

TheAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status window displays information in thePRI CSU Alarms, PRI CSU Status andInterval Information boxes. In addition, itincludes theInterval(s) field. You can enter information in this field. Likeall Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex configurafrom this window.



lete

Entering Interval Information

Before you can display PRI Internal CSU statistics, you must compthe Interval(s) field located below theInterval Errored Seconds box.

Entering Intervals The T1 engine records 96 15-minute intervals.

1. Select an option from the menu next to Interval(s).

You can select:

• Specified to viewPRI Internal CSU statistics for one ormore intervals.

• Current to seePRI Internal CSU statistics for the currentinterval.

• Total to display cumulative statistics for each of the 96intervals.

If you selectSpecified, you must complete the text field describedin step 2. If you choseCurrent or Total, you can skip to step 3.

2. Enter one or more interval numbers in the text field.

To enter specific intervals, separate interval numbers with commasor indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, youmight enter1, 3, 8 to specify three intervals, or1-3, 8 to specifyintervals 1 through 3 and interval 8. In addition, you can enterall.

3. Press .

PRI Internal CSU statistics appear (seeFigure17-5).

Apply



I

Understanding the Alarms Box

ThePRI CSU Alarms box gives you historical and current information about PRCSU alarms. This box includes the following fields:

• Blue History indicates whether a Blue alarm has occurred sincethe T1 engine has been online. This field displaysTrue or False.

• Blue gives you the current status of the Blue alarm. If this fielddisplaysOn, the T1 line is receiving AIS (all ones, unframed)from the network.

• Red History indicates whether a Red alarm has occurred sincethe T1 engine has been online. This field displaysTrue or False.

• Red reports the current status of the Red alarm. If this fielddisplaysOn, the CSU is detecting loss of frame synchronizationand is sending a Yellow alarm to the network.

• Yellow History indicates whether a Yellow alarm has occurredsince the T1 engine has been online. This field displaysTrue orFalse.

• Yellow indicates the current status of the Yellow alarm. If thisfield displaysOn, the T1 line is receiving a yellow alarm fromthe network.



17


.

.

Understanding the Status Box

ThePRI CSU Status box displays statistics for the T1 network interfaceThis box includes the following categories:

• Sync indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting framesynchronization. If this field displaysFalse, the T1 engine haslost frame synchronization and has entered the red alarm state

• Signal Loss indicates whether the CSU is detecting pulses on theT1 network interface receivers. If the engine is not detectingpulses, the T1 line transmits AIS (all ones, unframed) on the T1network interface. This field displaysTrue when the engine isnot detecting pulses andFalse when it is detecting pulses.

• Loopback Mode indicates loopback status. This field can display:

• NoLoop to show that the signal is not looped through the T1engine.

• LocalLoop to indicate that the T1 engine’s outoing signal islooped back to the incoming side.

• LineLoop to show that the incoming signal is looped to thenetwork without passing through the T1 engine.

• PayloadLoop to show that the incoming signal is loppedthrough the T1 engine after it passes through the framingfunction.

• Unit ID identifies the T1 engine, using its firmware number,firmware revision number, firmware release date, and EPROMcheck sum.



Understanding the Interval Errors Box

The Interval Errors box provides T1 line statistics in the followingcategories:

• Interval Number lists each 15 minute interval for which statisticsappear in this box. This column displays a number from 1 to 96,Current, or Total.

• Out of Frame Errors lists the number of Out of Frame (OOF)events that have occurred. An OOF event begins when thenetwork interface sends two of four incorrect consecutive framesynchronizing bits, and ends when reframe occurs.

• BiPolar Violations lists the number of BiPolar Violation (BPV)errors. For AMI-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when thereare two consecutive pulses of the same polarity. For B8ZS-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are twoconsecutive pulses of the same polarity that are not part of thezero substitution code.

• CRC Errors lists the number of CRC errors.

• Controlled Slip lists the number of times the T1 engine replicatesor deletes a DS1 frame.

• Path Code Violations lists the number of coding violations thatoccur on the remote side of a Layer 1 connection.

• Line Code Violations lists the number of coding violations thatoccur on the local side. A Layer 1 connection does not need tobe established.



17


Understanding the Interval Errored Seconds Box

TheInterval Errored Seconds box provides T1 line statistics in the followingcategories:


• Rec. Net. Alarms (Receive Network Alarms) lists the number ofseconds with alarm events.

• Error Seconds lists the number of seconds with one or more CRCor OOF errors.

• Sev. Err. Seconds (Severe Error Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors.

• Unavailable Seconds lists the number of one-second intervalsduring which service was unavailable.

• Cntrl. Slip Seconds (Controlled Slip Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with one or more controlled slips.

• Bursty Err. Seconds (Bursty Error Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.

• Sev. Err. Framing Sec. (Severe Errored Framing Seconds) lists thenumber of seconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors with afatal framing error.

• Line Err. Seconds (Line Errored Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with line code violations. This is independent of aLayer 1 connection having been established.

• Degraded Minutes lists the number of minutes (60 consecutiveone minute intervals) with more than four total errors.



:

Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status window uses the following push buttons

• displays status information about the Annex youselected.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofall boxes, or press to return to theAnnex PRI InternalCSU Status window.

• displays a window explaining the PRI Internal CSUStatus command. You can save information here.

• removes theAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status windowfrom your display an returns you to the main window.

Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information

Using the Command To display information about thePRI channels you entered:



2. Hold the mouse button on the status menu, select PRI.


TheAnnex PRI Internal CSU Status window appears.

4. Select an Interval(s) option.

You can selectSpecified, Current, or Total. If you selectCurrent orTotal, go to step 5.

Apply

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



17


x

y

5. Enter the interval numbers you need in the Interval(s) field.


6. Press .

T1 engine status information appears in thePRI CSU Alarms, PRI

CSU Status, andInterval Information boxes.

Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information

TheAnnex T1 Internal CSU command provides information about the AnneT1 network interface. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window

• Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window

• Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information

Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU StatusWindow


TheT1 Internal CSU command originates in the Status menu. To displathe window:



2. Select a single Annex that contains a T1 DS1 interface from thelist.

3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select T1.

Apply



this


TheAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window appears(seeFigure17-6).

The following example shows theAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window.

Figure 17-6. Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window

Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU StatusWindow

TheAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window displays information in theT1 Alarms, T1 Status andInterval Information boxes. In addition, it includes theInterval(s) field. You can enter information in this field. Like all Annexstatus commands, you cannot change an Annex configuration fromwindow.



17


te

Entering Interval Information

Before you can display T1 Internal CSU statistics, you must complethe Interval(s) field located below theInterval Information box.

Entering Intervals The T1 engine records 96 15-minute intervals.

1. Select an option from the menu next to Interval(s).

You can select:

• Specified to view T1 statistics for one or more intervals.

• Current to see T1 statistics for the current interval.

• Total to display cumulative statistics for each of the 96intervals.

If you selectSpecified, you must complete the text field describedin step 2. If you choseCurrent or Total, you can skip to step 3.

2. Enter one or more interval numbers in the text field.

To enter specific intervals, separate interval numbers with commasor indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, youmight enter1, 3, 8 to specify three intervals, or1-3, 8 to specifyintervals 1 through 3 and interval 8. In addition, you can enterall.

3. Press .

T1 Internal CSU statistics appear (seeFigure17-6).

Apply



s.

Understanding the Alarms Box

TheT1 Alarms box gives you historical and current information about T1 alarmThis box includes the following fields:

• Blue History indicates whether a Blue alarm has occurred sincethe T1 Engine has been online. This field displaysTrue or False.

• Blue gives you the current status of the Blue alarm. If this fielddisplaysOn, the T1 engine is receiving AIS (all ones,unframed) from the network.

• Red History indicates whether a Red alarm has occurred sincethe T1 Engine has been online. This field displaysTrue or False.

• Red reports the current status of the Red alarm. If this fielddisplaysOn, the T1 engine is detecting loss of framesynchronization and is sending a Yellow alarm to the network.

• Yellow History indicates whether a Yellow alarm has occurredsince the T1 Engine has been online. This field displaysTrue orFalse.

• Yellow indicates the current status of the Yellow alarm. If thisfield displaysOn, the T1 engine is receiving a yellow alarmfrom the network.



17


.

Understanding the T1 Status Box

TheT1 Status box displays statistics for the T1 network interface. Thisbox includes the following categories:

• Engine Bypass indicates whether the engine is connected to theNetwork Interface This field displays enabled or disabled. If itdisplaysdisabled, the engine is connected to the NetworkInterface.

• Sync indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting framesynchronization. If this field displaysFalse, the T1 engine haslost frame synchronization and has entered the red alarm state

• DII Sync indicates whether the Drop and Insert Interface isreceiving ones pulses and is in frame sync. This field displaysTrue or False to indicate the interface status.

• Signal Loss indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting pulseson the T1 network interface receivers. If the engine is notdetecting pulses, the T1 engine transmits AIS (all ones,unframed) on the T1 network interface. This field displaysTruewhen the engine is not detecting pulses andFalse when it isdetecting pulses.

• Loopback Mode indicates loopback status. This field can display:

• Noloop to show that the signal is not looped through the T1engine.

• Localloop to indicate that the T1 engine’s outoing signal islooped back to the incoming side.

• Lineloop to show that the incoming signal is looped to thenetwork without passing through the T1 engine.

• Payloadloop to show that the incoming signal is loppedthrough the T1 engine after it passes through the framingfunction.



• Uptime indicates the amount of time in minutes that the T1engine has been up.

• Unit ID identifies the T1 engine, using its firmware number,firmware revision number, firmware release date, and EPROMcheck sum.

• Serial Number displays the engine’s number.

• Circuit ID displays the engine’s circuit identification number.

Understanding the Interval Information Box

The Interval Information box provides T1 engine statistics in the followingcategories:


• Out of Frame Errors lists the number of Out of Frame (OOF)events that have occurred. An OOF event begins when thenetwork interface sends two of four incorrect consecutive framesynchronizing bits, and ends when reframe occurs.

• BiPolar Violations lists the number of BiPolar Violation (BPV)errors. For AMI-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when thereare two consecutive pulses of the same polarity. For B8ZS-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are twoconsecutive pulses of the same polarity that are not part of thezero substitution code.

• CRC Errors lists the number of CRC errors.

• Controlled Slip lists the number of times the T1 engine replicatesor deletes a DS1 frame.

• Rec. Net. Alarms (Receive Network Alarms) lists the number ofseconds with alarm events.



17


:

• Error Seconds list the number of seconds with one or more CRCor OOF errors.

• Sev. Err. Seconds (Severe Error Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors.

• Unavailable Seconds lists the number of one-second intervalsduring which service was unavailable.

• Cntrl. Slip Seconds (Controlled Slip Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with one or more controlled slips.

• Bursty Err. Seconds (Bursty Error Seconds) lists the number ofseconds with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.

Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window uses the following push buttons

• displays status information about the Annex youselected.

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofall boxes, or press to return to theAnnex T1 InternalCSU Status window.

• displays a window explaining the Annex T1 InternalCSU command. You can save information here.

• removes theAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window fromyour display and returns you to the main window.

Apply

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



l

Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information

Using the Command To display information about theT1 interface you entered:





TheAnnex T1 Internal CSU Status window appears.

4. Select an Interval(s) option.

You can selectSpecified, Current, or Total. If you selectCurrent orTotal, go to step 5.

5. Enter the interval numbers you need in the Interval(s) field.


6. Press .

T1 engine status information appears in theT1 Alarms, T1 Status

andInterval Information boxes.

Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information

TheAnnex T1 Modem Calls Status command provides information about alinternal modems. This section includes:

• Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window

• Understanding the Annex Modem Calls Status Window

• Viewing T1 Internal Modem Calls Status Information

Apply



17


y

Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window


TheT1 Modem Calls command originates in the Status menu. To displathe window:



2. Select a single Annex that contains a T1 DS1 interface from thelist.


4. Choose Modem Calls and release the mouse button.

TheAnnex Modem Calls Status window appears(seeFigure17-7). The name of the Annex you selected appears inthe window’s title bar.

The following example shows theAnnex Modem Calls Status window.

Figure 17-7. Annex Modem Calls Status Window



an

Understanding the Annex Modem Calls StatusWindow

TheAnnex Modem Calls Status window displays information in theInternal

Modem Calls box. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot changeAnnex configuration from this window.

Understanding the Internal Modem Calls Box

The Internal Modem Calls box displays statistics for all internal modems.This box includes the following categories:

• Modem # lists each modem in the Annex.

• Total Calls provides a count of the number of times the line isseized on the modem.

• Total Failures provides a count of the number of call failuresfor the modem.

• Ring Count provides a count of the number of times themodem asserted rings on a call.

• Offhook Count provides a count of the number of times themodem went offhook on a call.

• DCD Assert Countprovides a count of the number of timesthe modem asserted DDC on a call.

• Consecutive Failures provides a count of the number of times themodem failed to accept a call consecutively.



17


Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex Modem Calls Status window uses the following push buttons:

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofall boxes, or press to return to theAnnex T1 ModemCalls Status window.

• displays a window explaining the Annex Modem CallsStatus command. You can save information here.

• removes theAnnex Modem Calls Status window fromyour display and returns you to the main window.

Viewing T1 Modem Calls Status Information

Using the Command To display information about theT1 interface you entered:



2. Select T1 and Modem Calls.

TheAnnex Modem Calls Status window appears. TheT1 Modem Calls

information for the Annex you selected appears in theInternal

Modem Calls box.

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



ow:

Displaying Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information

TheAnnex Dial VPN (Virtual Private Network) Services (DVS) Status commandprovides information for all active tunnel interfaces. This sectionincludes:

• Displaying the AnnexDVS Status Window

• Understanding the AnnexDVS Status Window

• Viewing AnnexDial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information

Displaying the Annex DVS Status Window


TheDVS command originates in the Status menu. To display the wind



2. Select a single Annex that contains a tunnel from the list.

3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select DVS.

TheAnnex DVS Status window appears (seeFigure17-8).



17


ow.

ys

The following example shows theAnnex DVS Status window.

Figure 17-8. Annex DVS Status Window

Understanding the Annex DVS Status Window

TheAnnex DVS Status window displays information in theGRE Information and theTunnel Information boxes. Like all Annex statuscommands, you cannot change an Annex configuration from this wind

Understanding the GRE Information Box

TheGRE Information box provides statistics for GRE packets. This box displainformation in theReceived andTransmitted fields and theDropped Packets Info

box. TheReceived andTransmitted fields provide the following information:



x

• Bytes Received indicates provides a count of the number of bytesreceived on the interface.

• Bytes Transmitted provides a count of the number of bytes senton the interface.

• Packets Received provides a count of the number of GREpackets received.

• Packets Transmitted provides a count of the number of GREpackets sent.

• Packets Dropped Received provides a count of the number ofGRE packets dropped on transmit.

• Packets Dropped Transmitted provides a count of the number ofGRE packets dropped on transmit.

TheDropped Packets Info box provides information in theBad Checksum field.

• Bad Checksum provides a count of the number of GRE packetsreceived with bad checksums.

Understanding the Tunnel Information Box

TheTunnel Information box displays data about all active tunnels. This boincludes the following categories:

• Device Type lists the interface device to which the tunnelterminates.

• Interface Protocol list the protocol used on the connection.

• State lists the state of the tunnel. Values areregistered,established, or deregistered.

• Login Time lists the time the user logged in.

• Home Addr lists the address assigned to the remote node. ThisHome Addr category is protocol specific.

• Home Agent Addr lists the IP address of the Home Agent (HA).



17


e

• WAN Type lists the type of WAN interface from the HA to thehome network.

• .WAN Addr lists the address of the home network from the HA(displayedad hex).

Using Push Buttons

TheAnnex DVS Status window uses the following push buttons:

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofall boxes, or press to return to theAnnex DVS Statuswindow.

• displays a window explaining the Annex DVScommand. You can save information here.

• removes theAnnex DVS Status window from yourdisplay and returns you to the main window.

Viewing Dial VPN Services (DVS) StatusInformation

Using the Command To display information about the tunnels you entered:



2. Hold the mouse button on the status menu, select DVS .

TheAnnex DVS Status window appears. TheDial VPN Services

information appears in theGRE Information andTunnel Information

boxes.

If the Annex you selected contains no tunnels, a warning messagdisplays:No Tunnels have been found.

Save Output

OK

Cancel

Help

Close



er

suchir IP

Identifying Annexes

TwoDiscover Annexes commands automatically identify Annexes and othnetwork devices.

• TheDiscover Annexes/Network command uses a specific internetaddress and subnet mask to find available Annexes on anynetwork.

• TheDiscover Annexes/Search Device identifies Annexes on yournetwork that are visible to a specific search device.


• Using the Discover Annexes/Network Window

• Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window

• Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists

The Discover Annexes/Network command can find Annexesrunning Annex software Release 13.2 and subsequent releases.To find Annexes running software releases prior to 13.2, usethe Discover Annexes/Search Device command.

Using the Discover Annexes/Search DeviceWindow

Discover Annexes/Search Device identifies Annexes on your network that arevisible to a specific search device. A search device is any network device (as a router) that knows about the existence of other network devices via theaddresses.Discover Annexes/Search Device lists basic information about Annexesand allows you to update an Annex list or save a list to a file.



17


.

Displaying the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window


The Discover Annexes/Search Device window appears in the Configure menuTo display the window:

Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose DiscoverAnnexes, followed by Search Device.

TheDiscover Annexes/Search Device window appears (seeFigure17-9).

The following example shows theDiscover Annexes/Search Device window.

Figure 17-9. Discover Annexes/Search Device Window



nd

an

the

Understanding the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window

Discover Annexes/Search Device uses text fields to control the discoveryprocess, and an output box to display information about Annexes aother devices. The window’s push buttons allow you to update yourcurrent Annex list or save the contents of the output box to a file.

Discover Annexes/Search Device may not find every Annex on anetwork because the discovery process can identify only thosenetwork devices that are visible to a specific search device at thecurrent time.

Using Text Fields This command’s text fields control the identification process. You ccomplete the following fields:

• Search Device accepts the name or IP address of any networkdevice that stores information about nodes, devices andaddresses on your network. You can use a device name or IPaddress here.Discover Annexes/Search Device uses AnnexManager’s default community string to communicate with thesearch device and with each device it queries.

• SNMP Timeout specifies the length of time in seconds that AnnexManager waits for a response. You can enter a number ofseconds here. If you do not enter a value here,Discover Annexes/Search Device uses the SNMP default.

• SNMP Retries controls the number of times that Annex Managertries to reach an Annex or other device on the network. Youcan enter a number here. If you do not enter a value here, thediscovery process uses the SNMP default.

When you complete these fields, you can choose to initiatediscovery process.

Apply



f

t

esvice,mpts

the anout

f

Controlling Output The window’sVerbose Output button allows you to determine the level odetail that appears in the output box.If you click on theVerbose Output button,Discover Annexes/Search Device prints a device name and displays basicinformation about the device type or identifies it asNOT REACHABLE. If you donot select theVerbose Output button, the@ sign identifies all devices that are noAnnexes or are unreachable Annexes.

Understanding the Discovery Output Box

TheDiscovery Output box contains detailed information about the Annexidentified by the search device. Annex Manager goes to a search derequests a list of addresses in its Address Translation table, and atteto communicate with each address via SNMP. If communication issuccessful, Annex Manager compares the device’s object identifier tovalue of an Annex object identifier. If there is a match, the device isAnnex. If there is no match, the output box displays information abthe device based on your use of theVerbose Output command.

The output box displays:

• TheDiscovering Annexes, please wait ... message, informing youthat the process has begun.

• TheNumber of devices to query: message, followed by adynamically updated number. This number can help youdetermine how long the discovery process will take.

• Basic information about each Annex, including the Annex’sname or IP address, and system descriptor information, whichcan contain the Annex type and software release, the number oports for each port type, and the Annex’s current image name.



• Information about devices that are not Annexes. If you use theVerbose Output option from the Utilities menu,Discover Annexes/Search Device lists the names of all devices that are notAnnexes, and prints a brief description or identifies devices asNOT REACHABLE.

If you enter a shortSNMP Timeout, Discover Annexes/Search Device may identify a device asNOT REACHABLEbecause of network load.

• The *** End of discovery *** message, informing you that theprocess is complete.

Using Push Buttons

Discover Annexes/Search Device uses the following push buttons:

• activates theDiscover Annexes/Search Device command.

• replaces the Annex list displayed in the main windowwith the Annexes displayed in theDiscovery Output box. Whenyou use this button, Annex Manager connects each Annexagain, in case there has been a change in status.

• saves the Annexes displayed in theDiscovery Outputbox to a file. When you use this button, the standardFileselection window displays, allowing you to enter a path and filename.

stores the values you entered inSNMP TimeoutandSNMP Retries with each Annex name. In addition,it stores Annex Manager’s default community string.If you want to save a list and then change these values,use theSNMP Information command (seeChapter4).

• displays the standardFile Selection window, whichincludes the default text directory. You can enter a file name intheSelection field and press to store the contents ofboth boxes, or press to return to theDiscoverAnnexes/Search Device window.

Apply

Update List

Save List

Save List

Save Output

OK

Cancel



a

• displays a separate window that explains theDiscoverAnnexes/Search Device command.

• removes theDiscover Annexes/Search Device windowfrom your display.

Discovering Annexes using a Search Device

Using the DiscoverAnnexes/Search DeviceCommand

Discover Annexes/Search Device lets you replace the main window’s Annexlist with the discovery list and allows you to save the discovery list infile. To update and save a list:

1. Move the pointer to the Configure menu, choose DiscoverAnnexes, and then choose Search Device.

The Discover Annexes/Search Device window appears.

2. Enter a search device name or its IP address in the Search Devicefield.

3. Enter a number of seconds in the SNMP Timeout field.

If you do not complete this field, the process uses the current SNMPdefault.

4. Enter a number in the SNMP Retries field.

If you do not complete this field, the process uses the current SNMPdefault.

5. Select the level of detail you need using the Verbose Outputbutton.

If you selectVerbose Output, information about all devices appears.If you do not select this button, the window includes informationabout Annexes and the@ symbol for other devices.

6. Choose .

Annexes and other devices appear in theDiscovery Output box.

Help

Close

Apply



e

e

Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists

The Discover Annexes/Search Device commands lets you replace the mainwindow’s Annex list with the discovery list and allows you to save thdiscovery list in a file.

Updating and SavingLists

To update and save list:

1. Use Discover Annexes/Search Device.

2. Choose .

Annex Manager replaces the main window’s list with the discoverylist and connects each Annex again, in case there has been a changin status.

3. Choose .

TheAnnex List Selection window displays.

Figure 17-10. Annex LIst File Selection Window

Update List

Save List



y

The Annex List Selection window displays the default listdirectory. It allows you to:

• Select a list that will overwrite an existing list. You cannotoverwrite a list that someone else created.

• Create a new list by entering a new path and list name and

choosing .

When you complete this window, Annex manager saves the list.For more detailed information about Annex Manager’s standardFile Selection window, seeChapter3.

Using the Discover Annexes/Network Command

TheDiscover Annexes/Network command finds available Annexes on a annetwork and adds them to the main window’s Annex List box.

Displaying the Window

To display theDiscover Annexes/Network window, move the pointer to theConfigure menu and chooseDiscover Annexes and Network.

Move the pointer to the Configure menu and choose DiscoverAnnexes, followed by Network.

TheDiscover Annexes/Network window appears (seeFigure17-11).

OK



:

Figure 17-11. Discover Annexes/Network Window

Understanding the Window

Discover Annexes/Network uses three fields to find Annexes on a network

• Internet Address accepts an IP address for the network on whichAnnex Manager will find available Annexes.

• Subnet Mask defines the network portion of the IP address.

• Timeout defines the length of time in seconds that AnnexManager waits for a response.

This window includes three push buttons:

• activates the discovery process.

• removes this window from your display.

• displays a separate window that explains theDiscoverAnnexes/Network command and its fields.

WARNING

OK

Cancel

Help



Finding Annexes on a Network

To find available Annexes on a network:

1. Select Discover Annexes from the Configure menu and thenchoose Network.

The command’s window appears (seeFigure17-11).

2. Enter an Internet Address and a Subnet Mask for the network youwant to search.

You must complete both theInternet Address and theSubnet Mask

fields.

3. Enter a number of seconds in the Timeout field.

This field automatically displays10 seconds. It uses a 10 seconddefault if you leave the field blank.

4. Press .

Annex Manager displays the window informing you that thediscovery process is taking place.

Figure 17-12. Discover Annexes/Network Process Window

OK



As Figure17-12 shows, this window lists theInternet Address,Subnet Mask andTimeout value you entered, as well as the broadcastaddress.

When Annex Manager completes this process it displays a windowinforming you about the number of Annexes that have been found.

Figure 17-13. Creating Annex List Window

Annex Manager adds the Annexes it finds to the main window’sAnnex List box. If this process found Annexes that exist in the mainwindow’s list, a warning window lists duplicate Annexes and doesnot add them to the list. You can use theSave Annex List commandto retain this list.


es:

User.

rs to

Chapter 18Annex Manager and SNMP

This chapter contains a description of the Simple NetworkManagement Protocol (SNMP) protocol and Annex Manager. It includ

• SNMP Protocol Overview

• Setting up the Annex for SNMP

• Standard MIB Support

SNMP Protocol Overview

SNMP is a heavily used management protocol. It operates over the Datagram Protocol (UDP), which is part of the TCP/IP protocol suiteAnnex Manager provides the user interface that enables Network Manageaccess Annexes and their information.Annex Manager uses:

• The SNMP protocol to send queries to the agents located ineach Annex.

• Agents located on the Annexes. Each agent collectsinformation about its Annex and provides that information tothe Network Management Station running Annex Manager.

• Management Information Bases (MIBs) located on the SNMPNetwork Management Station. MIBs describe the informationthat comes from the agents.


Chapter 18 Annex Manager and SNMP Part 4 Control and Status Commands

rver

ith

Figure 18-1 shows how Annex Manager and SNMP can be used on anetwork.

Figure 18-1. Network Configuration

SNMP Management Stations

Annex Manager runs on an SNMP Network Management Station, adedicated or shared network device that is the client in the client-semodel. The management station can run an application specificallywritten for the Annex and its MIBs(e.g., Annex Manager), or a generic application that communicates wother non-Bay Networks devices (e.g. SunNet Manager,™HP/OpenView,™ NetView for AIX™). The generic application mustinclude the definitions of the MIBs supported by the Annex.

Through Annex Manager, the management station sends theget,get-next, andset commands to the Annex’s SNMP agent to retrieve ormodify information.

Ethernet

Annexes with Agents

SNMP Network Management Station running Annex Manager


Chapter 18 Annex Manager and SNMPPart 4 Control and Status Commands

gent

yer

t andoutnot lost.

d it toto the

SNMP Agents

Annex software includes a process known as the SNMP agent. The aprocess acts as a server in a typical client-server model:

• Annex Manager directsget, set, andget-next commands to theagent.

• The agent processes the command and returns a responseindicating the command’s success or failure and returning therequested data for theget andget-next commands.

Message Delivery

SNMP messages are encapsulated in UDP datagrams. The UDP ladoes not guarantee delivery. When Annex Manager transmits aget, set,or get-next command, the agent is expected to respond with an errormessage or with the requested data. Annex Manager uses a timeouretry mechanism to guarantee the SNMP command’s delivery. If a timeoccurs, Annex Manager does not know whether the command was received by the agent, or whether the response from the agent was

The agent can also generate an unsolicited trap command and senone or more network addresses. Receivers of traps do not respond SNMP agent. For detailed information, please refer toTrap Hosts andTrapslater in this chapter.

The Annex supports only the cold-start, link-up, and link-downtraps defined in MIB-II.



tain

he annt

nex

otnut

Setting up the Annex for SNMP

Before Annex Manager (or any other SNMP network managementapplication) can monitor or manage the Annex, you must define cerconfiguration data, including the SNMP Community String and thedisabled_modules andallow_snmp_sets parameters.

Defining the Community String

Each SNMP message contains a Community String in its header. Treceiving SNMP agent attempts to match the message’s string withexisting Community String list. If there is no match, the SNMP agediscards the message without responding to the sender.

Annex Manager uses one of the Community Strings defined in the Anconfiguration file. This file, which is downloaded during Annexinitialization, defines up to four Community Strings. If the file does ncontain community strings,public is used as a default. There is no notioof read-only or read-write communities. For detailed information abothe SNMP Community String syntax, please refer to theRemote AnnexAdministrator’s Guide for UNIX.

Defining Parameters

You must define thedisabled_modules andallow_snmp_sets parameters onthe Annex before you can use Annex Manager.



eent

erisk.ust

.

Defining the disabled_modules Parameter

The Annex’sdisabled_modules parameter allows you to turn off certainfeatures during Annex software initialization (e.g., you can enterLAT, PPP,SLIP to turn these features off. You can use thena oradmin tools to verifyand changedisabled_modules. If you disabled SNMP, the Annex willdiscard all SNMP messages sent to it and Annex Manager will not bable to retrieve any information using SNMP. By default, the SNMP agon the Annex is enabled.

Defining the allow_snmp_sets Parameter

The Annex’s default setting for theallow_snmp_sets parameter does notpermit parameter value changes because the set command’s headtransmits the community string in clear text, which may be a security rTo allow Annex Manager to modify parameters through SNMP, you muse thena oradmin tools to changeallow_snmp_sets toyes. You cannot setthis parameter using SNMP.

Standard MIB Support

The Annex supports the following standard MIBs:

• MIB-II (defined in RFC1213).

• Character MIBs (defined in RFCs 1316, (Character MIB), 1317(RS232-like MIB), and 1318 (Parallel Printer MIB)).

• Ethernet MIB (defined in RFC 1398).

• RIPv2 MIB (defined in RFC 1389).

• AppleTalk MIB (defined in RFC 1243).

Some standard MIB objects are not valid or meaningful for the AnnexFor detailed information, seeAnnex Restrictions on Standard MIBson page 18-8.



ad,

ide

dard

entan

lueill

e.g.,

red

Most Annex parameters do not map to standard MIB objects. Instethey map to MIB objects in a proprietary (or private enterprise) MIBspecific to the Annex. The private MIB also contains objects that provstatus and statistics information to the network manager.

This section explains the relationship between Annex Manager andstandard MIBs, listing the exceptions and restrictions placed on stanMIBs by the Annex SNMP agent. This section includes:

• MIB Object Hierarchy

• Describing and Naming Objects

• Trap Hosts and Traps

• Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs

MIB Object Hierarchy

MIBs define the hierarchy of managed objects. MIB objects represdata that the Annex can retrieve or configuration information that it cmodify.

Annex Manager manages Annexes by retrieving or changing the vaof MIB objects. Some MIB objects represent actions that the Annex wperform when Annex Manager sets certain values in those objects (when an Annex boots or resets).

Describing and Naming Objects

RFC 1155 (Structure and Identification of Management Information foTCP/IP-based internets) describes the layout and encoding of exchangdata objects.



ardingas:

when

t

ost

The SMI (Structure of Management Information) uses the ISO standASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One) to define a method for describa hierarchical name space for managed information. Each object h

• A name (also referred to as an Object Identifier (OID)).

• A syntax and an encoding. In addition to the basic integer andoctet string data types, several special types are defined (e.g,IPAddress, Network Address, Counter, Gauge, TimeTicks). RFC 1212(Concise MIB Definitions) is an easier-to-read form used inmost standard MIBs today. It is used to define the Annexprivate enterprise MIB.

Trap Hosts and Traps

The Annex employs two methods to define the host addresses it usesgenerating SNMP trap messages.

• The first method defines up to ten static trap receivers in theconfiguration file using the snmp trap host syntax. For detailedinformation about the SNMP trap host syntax, please see theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX.

• The second method loads the trap hosts (if any) from theconfiguration file into the Trap Host Table (i.e., theanxTrapHostTable object in the proprietary MIB). You canthen modify this table by adding or deleting trap hosts.However, the changes you make directly through the table willbe lost when the Annex reboots. If you need to make permanenchanges, you must use the Annex configuration file.

Annex Manager Release 2.3 does not support access to the Trap HTable. You cannot display or change this table through AnnexManager.



IBs.

IB

Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs

The Annex SNMP Agent does not use all objects in the supported standard M

This section lists the supported standard MIBs and outlines thedifferences between the Annex parameters and specific standard Mobjects.

Table 18-1. Supported Standard MIBs

MIB Name RFC Number

MIB-II RFC 1213

Character MIB RFC 1316

RS-232 MIB RFC 1317

Parallel Printer MIB RFC 1318

AppleTalk MIB RFC 1243

RIP version 2 MIB RFC 1389

Ethernet MIB RFC 1398

DS1 MIB RFC 1406



RFC 1213 MIB-II Restrictions

The Annex supports RFC1213’ssystem, interfaces, at, ip, icmp, tcp, udp,andsnmp groups. It does not support theegp group. In addition, someindividual objects have the restrictions outlined inTable18-2.

Table 18-2. RFC 1213 MIB-II Objects

Object Name Get/Set Restrictions Read ObjectLimitations

ifAdminStatus read only Returns onlyup (1) anddown (2)

ifOperStatus none Returns onlyup (1) anddown (2)

atEntry Cannot create newrows

none

ipRouteEntry Cannot create newrows

none

ipRouteProto none Returns onlylocal (2),icmp (4), andrip (8)

ipRouteType none Returns onlyinvalid (2), direct (3),indirect (4)

ipNetToMediaEntry Cannot create newrows

none

ipNetToMediaType Writes onlyinvalid (2),dynamic (3), andstatic (4)

Returns onlydynamic(3) andstatic(4)



RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Restrictions

The Annex supports RFC 1398’sdot3StatsTable anddot3CollTable withthe restrictions outlined inTable18-3.

Table 18-3. RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Objects

RFC 1316 Character MIB Restrictions

The Annex supports thechar group with the restrictions outlined inTable18-4.

Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects


Object Name Restrictions Read ObjectLimitations

dot3StatsSQETestErrors Not supported None

dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors

Not supported None


charPortAdminStatus Read only Returns onlyenabled(1), disabled (2), andoff(3)

charPortOperStatus None Returns onlyup (1),down (2), active (5)

charPortInFlowType Supports onlynone (1), xonXoff (2),andhardware (3)

None



Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects (continued)


charPortOutFlowType Supports onlynone(1), xonXoff (2), andhardware (3)

None

charPortAdminOrigin Read only None

charPortName Read only None

charPortSessionMaximum Maximum value is16

None

charSessKill Read only None

charSessState None Returns onlyconnected (2)

charSessConnectionId None Returns only null

charPort objects for virtualports

Read only, read-write objects applyonly to physicalports

None



RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Restrictions

The Annex supports this MIB with the restrictions described inTable18-5.

Table 18-5. RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Objects


rs232PortInSpeedrs232PortOutSpeed

Setting one sets both.Can set only to asupported value. SeeSetting Port Speedbelow.

None

rs232AsyncPortParity none (1), mark (4), orspace (5) all map tonone (1)

Returns onlynone (1), odd (2), oreven (3)

rs232AsyncPortStopBits dynamic (4) maps toone (1)

Returns only one(1), two (2), orone-and-half (3)

rs232SyncPortClockSourceAcceptsexternal (2)only

Returnsinternal (1)or external (2)

rs232SyncPortInterruptedFrames

Not supported None

rs232SyncPortAbortedFrames

Not supported. None



-

Setting Port Speed

Thers232PortInSpeed, rs232PortOutSpeed, andrs232AsyncPortAutobaud arerelated for the Annex’s asynchronous ports.

• To set the port to autobaud, you must first setrs232AsyncPortAutobaud to enabled (1) and then set eitherrs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed to zero. Setting the portspeed to zero whenrs232AsyncPortAutobaud is disabled resultsin a bad value error.

• To disable autobaud, you must first set the port speed to a nonzero value, and then setrs232AsyncPortAutobaud to disabled(2).This ensures that the port is not left in a state without a declaredspeed.

For example, you can set a port to 9600/autobaud by setting9600 in rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed and then settingrs232AsyncPortAutobaud to enabled(1).

RFC 1318 Parallel Printer MIB Restrictions

The Annex supportsparaNumber,paraPortTable andparaInSigTable. It doesnot supportparaOutSigTable.



RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Restrictions

The Annex supportsrip2GlobalGroup, rip2IfStatTable, andrip2IfConfTable.It does not supportrip2PeerTable. Table18-6 describes additionalrestrictions.

Table 18-6. RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Objects


rip2IfStatStatus Read only None

rip2IfConfDomain Not supported None

RipIfConfAuthKey Not supported None

ripIfConfStatus Read only None



RFC 1243 AppleTalk MIB Restrictions

The Annex does not support thellap, rtmp, kip, zip, andnbp groups. Itsupports theaarp, atport, ddp, andatecho groups with the followingrestrictions.

Table 18-7. RFC 1243 AppleTalk


atportType Read only None

atportNetStart Not supported None

atportNetEnd Not supported None

atportNetAddress Not supported None

atportStatus Read only None

atportZone Read only None

atportIfIndex Read only None

ddpOutRequests Not supported None

ddpInLocalDatagrams Not supported None

ddpNoProtocolHandlers Not supported None

ddpBroadcastErrors Not supported None

ddpShortDDPErrors Not supported None

ddpHopCountErrors Not supported None



RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Restrictions

The Annex supports this MIB with the following restrictions.

Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects



dsx1LineType Supports onlydsx1esf(2) anddsx1D4 (3)

Returnsesf or d4

dsx1Line Coding Supports onlydsx1B8zs (2) anddsx1AMI (5)

Returnsb8zs or ami

dsx1SendCode Not supported None

dsx1Circuit Identifier 128 character limit None

dsx1SignalMode Read only RobbedBit only

dsx1Fdl Supports onlydsx1Ansi-T1-403 (2) anddsx1Att-54016 (4)

Returnsansi or att

dsx1CurrentSEFSs Not supported None

dsx1Current PCVs Not supported None

dsx1CurrentLESs Not supported None

dsx1CurrentDMs Not supported None

dsx1CurrentLCVs Not supported None

dsx1IntervalSEFSs Not supported None



Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects (continued)


dsx1IntervalPCVs Not supported None

dsx1IntervalLESs Not supported None

dsx1IntervalDMs Not supported None

dsx1IntervalLCVs Not supported None

dsx1TotalSEFs Not supported None

dsx1TotalPCVs Not supported None

dsx1TotalLESs Not supported None

dsx1TotalDMs Not supported None

dsx1TotalLCVs Not supported None

dsx1FarEndCurrentTable Not supported None

dsx1FarEndIntervalTable Not supported None

dsx1FarEndTotalTable Not supported None

dsx1FracTable Not supported None


ing

Chapter 19Annex Parameters

This section lists all Annex parameters eligible for configuration usAnnex Manager. Parameters appear in alphabetical order. For eachparameter, you can find:

• A brief description of the parameter’s function.

• An explanation of dependencies, if they occur, amongparameters.

• References to additional information in other Annexdocumentation.

• A list containing the parameter’s type, allowable values, defaultvalue, and the Annex Manager lists in which the parameterappears.

Each parameter description includes an AnnexManager default value. If you use theSite Parameterscommand to change default values in help messages,the values listed in this section will not agree with yourhelp messages. Remember thatSite Parameters changeshelp text only: if you do not enter a parameter value,the Annex continues to use the default values listedhere.


Chapter 19 Annex Parameters Part 5 Reference Information

TalkMP can

x and

er

is

anysing

es

a_router defines the Ethernet address that the Annex attempts to use as the Applerouter address. If the router does not respond, the Annex listens for an RTpacket and uses the address in the packet as the new router address. Youenter0 to direct the Annex to find the router.

acp_key defines the encryption key used to exchange messages between the Annethe security server. You can use this parameter only when theenable_securityparameter is set toenabled and a security server is defined. The security servmaintains the encryption key for each Annex in theacp_keys file. For securityreasons, Annex Manager displays onlyset or unset for this parameter’s values.

The Annex and the security server can communicate only when thparameter’s value is the same as the Annex’s value in the securityserver’sacp_keys file.

alarmsyslog allows the Annex to generate a syslog at the warning level when it detectsalarm event. To use this feature you must enable syslogging on an Annex uthesyslog_facility, syslog_host, andsyslog_mask parameters.

allow_broadcast permits an asynchronous port to receive administrative broadcast messaggenerated by theBoot andBroadcast commands.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 253Default 00-00-00-00-00-00Lists Annex Only, AppleTalk

Type AnnexValues 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, Security

Type T1 DS1Values enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists T1_DS1

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Basic Async Port


Chapter 19 Annex ParametersPart 5 Reference Information

es.ates

s.

nterd by

allow_compression allows an Annex to use TCP/IP header compression for SLIP or PPP modHeader compression occurs only when the other side of the serial link initicompression.

arap_v42bis allows V.42bis compression during an AppleTalk session.

at_guest allows guests to log into an AppleTalk session. If you chooseenabled and a clientrequests guest access, the Annex asks ACP for username guest privilege

at_nodeid specifies the Appletalk hint used by the Annex on a specific port. You can ean ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separatea dot:



For example,191.253, 0x00BF.253 and191.0xFD designate the same address.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, PPP, SLIP

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, AppleTalk

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, AppleTalk

Type Async, AppleTalkValues 0 to 65534.255Default 0.0Lists Async Port



ess

Users

asts

s onas

at_security turns on ACP service for an AppleTalk session. When you chooseenabled forthis parameter and forenable_security, the Annex uses ACP to get securityinformation about the client, including authentication, logging, and zone accinformation. If you choosedisabled, the Annex uses only local security.

attn _string defines a control character sequence that returns users to the CLI prompt. can define a temporary control character sequence using the CLIstty attn

command.

authoritative_agent allows an Annex to send an ICMP Address Mask reply to a host that broadca subnet mask request.

authorized_groups specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that are accessible to useran Annex port. You can enterall, none, a series of numbers separated by comm(e.g.,1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes(e.g.,1, 5, 200-255).

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, AppleTalk

Type AsyncValue + any character, up to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string) or + (for vcli connections)Lists Async Port, Command LIne Editing, Modem, Modem

Internal

Ctrl

Ctrl A

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues all, none, numbers between 0 and 255Default noneLists Async Port, LAT



n isx

t

e

ion annex

yed

autobaud controls whether line speed is determined automatically when a connectioopened. If you chooseenabled, the modem or terminal connecting to an Annedetermines speed automatically.In this case the Annex sets the speed byanalyzing the data pattern generated when you press . If it cannodetermine the speed within two minutes, the connection attempt fails.

If you want to disable the autobaud feature, you must enter a valuin thespeed parameter before you choosedisabled here.

backward_key defines the character sequence that opens the next lower-numbered sessestablished at a port. We recommend that you use a sequence with +character. The key displays as . If you use more than one letter or number, AManager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, +a +b, displaysas^a/b.

banner controls whether the Annex banner and message-of-the-day are displaon CLI ports.

Return

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Basic Async

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, vci interface

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, Basic Async Port



port.

his

.

t

t

bidirectional_modem allows you to transmit and receive data after connecting to an asynchronousWhen you choosedisabled, you can connect to the port, but communicationcannot occur until the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) modem signal is active. Tparameter is obsolete in Release 10.1.A and in subsequent releases.

broadcast_addr specifies the IP address for Annex broadcasts (network.255 or network.0)

broadcast_direction controls the direction in which an Annex sends an administrative broadcasmessage. When you choosenetwork, the Annex sends a message from theconnection’s network side. If you chooseport, it sends a message from the porside. You can use this parameter only when themode parameter is set toslave.

bypass removes the T1 engine from the network. You should enterenabled when youfirst install an Annex or when the T1 engine is not functioning properly.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Flow Control, Modem

Type AnnexValues IP AddressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues port or networkDefault portLists Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem

Type T1 DS1Values enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists T1_DS1



ages

LIP serial

aryN

CallDef_allow_broadcast

permits an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to send administrative broadcast messgenerated by theBoot andBroadcast commands.

CallDef_allow_compression

allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to use TCP/IP header compression for Sor PPP modes. Header compression occurs only when the other side of thelink initiates compression.

CallDef_arap_v42bis allows V.42bis compression during an AppleTalk session that was initiatedthrough a call to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex.

CallDef_at_guest allows guests to log into an AppleTalk session through a call to an ISDN PrimRate Annex. If you chooseenabled and a client requests guest access, the ISDPrimary Rate Annex asks ACP for username guest privileges.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, AppleTalk, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, AppleTalk,Call Defaults



nterd by

g,

Users

CallDef_at_nodeid specifies the Appletalk hint used by an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can ean ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separatea dot:



For example,191.253, 0x00BF.253 and191.0xFD designate the same address.

CallDef_at_security turns on ACP service for an AppleTalk session. When you chooseenabled forthis parameter and forenable_security, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses ACPto get security information about the client, including authentication, logginand zone access information. If you choosedisabled, the ISDN Primary RateAnnex uses only local security.

CallDef_attn _string defines a control character sequence that returns users to the CLI prompt. can define a temporary control character sequence using the CLIstty attn

command.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 65534.255Default 0.0Lists Annex Only, AppleTalk, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, AppleTalk, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValue + any character, up to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string) or + (for vcli connections)Lists Annex Only, Cmd LIne Editing, Modem, Modem Internal,

Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl A



s on

es

ion

playss

f-the-

oose when

CallDef_authorized_groups

specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that are accessible to useran ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can enterall, none, a series of numbersseparated by commas (e.g.,1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dash(e.g.,1, 5, 200-255).

CallDef_backward_key defines the character sequence that opens the next lower-numbered sessestablished through a call to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. Xylogicsrecommends that you use a sequence with + a character. The key disas ^. If you use more than one letter or number, Annex Manager separatecharacters with a slash (/). For example,

+ a + b, displays asa/b.

CallDef_banner controls whether the ISDN Primary Rate Annex banner and message-oday are displayed on CLI connections.

CallDef_broadcast_direction

controls the direction in which an ISDN Primary Rate Annex sends anadministrative broadcast message. When you choosenetwork, the ISDN PrimaryRate Annex sends a message from the connection’s network side. If you chport, it sends a message from the port side. You can use this parameter onlytheCallDef_mode parameter is set toslave.

Type AnnexValues all, none, numbers between 0 and 255Default noneLists Annex Only, LAT, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, VCI Interface, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues port or networkDefault portLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Call Defaults



se

ne or

t.it

idle

m its

CallDef_char_erase allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex using CLI to display the character erafor a video terminal. When you chooseenabled, a deleted character looks as ifit has been erased. If you choosedisabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex echoesthe erase characters for a hard-copy terminal. It displays a backslash (\), omore deleted characters, and a slash (/). For example, typingasdfg displays asasdf\fd/g.

CallDef_cli_imask7 allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to mask CLI input to seven bits. If youchoosedisabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex expects eight-bit ASCII inpuYou should not chooseenabled unless the terminal can transmit only seven-bcharacters.

CallDef_cli_inactivity specifies the number of minutes the ISDN Primary Rate Annex will remain before disconnecting a CLI session. Entering0 disables the timer; entering255causes the ISDN Primary Rate Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits frolast job. UnlikeCallDef_inactivity_timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLIsession with active jobs.

Delete Delete

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults, Modem,

Modem Internal

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Time, Modem, Modem

Internal



ts.pts

tions.ity

. Ifrity

verN

s

CallDef_cli_interface allows you to control the prompt that appears for VMS or UNIX environmenIf you enteruci, this parameter provides a standard UNIX interface, with promdefined by theCallDef_prompt parameter. If you entervci, the standard VMSinterface includes theLocal> prompt followed by theUsername> prompt.

CallDef_cli_security enables user authentication by the host-based ACP server for all CLI connecIf you choosedisabled, you cannot use any ISDN Primary Rate Annex securmechanism other than the administrative password for CLI connections.

CallDef_connect_security

activates the host-based security policy for access from CLI to the networkyou chooseenabled, the user must be authorized via the host-based ACP secuserver to connect to a network host. The security policy in the security serscans the/etc/acp_restrict file to authorize a connection to a host from the ISDPrimary Rate Annex.

CallDef_dedicated_arguments

defines the command line arguments used for dedicated connections. Thiparameter works whenCallDef_mode is set toconnect, rlogin, telnet, or tn3270.

Type AnnexValues vci or uciDefault uciLists Annex Only, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Modem, Modem Internal,

Security

Type AnnexValues 1 to 100 charactersDefault “ ” (null string)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults,Dedicated Port



e is

e

pplies

CallDef_def_session_mode

defines the default session mode when the DECServer command interfacconfigured (i.e., whenCallDef_cli_interface is set tovci). For more information,please refer to theAnnex Interface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guid.

CallDef_dialup_addresses_origin

allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to search theacp_dialup file for the remoteclient’s user name and to set local and remote addresses. This parameter aonly when theCallDef_mode parameter is set toslip or ppp.

• acp_dialup:

• If the file contains a matching user name and:

• The local and remote addresses exist in theacp_dialup

file, the Annex uses those values.

• The theacp_dialup file contains a remote address butnot a local address, the Annex uses the remote addressfrom the file and the Annex’s IP address for the localaddress.

• If the file does not contain a matching user name, the Annexuses values from thelocal_address andremote_address

parameters:

• If both parameters contain addresses, the Annex usesthese values.

• If both parameters are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annexnegotiates for both addresses with the remote PPPclient. The connection is denied for a remote SLIPclient.

• If local_address contains a value andremote_address

is set to0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address andnegotiates with the remote PPP client for the remoteaddress. The connection is denied for a remote SLIPclient.

Type AnnexValues interactive, passthru, passall, transparentDefault interactiveLists Annex Only, Call Defaults



ides

. This

• dhcp contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address onbehalf of the user.

• Local reads the user’s remote address from theremote_addressparameter.

CallDef_do_compression

starts TCP/IP header compression on a SLIP link. When you chooseenabled,the ISDN Primary Rate Annex negotiates for TCP/IP compression for both sof the connection.

CallDef_echo directs an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to echo all characters as a user typesparameter applies only to the CLI level.

CallDef_erase_char uses a control character sequence to define the CLI erase character.

CallDef_erase_line uses a control character sequence to define the CLI line erase character.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Sync Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, PPP, SLIP

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^?)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl Delete

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^U)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl U



.

ion with

or,

nters

rst.

ut

CallDef_erase_word uses a control character sequence to define the CLI word erase character

CallDef_forward_key defines the character sequence that opens the next higher-numbered sessestablished through a call. Xylogics recommends that you use a sequence

+ a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter number, Annex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example+ a + b, displays asa/b.

CallDef_forwarding_count

controls ISDN Primary Rate Annex behavior for received characters. If you ea number other than0, the Annex does not forward characters until it receivethe number of characters you entered. If you enter0, the Annex uses values inCallDef_forwarding_timer. If you useCallDef_forwarding_count andCallDef_forwarding_timer parameters, the Annex uses the value that occurs fi

SettingCallDef_forwarding_count to1 orCallDef_forwarding_timerto 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial inpoccurs.

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^W)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl W

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, vci_interface

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 0Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer



anre

ut

. This

ose

CallDef_forwarding_timer

sets the amount of time in ten millisecond intervals that can elapse beforeISDN Primary Rate Annex forwards received data. If new data arrives befothe timer expires, the Annex resets the timer. If you enter0, the Annex uses5,which is Annex Manager’s default value.

SettingCallDef_forwarding_count to1 orCallDef_forwarding_timerto 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial inpoccurs.

CallDef_hardware_tabs allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert ASCII tab characters to thecorrect number of spaces when a terminal does not support hardware tabsparameter works only for CLI sessions.

CallDef_Imask_7bits allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to mask input to seven bits. If you chodisabled, the Annex expects eight-bit ASCII input.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255 tens of millisecondsDefault 5 (50 milliseconds)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer


Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults



nan

tes

call.

CallDef_inactivity_timer specifies the number of minutes that an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call caremain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminates the call. You cuseCallDef_input_is_activity andCallDef_output_is_activity to define incomingcall activity. If you set these parameters todisabled, the timer runs independentof activity. To reset a call regardless of any activity, enter a number of minuhere, setCallDef_input_is_activity andCallDef_output_is_activity to disabled.

CallDef_input_is_activity

defines activity as input. If you chooseenabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annexresets the inactivity timer to 0 when it receives input through an established

CallDef_input _start _char

defines the control character sequence that restarts input ifCallDef_port_input_flow_control is set toxonXoff.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 (timer disabled)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem

Internal

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer,

Modem

Type AnnexValue + any characterDefault + (displays as ^Q)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl Q



ted,

nnex

ended

CallDef_input _stop _char

defines the control character sequence that stops input ifCallDef_port_input_flow_control is set toxonXoff.

CallDef_ipso_class specifies the U.S. Department of Defense basic IP Security Option (IPSO)classification level included in TCP packets generated on Annex CLI, dedicaor adaptive asynchronous connections. The option is not added to locallygenerated ICMP messages, RIP updates, or other system packets. The Adoes not check incoming packets for the presence of the IPSO.

CallDef_ipx_security controls whether IPX security is enabled for incoming calls.

CallDef_ixany_flow_control

treats any input character as a start (XON) character if output has been suspby a stop (XOFF) character.

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^S)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl S

Type AnnexValues none, secret, topsecret, confidential, unclassifiedDefault noneLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control



s,

t.

eond

d line

side

CallDef_latb_enable allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to decode a LAT host’s data-b packetwhich change asynchronous call parameters. Refer to your LAT host’sdocumentation for details.

If you enterenabled and the LAT host sends a data-b slot messagerequesting that flow control (XON/XOFF) be turned off, the Annexturns off flow control and passes XON/XOFF characters to the hosThis scenario can adversely affect XON/XOFF and the terminal’scursor keys.

CallDef_line_erase allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex using CLI to echo line erase for a vidterminal. If you chooseenabled, the Annex erases all characters on the line amoves the cursor back to the beginning of the line. If you choosedisabled, itechoes the line erase character for hard-copy terminals, making the deletevisible and positioning the print head at the beginning of the next line.

CallDef_local_address defines the IP address for the connection on the ISDN Primary Rate Annexof the link. This IP address is used only whenCallDef_mode is set toslip, ppp,or autodetect.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, LAT


Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Sync Call Defaults



er

ivedd for

to alder

CallDef_location defines a location or description that displays at the CLIwho command.

lCallDef_long _break allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt aftreceiving a break signal of more than two seconds. If you enterdisabled, theAnnex passes the break to the local application.

CallDef_map_to_lower allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert uppercase characters recefrom a terminal using CLI into lowercase characters. This parameter is useolder terminals that do not support lower case characters.

CallDef_map_to_lower allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert lowercase characters sentterminal using CLI into uppercase characters. This parameter is used for oterminals that do not support lower case characters.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Sync Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Defaults, Idle Timer

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing



No the

tion

CallDef_max_sessions specifies the maximum number of concurrent ISDN Primary Rate Annexconnections. You can enter-1 to indicate that there is no maximum set.

CallDef_metric defines the hop count to the remote end of the connection whenCallDef_modeis set toslip orppp. You should modify this parameter only if you want the ISDPrimary Rate Annex to use a route other than the SLIP or PPP interfaces tremote end.

CallDef_mode sets the mode for access to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. For more informaabout modes, see theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX and theAnnex Administrator’s Guide for DOS. You can enter:

• cli to allow a dialed terminal or incoming modem access to CLI.CLI provides access to the network and connections to otherhosts via thetelnet, connect, rlogin andtn3270 commands.

Thetn3270 command is available only whenoption_key is set to an appropriate value.

• slip to specify that a connection can perform as a networkinterface using SLIP. IP packets are encapsulated by SLIP.

• ppp to specify that a connection can perform as a networkinterface using PPP. IP packets are encapsulated by PPP.

• arap to specify that a connection can perform as a networkinterface using ARAP.

Type AnnexValues -1 to 16Default 3Lists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 1 to 15Default 1Lists Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults



tive

• auto-detect to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to identify anincoming packet’s protocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.

• ipx to allow dial-in Novell access.

• connect to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicatewith a LAT host via theconnect command. This option workswith theCallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.

• rlogin to allowan ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicate viathe rlogin command. This option works with theCallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.

• telnet to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicatevia thetelnet command. This option works with theCallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.

• tn3270 to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicatevia thetn3270 command. This option works with theCallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.

CallDef_net_inactivity defines the amount of time an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call can remain inacbefore it is terminated. TheCallDef_net_inactivity_units parameter determineswhether the number you enter here is in minutes or seconds.

Type AnnexValues cli, slip, ppp, arap, auto-detect, ipx, connect, rlogin, telnet,

tn3270Default cliLists Annex Only, AppleTalk, Basic Async Port, Modem, PPP,

SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 0Lists Annex Only, Idle Timer, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync

Call Defaults



ity

n

imary

CallDef_net_inactivity_units

determines the unit of time used for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex’s inactivtimer.

CallDef_newline_terminal

interprets carriage returns and line feeds for CLI. When you enterdisabled, acarriage return or a line feed terminates the input line and a carriage returfollowed by a line feed terminates output lines. When you enterenabled, a linefeed terminates both the input and the output lines.

CallDef_output _flow _control

defines the method that a device uses to start or stop output from an ISDN PrRate Annex. You can choose:

• none to disable flow control.

• start/stop to designate flow control by recognizing xon and xoffcharacters.

• eia to indicate that flow control is delegated to a lower level.

Type AnnexValues minutes or secondsDefault minutesLists Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Idle Timer, Call Defaults, Sync

Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing

Type AnnexValues none, XonXoff, hardwareDefault hardwareLists Annex Only, Flow Control, Modem, Call Defaults



CallDef_output_is_activity

defines activity as output. If you enterenabled, the Annex resets the inactivitytimer to0 when it sends output.

CallDef_output _start _char

defines the control character sequence that restarts output ifCallDef_output_flow_control is set tostart/stop.

CallDef_output _stop _char

defines the control character sequence that stops output ifCallDef_output_flow_control is set tostart/stop.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal, Call

Defaults

Type AnnexValue + any characterDefault + (displays as ^Q)Lists Annex Only, Flow Control, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl Q

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^S)Lists Annex Only, Flow Control, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl S



sesletter.

s not

CallDef_port defines the CLI prompt for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This parameter uformatting codes consisting of the percent character and a single lowercase You can combine these codes (e.g.%a%c) using up to 16 codes. In addition, youcan enter text that will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry doeexceed 32 characters. You can enter:

• %a to displayAnnex.

• %c to display a colon and a space.

• %d to display the date and time (e.g., Mon Mar 1413:59:42 1996)

• %i to display an Annex’s IP address.

• %j to display a new line.

• %l to display the port’s location. If no location is defined, theport number (e.g.,port 10) appears.

• %n to display an Annex’s name or its IP address.

• %p to display the port number of a virtual CLI connectionnumber preceded byv.

• %r to displayport.

• %s to display a space.

• %t to display the current time in 24 hour format.

• %u to display the user name.

Type AnnexValues %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %r, %s, %t, %uDefault %a%cLists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI, Call Defaults



n.

0)

otd

CallDef_port_input_flow_control

specifies the method of flow control for input received through a connectioYou can enter:


• xonXoff to designate flow control by recognizing xon and xoffcharacters.

• hardware to indicate that flow control is delegated to a lowerlevel.

CallDef_port_multisession

enables two active windows on DEC’s TD/SMP-supported(VT420 or VT33terminals that are dialed in to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. The feature isavailable to all calls on which the VCI interface is configured.

CallDef_port_password defines a password for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call. You can use thispassword as a back-up for host-based security if the security servers do nrespond, or as an additional line of security after you enter a user name anpassword. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this value asset orunset.

If you use SecurID, setCallDef_port_password to a null string(" "). Please refer to theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guide forUNIX for more information about SecureID.

Type AnnexValues none, xonXoff, hardwareDefault noneLists Annex Only, Flow Control, Modem, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults,

Synch Call Defaults



nex.

can

x

CallDef_port_server_security

enables a host-based security policy for access to an ISDN Primary Rate AnIf you enterenabled, only authorized users can access the Annex.

CallDef_port_user_name

defines a default user name for this ISDN Primary Rate Annex.

CallDef_ppp_acm specifies which of the first 32 bytes (0x0 to 0x1F) of the ASCII character setbe sent as clear text and which should be protocol-escaped.

CallDef_ppp_mru defines the maximum receive unit (MRU) that an ISDN Primary Rate Annerequests as its local MRU.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Modem, Modem Internal, Security, Call

Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 8 character hexadecimalDefault 00000000Lists Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 64 to 1500Default 1500Lists Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults



nexsinglest:

eager

CallDef_ppp_ncp specifies the protocols that run on the interface. The ISDN Primary Rate Annegotiates only for those protocols that are specified here. You can select a protocol, all protocols, or a combination of two protocols from the following li

• all

• ipcp

• atcp

• ipxcp

• ipcp-atcp

• ipcp-ipxcp

• atcp-ipxcp

• ipcp-atcp-ipxcp

CallDef_ppp_password_remote

contains the password that an ISDN Primary Rate Annex provides when thremote PPP peer asks for authentication. For security reasons, Annex Mandisplays this parameter’s value asset or unset.

Type AnnexValues all, ipcp, atcp, ipxcp, ipcp-atcp, ipcp-ipxcp, atcp-ipxcp,

ipcp-atcp-ipxcpDefault allLists Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call

Defaults



uiresrity

self

ng a

CallDef_ppp_security_protocol

defines the security check for the peer that the ISDN Primary Rate Annex reqbefore it starts the network control protocol. If the Annex wants to use secuand the peer refuses, the Annex closes the link. You can enter:

• chap to use challenge-handshake protocol.

• pap to use password authentication protocol.

• chap/pap to use both challenge-handshake protocol andpassword authentication protocol.

• none.

CallDef_ppp_username_remote

contains the username by which the ISDN Primary Rate Annex identifies itwhen the remote PPP peer asks for authentication.

CallDef_printer_host specifies the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a machine runniBerkeley-style lpd server. Thetn3270 command uses this server for the print-screen function.

Type AnnexValues chap, pap, chap/pap, noneDefault noneLists Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call

Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call

Defaults

Type AnnexValues IP address or domain nameDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults



eith

mand)

CallDef_printer_name specifies the printer used by thetn3270 command’s print-screen function. Youmust enter a name listed in the/etc/printcap file on the remote host by theCallDef_printer_host parameter. Please refer to theRemote AnnexAdministrator’s Guide for UNIX for more information.

CallDef_redisplay_line defines the reprint line character for CLI users.

CallDef_reset_idle_time_on

defines whether input or output resets the idle timer. The idle time is the timlapse between activity and inactivity at the device. This parameter works wthewho command.

CallDef_resolve_protocol

defines the default host protocol that establishes a connection when the comdoes not specify a protocol. If you enterany, the system attempts a LAT (connectfirst; if that fails, it attempts to establish a telnet connection.

Type AnnexValues Printer name from/etc/printcap fileDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^R)Lists Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl R

Type AnnexValues input or outputDefault inputLists Annex Only, Idle Timer, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues connect, telnet, anyDefault connectLists Annex Only, Call Defaults



the

er

CallDef_rs232_async_data_bits

defines the number of data bits in a character. This value does not includestart, stop, or parity bits.

CallDef_rs232_async_parity

defines the parity type for asynchronous connections.

CallDef_rs232_async_stop_bits

specifies the number of stop bits for an asynchronous connection.

CallDef_rs232_sync_clock_source

defines the source of the connection’s bit rate clock.Split indicates that thetransmit clock is internal and the receive clock is external.

CallDef_short _break allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt aftreceiving a break of less than two seconds.

Type AnnexValues 5, 6, 7, or 8Default 8Lists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal,

Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues none, odd, evenDefault noneLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal,

Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues one, two, one-and-halfDefault oneLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal,

Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues clk56, clk64, clk112, clk128, external, splitDefault clk56Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Idle Timer, Call Defaults



IP

DN SLIP

sers

ce.

CallDef_slip_mtu_size sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for a PPP SLIP/CSLIPconnection to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This parameter forces the SLinterface to use large (1006) or small (256) MTUs.

CallDef_slip_no_icmp discards ICMP packets directed to the SLIP link. This parameter allows the ISPrimary Rate Annex to reduce unnecessary traffic and messages over thelink.

CallDef_slip_ppp_security

controls dial-up SLIP/PPP access to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. Whenenable_security andCallDef_slip_ppp_security are set toenabled, SLIP and PPPcalls will use the ACP security server. The Annex determines whether CLI uare authorized to execute SLIP or PPP commands.

CallDef_slip_subnet_mask

contains the ISDN Primary Rate Annex’s IP subnet mask for a SLIP interfaThe parameter’s default is based on the network portion of the Annex’s IPaddress. Setting this parameter incorrectly can cause routing problems.

Type AnnexValues large or smallDefault smallLists Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call

Defaults

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults



be data,ine

the

can

by an

CallDef_slip_tos allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to send interactive traffic (such astelnet,rlogin, andftp control sessions) before it sends other traffic. This parameterprovides a type-of-service based SLIP queuing.

CallDef_tcp_keepalive specifies the length of time an ISDN Primary Rate Annex connection mustidle before sending keep-alive messages. A keep-alive message contains nobut solicits an acknowledgment from the other end of a connection to determwhether the connection is still active. If the recipient does not acknowledgemessage after eight retries, the Annex drops the connection. You can use0 (AnnexManager’s default value) to set the keep-alive time to 120 minutes, or you enter255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism.

CallDef_telnet_crlf converts a carriage return in a Telnet session to a carriage return followedline feed. If you enterdisabled, a carriage return translates to a carriage returfollowed by a null string.

CallDef_telnet_escape defines the character that returns a CLI user to thetelnet prompt. You can press and enterU to disable thetelnet escape character.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLIsts Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^])Lists Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl ]



aex

DN

ex

and

CallDef_term_var identifies the type of terminal dialed in to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex viaCLI connection. You must enter a valid terminal type for the host. The Annpasses the terminal type setting to the host.

CallDef_toggle_output defines the character that flushes the output buffer for CLI users calling an ISPrimary Rate Annex.

CallDef_v120_mru defines the maximum receive unit (MRU) that the ISDN Primary Rate Annrequests as its local MRU.

CallDef_vci_login_port_password

enables the ISDN Primary Rate Annex password when the DECServer comminterface is configured (i.e., whenCallDef_cli_interface is set tovci). For moreinformation, please refer to theAnnex Interface for VMS EnvironmentsAdministrator’s Guide.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues + any characterDefault + O (displays as ^O)Lists Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AnnexValues 30 to 260Default 256Lists Annex Only, Call Defaults

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, VCI Interface



(i.e.,

nal. If

slash

sion

CallDef_vci_login_timeout

enables a login timer when the DECServer command interface is configuredwhenCallDef_cli_interface is set tovci). For more information, please refer totheAnnex Interface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guide.

chap_auth_name contains the character string that appears in theName field when an Annexissues a CHAP challenge over a PPP link.

char_erase allows an Annex using CLI to display the character erase for a video termiWhen you chooseenabled, a deleted character looks as if it has been erased.you choosedisabled, the Annex echoes the erase characters for a hard-copyterminal. It displays a backslash (\), one or more deleted characters, and a(/). For example, typingasdf g displays asasdf\fd/g.

circuit_timer indicates the time interval in tens of milliseconds between the transmisof LAT packets. For example, if you enter9, the time interval will be 90milliseconds.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Call Defaults, VCI Interface

Type AnnexValues 1 to 16 charactersDefault chapLists Annex Only, Security

Delete Delete

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port. Command Line Editing

Type AnnexValues 1 to 100 tens of millisecondsDefault 8 (80 milliseconds)Lists Annex Only, LAT



likes.

ts.pts

cli_imask7 allows an Annex to mask CLI input to seven bits. If you choosedisabled, theAnnex expects eight-bit ASCII input. You should not chooseenabled unless theterminal attached to the port can transmit only seven-bit characters.

cli_inactivity specifies the amount of time in minutes that the Annex remains idle beforedisconnecting a CLI session from a port. Entering0 disables the timer; entering255 causes the Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its last job. Uninactivity_timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLI session with active job

cli_interface allows you to control the prompt that appears for VMS or UNIX environmenIf you enteruci, this parameter provides a standard UNIX interface, with promdefined by thecli_prompt andprompt parameters. If you entervci, the standardVMS interface includes theLocal> prompt followed by theUsername> prompt.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Async Port, Idle Time, Modem, Modem Internal

Type AsyncValues vci or uciDefault uciLists Async Port



ngu canerceed

cli_prompt defines the Annex prompt for all CLI users. This parameter uses formatticodes consisting of the percent character and a single lowercase letter. Yocombine these codes (e.g.%a%c) using up to 16 codes. In addition, you can enttext that will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry does not ex32 characters. You can enter:


• %c to display a colon and a space.

• %d to display the date and time (e.g., Mon Mar 1413:59:42 1996)


• %j to display a new line.






• %t to display the current time in 24 hour format.

• %u to display the port’s user name.

Type AnnexValues %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %r, %s, %t, %uDefault %a%cLists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI



ions.an

filest

. Ifrity

ver

cli_security enables user authentication by the host-based ACP server for all CLI connectIf you choosedisabled, you cannot use any Annex security mechanism other ththe administrative password for CLI ports.

config_file defines a name for the configuration file maintained on the load host. The contains information about gateways, rotaries, macros, and services. It mureside in the/usr/spool/erpcd/bfs directory.

connect_security activates the host-based security policy for access from CLI to the networkyou chooseenabled, the user must be authorized via the host-based ACP secuserver to connect to a network host. The security policy in the security serscans the/etc/acp_restrict file to authorize a connection to a host from theAnnex.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Security

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault config.annexLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Security



:

the

ion.

control_lines defines the type of hardware control lines used on this port. You can enter

• both to allow flow and modem control.

• flow_control to allow flow control (RTS/CTS) only.

• modem_control to allow modem control using only DTR/DCD/DSR handshaking.

• none to disable flow and modem control.

data_bits defines the number of data bits in a character. This value does not includestart, stop, or parity bits.

daylight_savings allows the Annex to adjust for daylight savings time in your geographic locat

Type AsyncValues both, flow_control, modem_control, noneDefault noneLists Async Port, Flow_Ctrl, Modem, Modem Internal

Type AnnexValues 5, 6, 7, or 8Default 8Lists Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem

Type AnnexValues us, australian, british, canadian, east_european,

mid_european, west_european, noneDefault usLists Annex only



eter

can

uent

e is

dedicated_arguments defines the command line arguments used for dedicated ports. This paramworks whenmode is set toconnect, rlogin, telnet, or tn3270.

dedicated_port selects the application name or TCP port number to which an Annex port connect. You can enter:

• telnet, rlogin, or call.

• One of the following numbers:

• 0 or 23 for telnet.

• 513 for rlogin.

• 1027 for call.

• A number between 0 and 65535.

This parameter is obsolete in Annex software Release 10.1 and in subseqreleases. Please use thededicated_arguments parameter.

def_session_mode defines the default session mode when the DECServer command interfacconfigured (i.e., whencli_interface is set tovci). For more information, pleaserefer to theAnnex Interface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guide.

Type AsyncValues 1 to 100 charactersDefault “ ” (null string)Lists Async Port, Dedicated Port

Type AsyncValues telnet, rlogin, call or a TCP/IP port number.Default telnetLists Dedicated Port

Type AsyncValues interactive, passthru, passall, transparentDefault interactiveLists Async Port



ex is

ure.

do not

s the

default_image_name contains the name of the image file that is loaded by default when the Annbooted.

default_zone_list contains the zone list that is sent to AppleTalk clients in case of an ACP failYou must use spaces to separate zone names (e.g.,general engineering lab). Toescape embedded spaces within a zone name, use the backslash (\). If youset this parameter, the Annex provides the network zone list.

demand_dial allows a port to use demand dialing. You cannot use this parameter unlesoption_key parameter enables demand dialing.

DHCP_broadcast determines whether or not an Annex broadcasts for DHCP services if thepreferred DHCP servers are not available.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 100 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues 1 to 100 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, AppleTalk


Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only



the
dialup_addresses_origin
allows an Annex to search theacp_dialup file for the remote client’s user nameand to set local and remote addresses. This parameter applies only when mode parameter is set toslip, ppp, or autodetect.

• acp_dialup:

• If the file contains a matching user name and:

• The local and remote addresses exist in theacp_dialup

file, the Annex uses those values.

• The theacp_dialup file contains a remote address butnot a local address, the Annex uses the remote addressfrom the file and the Annex’s IP address for the localaddress.

• If the file does not contain a matching user name, the Annexuses values from thelocal_address andremote_address

parameters:

• If both parameters contain addresses, the Annex usesthese values.

• If both parameters are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annexnegotiates for both addresses with the remote PPPclient. The connection is denied for a remote SLIPclient.

• If local_address contains a value andremote_address

is set to0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address andnegotiates with the remote PPP client for the remoteaddress. The connection is denied for a remote SLIPclient.

• dhcp contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address onbehalf of the user.

• Local reads the user’s remote address from theremote_addressparameter.



rled

.

to

tion.

disabled_modules allows you to disable individual modules to free memory space. If you entemore than one module, separate module names using commas. For detaiinformation about disabling modules, refer to theRemote Annex Administrator’sGuide for UNIX. You can enteradmin, edit, fingerd, ftpd, lat, nameserver, ppp, slip.snmp, vci, all, or none.

Disablingsnmp prevents access to the Annex from Annex ManagerDisablingadmin andsnmp can cause problems if host-basedna isnot available. To change parameters in this case, you must returnmonitor mode, erase the parameters in non-volatile memory, andreconfigure the Annex.

do_compression starts TCP/IP header compression on a SLIP link. When you chooseenabled,the Annex negotiates for TCP/IP compression for both sides of the connec


Type AnnexValues admin, edit, fingerd, ftpd, lat, nameserver, ppp, slip, snmp,

vci, all, noneDefault vciLists Annex Only, Basic Annex




for

is

e

plies

dtr_signal controls the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal for the port. Entering a valuean idle port causes an error condition.

If you change this value and then reset a port or reboot an Annex, thparameter will return to its original default values. Therefore, youmust press in the Reset Parameters window to prevent threset process and to use the parameter value you entered.

echo directs an Annex to echo all characters as a user types. This parameter aponly to the CLI level.

enable_security allows you to activate the security system.

Cancel

Type AsyncValues unknown, high, lowDefault unknownLists Async Port

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, AppleTalk, IPX, PPP, SLIP, Security,

Virtual CLI



.

ion

ber,

erase_char uses a control character sequence to define the CLI erase character.

erase_line uses a control character sequence to define the CLI line erase character.

erase_word uses a control character sequence to define the CLI word erase character

facility_num identifies a LAT host using a number.

forward_key defines the character sequence that opens the next higher-numbered sessestablished at a port. Xylogics recommends that you use a sequence with+ a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter or numAnnex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, +a +b, displays asa/b.

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^?)Lists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl Delete

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^U)Lists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl U

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^W)Lists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl W

Type AnnexValues 0 through 32767Default 0Lists Annex Only, LAT

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, vci_interface



ther

an, the

cesst oner

forwarding_count controls Annex port behavior for received characters. If you enter a number othan0, the port does not forward characters until it receives the number ofcharacters you entered. If you enter0, the port uses values inforwarding_timer.If you useforwarding_count andforwarding_timer parameters, the Annex usesthe value that occurs first.

Settingforwarding_count to 1 or forwarding_timer to 0 may have asevere effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.

forwarding_timer sets the amount of time in ten millisecond intervals that can elapse beforeAnnex forwards received data. If new data arrives before the timer expiresAnnex resets the timer. If you enter0, the Annex uses5, which is AnnexManager’s default value.

Settingforwarding_count to 1 or forwarding_timer to 0 may have asevere effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.

group_value specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that can access local servioffered by an Annex. To access these services, the Annex must have at leaenabled group code that matches the service’s group codes. You can enteall,none, a series of numbers separated by commas, (e.g.,1, 5, 7) or a range ofnumbers separated by dashes (e.g.1, 5, 200-255).

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255Default 0Lists Async Port, Idle Timer

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255 tens of millisecondsDefault 5 (50 milliseconds)Lists Async Port, Idle Timer

Type AnnexValues all, none, or numbers from 0 to 255Default noneLists Annex Only, LAT



acesly for

..

you

hardware_tabs allows the Annex to convert ASCII tab characters to the correct number of spwhen a terminal does not support hardware tabs. This parameter works onCLI sessions.

host_table_size defines the number of entries allowed in the host table. Entering255 allows anunlimited number of entries. Entering254 indicates that there is no host tableIn this case, the Annex requires a name server to resolve every host name

image_name provides the file name for the operational code that loads by default whenboot an Annex. You can enter a name using up to 100 characters.

imask_7bits allows an Annex to mask input to seven bits. If you choosedisabled, the Annexexpects eight-bit ASCII input.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 64Lists Annex Only, Modem

Type AnnexValues 1 to 100 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex only

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Basic Async Port



rse

ber

lds or a

s for

inactivity_timer specifies the number of minutes that a port can remain inactive. If the timeexpires, the Annex terminates all sessions and resets the port. You can uinput_is_activity andoutput_is_activity to define activity as input to the port oroutput from the port. If you set these parameters todisabled, the timer runsindependent of activity. To reset a port regardless of any activity, enter a numof minutes here, setinput_is_activity andoutput_is_activity to disabled and setport_type to dialin.

inet_addr defines the Annex’s IP address. This 32-bit address contains four 8-bit fieseparated by periods. Each field contains a number ranging from 0 to 255hexadecimal number. The IP address always displays in decimal notation.

input_buffer_size provides the number of 256-byte blocks allocated to receive input charactera port.

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 (timer disabled)Lists Async Port, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal

Type AnnexValues For each field: 0 to 255 or hexadecimalDefault n/aLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues 1 to 255Default 1Lists Async Port, Flow Control



ted
input _flow _control specifies the method of flow control for input received from a device connecto a serial port. You can enter:


• eia to indicate that flow control is delegated to a lower level(e.g., a parallel port).

input_is_activity defines activity as input. If you chooseenabled, the Annex sets the inactivitytimer when it receives input at the port.

input _start _char defines the control character sequence that restarts input ifinput_flow_control isset tostart/stop.

Type AsyncValues none, start/stop, eiaDefault noneLists Async Port, Printer Port, Flow Control, Modem

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer, Modem

Type AsyncValue + any characterDefault + (displays as ^Q)Lists Async Port, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl Q



en an

theor netface.opy

rnet

ted,tednot

input _stop _char defines the control character sequence that stops input ifinput_flow_control isset tostop/start.

ip_forward_broadcast allows an Annex to broadcast a packet to the SLIP or PPP interfaces. WhAnnex receives a packet sent to a broadcast address (except 0.0.0.0 and255.255.255.255), it scans the interface list for SLIP or PPP and matches broadcast address against the interface’s remote address using a subnet mask. If these addresses match, the Annex copies the packet to that interIf you enterdisabled, the Annex does not scan the interface list and does not cbroadcast packets.

ipencap_type indicates whether the Annex LAN interface encapsulates IP packets in EtheVersion 2 format or IEEE 802.3 Data Link Layer format.

ipso_class specifies the U.S. Department of Defense basic IP Security Option (IPSO)classification level included in TCP packets generated on Annex CLI, dedicaor adaptive asynchronous ports. The option is not added to locally generaICMP messages, RIP updates, or other system packets. The Annex does check incoming packets for the presence of the IPSO.

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^S)Lists Async Port, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl S

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues ethernet or ieee802Default ethernetLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues none, secret, topsecret, confidential, unclassifiedDefault noneLists Async Ports, Security



sion

nex

n the

x

ipx_do_checksum controls the IPX checksum feature, which is supported only on Netware ver3.12 and 4.xx.

ipx_dump_password contains a user password for logging on to the Novell file server before the Ansends a dump file to the server. Annex Manager displaysset or unset.

ipx_dump_path specifies the full pathname that stores the uploaded Annex dump image oNovell file server.

ipx_dump_username provides user name for logging on to the Novell file server before the Annesends a dump file to the server.

ipx_file_server contains the name of the Novell file server from which an Annex boots.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, IPX

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, IPX

Type AnnexValues 0 to 100 charactersDefault n/aLists Annex Only, IPX





ended

n ofrkses

andue.our

ipx_frame_type defines framing used for IPX packets on the Ethernet interface.

ipx_security controls whether IPX security is enabled on the port.

ixany_flow_control treats any input character as a start (XON) character if output has been suspby a stop (XOFF) character.

keep_alive_timer specifies the number of seconds that can elapse between the transmissioidentification packets during times of network inactivity. This parameter woonly for the LAT protocol. The packets serve only as notices to remote nodthat the host’s services are available.

lat_key restricts access to LAT-specific Annex commands, parameters, functions, the LAT protocol within the Annex. Each Annex requires a unique key valYou must contact your supplier to obtain a LAT key. After you set the key, ysystem administrator must reboot the Annex.

Type AnnexValues raw802_3, ethernetII, ccitt802, ccitt802snapDefault raw802_3Lists Annex Only, IPX

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Security

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Ports, Flow Control

Type AnnexValues 10 to 255 secondsDefault 20 secondsLists Annex Only, LAT

Type AnnexValues obtained from your supplierDefault n/aLists Annex Only, LAT



ment

x

or

t.

lat_multicast_timer defines the number of seconds that can elapse between service announcetransmissions for the LAT protocol.

llat_sys_location supplies host location or identification information for the LAT protocol.

lat_queue_max limits the number of HIC (Host Initiated Connection) requests that an Annecan queue.

latb_enable allows an Annex to decode a LAT host’s data-b packets, which changeasynchronous port parameters. Refer to your LAT host’s documentation fdetails.

If you enterenabled and the LAT host sends a data-b slot messagerequesting that flow control (XON/XOFF) be turned off, the Annexturns off flow control and passes XON/XOFF characters to the hosThis scenario can adversely affect XON/XOFF and the terminal’scursor keys.

Type AnnexValues 10 through 180 secondsDefault 30 secondsLists Annex Only, LAT

Type AnnexValues 0 to 32 charactersDefault “ “Lists Annex Only, LAT

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 4Lists Annex Only, LAT

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Ports, LAT



oseback

ning

sage- not

load

line_erase allows an Annex using CLI to echo line erase for a video terminal. If you choenabled, the Annex erases all characters on the line and moves the cursor to the beginning of the line. If you choosedisabled, it echoes the line erasecharacter for hard-copy terminals, making the deleted line visible and positiothe print head at the beginning of the next line.

load_broadcast defines, during a boot, whether the Annex requests the configuration or mesof-the-day files from other hosts. This parameter works only if the files areavailable on the preferred load host.

load_dump_gateway specifies the gateway’s IP address. A gateway is required if the preferred or dump host is on a different network or subnet than the Annex.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic_Annex

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0 (no gateway)Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex



for asing

ress

load_dump_sequence specifies available network interfaces and the order in which they are useddown-line load or an up-line dump. You can list more than one interface by ucommas to separate interface names. You can enter:

• net to specify a local area network.

• sl + port number (e.g.,sl2) to specify a SLIP line. If you entersland a port number, you must enter an address in theslip_load_dump_host parameter.

• self to instruct an Annex to boot its image from the FlashROMs. Since the Annex cannot dump back to itself, you shouldinclude a secondary interface here by enteringself, net orself,sl+port number.

local_address defines the IP address for the port on the Annex side of the link. This IP addis used only whenmode is set toslip, ppp, or autodetect.

location defines a port location or description that displays at the CLIwho command.

lock_enable allows any port to use the LOCK DECServer command.

Type AnnexValue net, sl+ port number, selfDefault netLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AsyncValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Async Port, PPP, SLIP

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, Basic Async Port

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Security



gnal

IP

same

n

long _break allows an Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a break siof more than two seconds. If you enterdisabled, the Annex passes the break tothe local application.

loose_source_route controls the Loose Source Routing protocol, which defines a sequence of addresses that a datagram must follow. You can selectenabled ordisabled. Whenyou select enable, the Annex:

• Forwards IP packets that have theLoose Source Routing andRecord option set.

• Forwards packets with theStrict Source Routing and Recordoption only if it can reach the next routing address directly.

• Drops packets that do not have either setting and sends anICMP Destination Unreachable message with aSource Route Failedcode.

If you enterdisabled, the Annex accepts packets withLoose Source Routing andRecord or Strict Source Routing and Record only when the Annex itself is thedestination. If it is not the destination, it drops these packets and sends theICMP type message and code.

Loose source routing may be a security problem if you use filters oyour network router. If you are concerned with security, you shouldset this parameter todisabled.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Ports, Idle Timer

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Security



ropsert

gitsnnter:

CLIo not

map controls mapping of DS0s between the T1 Network Interface and the T1 Dand Insert Interface, as well as mapping of modems to the T1 Drop and InInterface and the T1 Network Interface.

You can enter a 4-digit number consisting of two parts. The right-hand two dicontrol the type of mapping. The left-hand two digits identify the destinatiomodem, if any, and must be 00 if there is no destination modem. You can e

• 01 to mark a DS0 as unused. When you use01, the next twodigits must be00.

• 02 to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped to modemnumbernn, wherenn represents the two digits that follow.

• 03 to mark a T1 Drop and Insert Interface DS0 as mapped tomodem numbernn, wherenn represents the two digits thatfollow.

• 04 to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped in voicemode directly to the Drop and Insert Interface. When you use04, the next two digits must be00.

• 05 to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped in datamode directly to the Drop and Insert Interface. When you use05, the next two digits must be00.

map_to_lower allows an Annex to convert uppercase characters sent from a terminal usinginto lowercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals that dsupport lower case characters.

Type T1 DS0Values 4-digit number (see combinations above)Default 02 + a two-digit number equal to the DS0.Lists T1_DS0




CLIt do

gIM-

n

map_to_upper allows an Annex to convert lowercase characters sent to a terminal using into uppercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals thanot support lower case characters.

max_chap_chall_interval

specifies the maximum value for the random CHAP re-challenge interval.

max_modem_calls indicates the number of modem calls for which the Annex keeps accountininformation. You can use this parameter only for RA6100, Cabletron CSMT1, and Cabeltron MODMIM products.

max_vcli determines the maximum number of virtual CLI connections the Annex cacreate at a time. Entering255 allows a number of connections limited only bythe Annex’s available memory.


Type AnnexValues 0 to 65535Default 0 (Off)Lists Annex Only, Security

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 255Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255Default 255Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI



er

imal

bout

metric defines the hop count to the remote end of the serial line whenmode is set toslip orppp. Modify this parameter only if you want the Annex to use a route oththan the SLIP or PPP interfaces to the remote end.

min_unique_hostnames

specifies whether you can identify a host in the host table by entering a minstring rather than the full host name.

mode sets the mode for access to an asynchronous port. For more information amodes, see theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX and theAnnexAdministrator’s Guide for DOS. You can enter:

• cli to allow a port connected to a terminal or incoming modemaccess to CLI. CLI provides access to the network andconnections to other hosts via thetelnet, connect, rlogin andtn3270 commands.

Thetn3270 command is available only whenoption_key is set to an appropriate value.

• slave to indicate that a port provides access to modems, serialline printers, and other serial devices attached to an outgoingport. It does not provide access to the CLI.

• adaptive to allow slave and CLI capabilities. If a connection isinitiated via an Annex, the port enters CLI mode. If aconnection is initiated via a port server, the port enters slavemode.

Type AsyncValues 1 to 15Default 1Lists Async Port, PPP, SLIP

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Modem



• unused to indicate that a port has no connection. You shouldenterunused if a port is not connected to a device.

• slip to specify that a port can perform as a network interfaceusing SLIP. IP packets are encapsulated by SLIP.

• dedicated to allow a port to communicate only with the hostdefined in thededicated_address anddedicated_portparameters. The port can communicate viatelnet or rlogin, butnot viatn3270 or connect.

• ppp to specify that a port can perform as a network interfaceusing PPP. IP packets are encapsulated by PPP.

• arap to specify that a port can perform as a network interfaceusing ARAP.

• auto-detect to allow a port to identify an incoming packet’sprotocol and to convert to IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.

• auto-adapt to allow a port to detect whether packets areincoming or outgoing. For incoming packets, the port behavesas if it were inauto-detect mode. For outgoing packets, itoperates inslave mode.

• ndp to allow Novell dial-in, dial-out, and routing.

• ipx to allow dial-in Novell access.

• connect to allow a port to communicate with a LAT host via theconnect command. This option works with thededicated_arguments parameter.

• rlogin to allow a port to communicate via therlogin command.This option works with thededicated_arguments parameter.

• telnet to allow a port to communicate via thetelnet command.This option works with thededicated_arguments parameter.

• tn3270 to allow a port to communicate via thetn3270 command.This option works with thededicated_arguments parameter.



er a

orks

modem_type specifies the type of modem attached to the asynchronous port. If you enttype that does not match thetype_of_modem field in the configuration file thatwas read most recently, the Annex logs a warning message. For moreinformation about the configuration file modem management, see theRemoteAnnex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX.

mop_login_password specifies the password for all ports using a VMS interface. This parameter wonly whencli_interface is set tovci andvci_login_port_password is set toenabled.For security reasons, Annex Manager displays values asset or unset.

mop_login_prompt defines the prompt that appears for all ports using a VMS interface. Thisparameter works only whencli_interface is set tovci.

Type AsyncValues cli, slave, adaptive, unused, slip, dedicated, ppp, arap, auto-

detect, auto-adapt, ndp, ipx, connect, rlogin, telnet, tn3270Default cliLists Async Port, AppleTalk, Basic Async Port, Dedicated Port,

IPX, Modem, PPP, SLIP, TN3270

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault n/aLists Async Port, Modem

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, MOP

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault #Lists Annex Only, MOP



tive.

ere

is

host.ess

mop_login_timer specifies the number of minutes a port using a VMS interface can remain inacThis parameter works only whencli_interface is set tovci. Entering0 sets thetimer to 30 minutes (Annex Manager’s default value).

mop_password contains the MOP maintenance password. This is an 8-byte password, wheach byte consists of two hexadecimal digits. For security reasons, AnnexManager displays values asset or unset.

mop_pref_host contains the Ethernet address of the preferred MOP load or dump host. Thaddress consists of six parts separated by dashes. Each part contains ahexadecimal value.

motd_file contains the message-of-the-day file name that is maintained on the load This file resides in the directory you choose during the host installation proc(typically /usr/spool/erpcd/bfs).

Type AnnexValues 0 through 60 minutesDefault 30 minutesLists Annex Only, MOP

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, MOP

Type AnnexValues Ethernet addressDefault 00-00-00-00-00-00Lists Annex Only, MOP

Type AnnexValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault motdLists Annex Only, Basic Annex



ce/

ts

nnex

red

multisession allows terminals (i.e., VT420 and VT 330) supporting DEC’s Terminal DeviSession Management Protocol (TD/SMP) to display two active windowssimultaneously. Enteringenabled here makes this feature available to all poron which the VCI command interface is configured.

name_server_1 defines the type of name service used with the primary name server. Thisparameter works only when you specify a host inpref_name1_addr.

name_server_2 defines the type of name service used with the secondary name server. The Auses this service when the service specified inname_server_1 is not available.This parameter works only when you specify a host inpref_name2_addr.

nameserver_broadcast defines whether the Annex broadcasts a name server request if the prefername servers do not respond.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, VCI_Interface

Type AnnexValues dns, ien_116, noneDefault noneLists Annex Only, Nameserver

Type AnnexValues dns, ien_116, noneDefault noneLists Annex Only, Nameserver

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Modem



therll not

ated

e, on).

ctiver

r.

need_dsr allows an Annex to use the DSR (Data Set Ready) signal to determine whea device is attached to the corresponding asynchronous line. The Annex wiallow connection to a slave line port and will not activate CLI until the DSRsignal is active. If DSR is deactivated, the connection to a slave line is terminand CLI is deactivated.

If you choosedisabled, the DSR signal is not required to connect to a slave linand is not required to activate a CLI line. DSR is always considered activeports that do not have a DSR signal (ports with partial modem control lines

net_inactivity defines the amount of time an asynchronous interface port can remain inabefore the port is reset. Thenet_inactivity_units parameter determines whethethe number you enter here is in minutes or seconds.

net_inactivity_units determines the unit of time used for the port’s serial protocol inactivity time

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Flow Control, Modem

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255Default 0Lists Async Ports, Idle Timer, PPP, SLIP

Type AsyncValues minutes or secondsDefault minutesLists Async Port, PPP, SLIP



curityhe

n

ssion.e ID. by

network_turnaround controls the number of seconds that an Annex waits for a response from a seserver. An algorithm defines the actual time, which is usually longer than tnumber of seconds in this parameter. This parameter works only whenenable_security is set toenabled.

You should not enter a high number here unless you need a longtimeout for contacting a slow host or for waiting for a slow host’sresponse to a security request.

newline_terminal interprets carriage returns and line feeds for CLI. When you enterdisabled, acarriage return or a line feed terminates the input line and a carriage returfollowed by a line feed terminates output lines. When you enterenabled, a linefeed terminates both the input and the output lines.

node_id contains the address an Annex tries to acquire at the start of an AppleTalk seIf the address you enter here is in use, the Annex must acquire a new nodThis new ID is stored in non-volatile RAM. Each ID has two parts, separateda dot.

Type AnnexValues 1 to 255 secondsDefault 2 secondsLists Annex Only, Security

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Type AnnexValues 0 to 65534.255Default 0.0Lists Annex Only, AppleTalk



foralue.

. You

option_key enables AppleTalk-specific functions and parameters, the CLItn3270 command,active RIP, dial-out routing, filtering, and IPX. These features are availableseparately or in any combination. Each Annex requires a unique key valuethe features you choose. You must contact your supplier to obtain the key v

output _flow _control defines the method that a device uses to start or stop output from an Annexcan choose:



• eia to indicate that flow control is delegated to a lower level(e.g., a parallel port).

output_is_activity defines activity as output. If you enterenabled, the Annex sets the inactivity timerwhen it sends output from the port.

Lists AnnexValues option key value from your supplierDefault n/aLists Annex Only, Basic Annex, AppleTalk, IPX

Type AsyncValues none, start/stop, eiaDefault noneLists Async Port, Printer Port, Flow Control, Modem

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem

Internal



s.e

hen

output _start _char defines the control character sequence that restarts output ifoutput_flow_controlis set tostart/stop.

output _stop _char defines the control character sequence that stops output ifoutput_flow_controlis set tostart/stop.

output_ttl sets the time-to-live (TTL) for packets the Annex generates for RIP updateTTL is a field in IP packets that limits their lifetime on the network. Each tima packet crosses a router, the router decrements the packet’s TTL by 1. Wthe value reaches 0, the packet is discarded.

parity defines the type of parity that the asynchronous port uses.

Type AsyncValue + any characterDefault + (displays as ^Q)Lists Async Port, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl Q

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^S)Lists Async Port, Flow Control

Ctrl

Ctrl S

Type AnnexValues 1 to 255Default 64Lists Annex Only, Routing

Type AsyncValues none, odd, evenDefault noneLists Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal



ruser

nex

ord

heort.

oose

only

password modifies the Annex’s administrative password used for access to the supeCLI commands and for administrative access to an Annex. This passwordoverrides the CLI lock and virtual CLI passwords. For security reasons, AnManager displays this value asset or unset.

password_limit defines the maximum number of times a user can attempt to enter a passwbefore an Annex resets the port. Entering0 sets the limit to 3 (Annex Manager’sdefault value).

phone_number defines the default phone number used with demand dialing on the port. Tnumber you enter must be compatible with the modem connected to the p

port_modem_config sets other parameters for a specific modem configuration. Each value you chhere sets values in themode, port_type, speed, control_lines,input_flow_control, output_flow_control, need_dsr, bidirectional_modem, andbroadcast parameters. Thedialinautobaud anddialinoutautobaud selections settheautobaud parameter in addition to those listed above. The following listincludes the parameter values that will be set. You can use this parameterfor RA6100, Cabletron CSMIM-T1, and Cabeltron MODMIM products.

Type AnnexValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, Security

Type AnnexValues 0 through 10Default 3Lists Annex Only

Type AsyncValues 32 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, PPP, SLIP



• None setsmode to cli, port_type to hardwired, speed to 9600,control_lines to none, input_flow_control to none,output_flow_control to start/stop, need_dsr to disabled,bidirectional_modem to disabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Dialinautobaud setsmode to cli, port_type to dialin, autobaud toenabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardwaresupports),control_lines to both, input_flow_control to eia,output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled,bidirectional_modem to disabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Dialin setsmode to cli, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (orthe highest speed that the hardware supports),control_lines toboth, input_flow_control to eia, output_flow_control to eia,need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, andbroadcast_direction to port.

• Dialinoutautobaud setsmode to adaptive, autobaud to enabled,port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed thatthe hardware supports),control_lines to both, input_flow_controlto eia, output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to disabled,bidirectional_modem to enabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Dialinout setsmode to adaptive, port_type to dialin, speed to115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports),control_lines to both, input_flow_control to eia,output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to disabled,bidirectional_modem to enabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Dialout setsmode to slave, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200(or the highest speed that the hardware supports),control_linesto both, input_flow_control to eia, output_flow_control to eia,need_dsr to disabled, bidirectional_modem to enabled, andbroadcast_direction to network.



g

• Autodetect setsmode to auto_detect, port_type to dialin,autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed thatthe hardware supports),control_lines to both, input_flow_controlto eia, output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled,bidirectional_modem to enabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Autoadapt setsmode to auto_autoadapt, port_type to dialin,autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed thatthe hardware supports),control_lines to both, input_flow_controlto eia, output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled,bidirectional_modem to disabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

• Ipx setsmode to ipx, port_type to dialin, autobaud to enabled,speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardwaresupports),control_lines to both, input_flow_control to eia,output_flow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled,bidirectional_modem to disabled, andbroadcast_direction toport.

You can set any parameter included inport_modem_configseparately. For example, you can choosedialin and then change thespeed parameter to 57600. This change effects port_modem_confiin the following way:

Each time you use a command that readsport_modem_config’svalue, the Annex tries to match the individual parameter values toexistingport_modem_config settings. If parameter values match,Annex Manager displays the appropriate value forport_modem_config. If you have changed one or more parametervalues so that they do not matchport_modem_config values, AnnexManager displaysunknown. Unknown appears only under thiscircumstance. You cannot choose unknown forport_modem_config.



thisd.

word or asor

port_multisession allows you to select ports that will display two active windows. You can use parameter only for ports on which the VCI command interface is configure

To use the multisession feature, you must:

• Have a valid LAT key.

• Enterenabled for themultisession parameter.

• Enterenabled for themultisession_port parameter.

• Reset an Annex if you change values for themultisession parameters.

port_password defines a port password for local password protection. You can use this passas a back-up for host-based security if the security servers do not respond,an additional line of security after you enter a user name and password. Fsecurity reasons, Annex Manager displays this value asset or unset.

If you use SecurID, setport_password to a null string (" "). Pleaserefer to theAnnex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX for moreinformation about SecureID.

Type AsyncValues none, dialinautobaud, dialin, dialinoutautobaud, dialinout,

dialout, autodetect, autoadapt, ipxDefault noneLists Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists VCI_Interface

Type AsyncValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault unsetLists Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal



erver.

rts.e

port_server_security enables a host-based security policy for access to the port through the port sIf you enterenabled, only authorized users can access the port.

port_tcp_keepalive overridestcp_keepalive for connections to the host from adaptive, CLI, anddedicated ports, and for connections from the host to slave and adaptive poYou can use0 (Annex Manager’s default value) to specify that the keep-alivtime is the value set in thetcp_keepalive parameter, or255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism for the port.

port_type defines the type of device attached to a port.

port_user_name defines a default user name for this port.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Security

Type AsyncValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Type AsyncValues hardwired, dialin, x25, tn3270, pc, terminal, printer, modemDefault hardwiredLists Async Port, Command Line Editing, Dedicated Port,

Modem

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, Security



can

a

d will

ecificparatethatlticast

cal

ppp_acm specifies which of the first 32 bytes (0x0 to 0x1F) of the ASCII character setbe sent as clear text and which should be protocol-escaped.

ppp_ipx_network defines a unique network number for an IPX PPP connection assigned to specific port. The number is negotiated when the IPX PPP connection isestablished. If the number at one end is zero (0), the number at the other enbe used. You can enter an 8-digit hexadecimal number here.

ppp_ipx_node defines a unique node number for an IPX PPP connection assigned to a spport. You can enter a 12-digit hexadecimal number here, using dashes to sesets of two numbers (e.g., 00-00-00-00-00-00). You cannot use a number has 1 in the last bit of the first octet, since these numbers are reserved for muaddresses, or0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, which is reserved as a broadcast node address.

ppp_mru defines the maximum receive unit (MRU) that the Annex requests as its loMRU.

Type AsyncValues 8 character hexadecimalDefault 00000000Lists Async Port, PPP

Type AsyncValues 0x00000001 to 0xFFFFFFFFDefault 00000000Lists Async Port, PPP

Type AsyncValues 0x00-00-00-00-00-00 to 0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FEDefault 00-00-00-00-00-00Lists Async Port, PPP

Type AsyncValues 64 to 1500Default 1500Lists Async Port, PPP



y forll

r

ts theses,

ppp_ncp specifies the protocols that run on the interface. The Annex negotiates onlthose protocols that are specified here. You can select a single protocol, aprotocols, or a combination of two protocols from the following list:

• all

• ipcp

• atcp

• ipxcp

• ipcp-atcp

• ipcp-ipxcp

• atcp-ipxcp

ppp_password_remote defines a PPP port user’s password For security reasons, Annex Managedisplays this parameter’s value asset or unset.

ppp_security_protocol defines the security check for the peer that the Annex requires before it starnetwork control protocol. If the Annex wants to use security and the peer refuthe Annex closes the link. You can enter:

• chap to use challenge-handshake protocol.

• pap to use password authentication protocol.

• chap/pap to use both challenge-handshake protocol andpassword authentication protocol.

• none.

Type AsyncValues all, ipcp, atcp, ipxcp, ipcp-atcp, ipcp-ipxcp, atcp-ipxcpDefault ipcpLists Async Port, PPP

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault unsetLists Async Port, PPP, Security



PPP

as theHCP

as thet

ppp_username_remote contains the username by which the Annex identifies itself when the remotepeer asks for authentication.

pref_DHCP1_addr contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use primary source for DHCP services. When enabled, the client broadcasts Dmessages.

pref_DHCP2_addr contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use backup source for DHCP services when the primary DHCP server does norespond. When enabled, the client broadcasts DHCP messages.

Type AsyncValues chap, pap, chap/pap, noneDefault noneLists Async Port, PPP, Security

Type AsyncValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, Basic Annex, PPP, Security

Type AnnexValues IP AddressDefault n/aLists Annex Only

Type AnnexValues IP AddressDefault n/aLists Annex Only



h the

hichdress

pref_dump_addr contains an IP address for the preferred dump host. This is the host to whicAnnex first tries to dump.

pref_load_addr specifies the IP address for the preferred load host. This is the host from wthe Annex first requests a load of its operational code. You should set this adto the boot host’s IP address.

pref_name1_addr contains the IP address of the host specified in thename_server_1 parameter.

pref_name2_addr contains the IP address of the host listed in thename_server_2 parameter or theaddress of a back-up host that serves ifname_server_2 is set tonone.

Type AnnexValue IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Modem

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Modem



ds

ll

ll

pref_secure1_host contains the IP address of the security server to which the Annex first sensecurity requests. This parameter works only if theenable_security parameteris set toenabled.

pri_analog_encoding defines the coding type of an incoming analog (modem) call. If you choose auto,the ISDN Primary Rate Annex sets the coding type tomu_law (US) ora_law

(Europe).

pri_block_in_calls facilitates ISDN Primary Rate Annex shutdown by automating incoming caattrition. If you chooseenabled, existing calls are allowed to terminate but newincoming calls are blocked.

pri_block_out_calls facilitates ISDN Primary Rate Annex shutdown by automating outgoing caattrition. If you choose enabled, existing calls are allowed to terminate but newoutgoing calls are blocked.

Type AnnexValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Security

Type AnnexValues auto, mu_law, a_lawDefault autoLists DS1 Line, PRI Line

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disableLists DS1 Line, PRI Line

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disableLists DS1 Line, PRI Line



x toUse

This

ary

d will

aryes tomber

d for

pri_dsx1_line_length defines the length, in meters, of the line from an ISDN Primary Rate Annean external CSU. The value is used when a dsx1 line driver is configured. the default value for an Annex with an internal CSU.

pri_ip_addr defines the IP address for the remote end of a connection on a B channel.parameter works only when theCallDef_mode parameter is set toautodetect,slip, or ppp.

pri_ipx_network defines a unique network number for an IPX PPP connection to an ISDN PrimRate Annex. The number is negotiated when the IPX PPP connection isestablished. If the number at one end is zero (0), the number at the other enbe used. You can enter an 8-digit hexadecimal number here.

pri_ipx_node defines a unique node number for an IPX PPP connection to an ISDN PrimRate Annex. You can enter a 12 digit hexadecimal number here, using dashseparate sets of two numbers (e.g., 00-00-00-00-00-00). You cannot use a nuthat has 1 in the last bit of the first octet, since these numbers are reservemulticast addresses, or0xFF-FF_FF_FF_FF_FF, which is reserved as a broadcast node address.

Type AnnexValues r0-25, r26-65, r66-100, r101-135, r136-165, r166-185,

r186-210Default r0-25Lists DS1 Line, PRI Line

Type AnnexValues IP AddressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists DSO Channel, Channel

Type AnnexValues 0x 00000001to 0xFFFFFFFFDefault 00000000Lists DSO Channel, Channel

Type AnnexValues 0x00-00-00-00-00-00 to 0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FEDefault 00-00-00-00-00-00Lists DSO Channel, Channel



it ise

s.

ng a

pri_switch_type defines the kind of switch the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses.

• 5ESS for At&T’s 5ESS switch.

• ni2 for the switch that supports National ISDN2.

• dms100 for Nortel’s DMS100 switch.

• default to set the switch value to the default string (“ “).

• other if the Annex you chose is operating outside the UnitedStates.

printer_crlf converts a carriage return to a carriage return followed by a line feed beforesent to the printer. If you enterdisabled, a carriage return translates to a carriagreturn followed by a null string.

printer_hardware_tabs controls whether the Annex sends tab characters to a printer. If you enterdisabled,the Annex converts a tab character to the corresponding number of space

printer_host specifies the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a machine runniBerkeley-style lpd server. Thetn3270 command uses this server for the print-screen function.

Type AnnexValues att5ESS, ni2, dms100, default, otherDefault att5ESSLists DS1 Line, PRI Line

Type PrinterValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLIsts Printer Port

Type PrinterValue enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Printer Port

Type AsyncValues IP address or domain nameDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Async Port, TN3270



smitspport

printer_map_to_upper allows an Annex to convert lower case characters to upper case before it trancharacters to a printer. This parameter is used for older printers that do not sulower case characters.

printer_name specifies the printer used by thetn3270 command’s print-screen function. Youmust enter a name listed in the/etc/printcap file on the remote host by theprinter_host parameter. Please refer to theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guidefor UNIX for more information.

printer_tcp_keepalive overridestcp_keepalive for connections from applications such asaprint orrtelnet to one or more printer ports. If you use0 (Annex Manager’s default value),the keep-alive timer uses the value set by thetcp_keepalive parameter. You canenter255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism for the printer port.

printer_type specifies the type of printer attached to the port.

Type PrinterValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Printer Port

Type AsyncValues Printer name from/etc/printcap fileDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, TN3270

Type PrinterValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Printer Port, Command Line Editing

Type PrinterValues centronics or dataproductsDefault centronicsLists Printer Port, Command Line Editing



odesbine

t 32

printer_width sets the maximum number of characters per line. If you enter0, the Annex doesnot insert a new line into the data stream.

prompt defines the CLI prompt for a specific port. This parameter uses formatting cconsisting of the percent character and a single lowercase letter. You can comthese codes (e.g.%a%c), using up to 16 codes. In addition, you can enter texthat will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry does not exceedcharacters. You can enter:


• % c to display a colon and a space.

• %d to display the date and time (e.g.,Mon Mar 14 13:59:42 1996).


• %j to display a new line character.






• %t to display the current time.

• %u to display the port’s user name.

Type PrinterValues 0 to 132 charactersDefault 0Lists Printer Port, PPP

Type AnnexValues %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %s, %t, %uDefault Value incli_prompt parameterLists Annex Only, Basic Async Port



ortndmeter

meter

eith

ps_history_buffer is used with thetelnet command to indicate how much incoming data a slave pkeeps in a buffer. Incoming data is buffered continuously before, during, aafter the Telnet session. The port must be reset after you change this paravalue.

redisplay_line defines the reprint line character for CLI users.

remote_address contains the IP address for a host at the other end of the serial line. This paraworks only when the mode parameter is set toautodetect, slip or ppp.

reset_idle_time_on defines whether input or output resets the idle timer. The idle time is the timlapse between activity and inactivity at the device. This parameter works wthewho command.

Type AsyncValues 0 to 32767Default 0Lists Async Ports, Basic Async Port

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^R)Lists Async Port, Command_Line_Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl R

Type AsyncValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Async Port, PPP, SLIP

Type AsyncValues input or outputDefault inputLists Async Port, Idle Timer



es aol.

ly

anded

nterby

retrans_limit indicates the number of times an Annex retransmits a packet before it notifiuser about a network failure. This parameter works only for the LAT protoc

ring controls the audible ring for incoming calls. You can use this parameter onwhen you selectwink or immediate for sigproto.

rip_accept defines the networks for which the Annex accepts advertised routes. You centerall, none, or a list of one to eight IP addresses in decimal format, preceby include or exclude.

rip_advertise defines the networks for which the Annex will advertise routes. You can eall, none, or a list of one to eight IP addresses in decimal format, preceded include or exclude.


Type T1 DS0Values enabled or disabledDefaultLists T1_DS0

Type InterfaceValues all, none, or one to eight IP addresses preceded by include

or excludeDefault n/aLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type InterfaceValues all, none, or one to eight IP addresses preceded by include

or excludeDefault allLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing



ber

nts.

rupiahs contains the password that controls authentication for RIP packets. AnnexManager displays this parameter’s value asset if you enter the password here,or asunset if you enter a null string.Unset indicates that authentication is turnedoff and that all RIP packets are accepted.

rip_default_route allows an Annex to advertise that it is the default router. You can enter a numfrom 1 to 15 to indicate the hop count that will be advertised. Entering0 turnsoff the advertisement.

rip_horizon controls the split horizon algorithm for RIP. You can enter:

• off to disable split horizon.

• split to enable split horizon without poison. Split horizonprevents a route from being advertised over the interface onwhich it was learned.

• poison to enable split horizon with poison reverse. Poisonreverse advertises the route over the interface on which it waslearned, but sets the hop count to 16.

rip_next_hop specifies whether the next hop value is included in RIP version 2 advertiseme

Type AnnexValue 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, Routing

Type InterfaceValues 0 through 15Default 0Lists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type InterfaceValues off, split, poisonDefault poisonLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type InterfaceValues never, needed, alwaysDefault neededLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing



stinguters,

that

oose:

rnet

rip_recv_version controls the RIP versions that an Annex accepts. You can enter:



• both to accept version 1 and 2 packets.

rip_routers lets you force RIP to send periodic updates to a router list instead of broadcaupdates. You can enter the IP addresses of one to eight directly reachable roor you can enterall to restore broadcasting. The Annex ignores any address is not on an attached subnet.

rip_send_version controls the RIP versions that an Annex sends over IP interfaces You can ch

• rip-1 to send version 1 packets to the broadcast address.

• rip-2 to send version 2 packets to the RIP multicast address.

• compatibility to send version 2 packets to the broadcast address.

rip_sub_accept controls whether subnet routes are accepted over the SLIP, PPP, and Etheinterfaces. You can enterenabled to accept subnet routes ordisabled to rejectthem.

Type InterfaceValues 1, 2, bothDefault bothLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type AnnexValues IP address, allDefault allLists Annex Only, Routing

Type InterfaceValues 1, 2, compatibilityDefault compatibilityLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type InterfaceValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing



and

ng

ete

r an

rtltrs

rip_sub_advertise controls whether the Annex advertises subnet routes over the SLIP, PPP, Ethernet interfaces.

routed determines whether the RIP routing daemon is enabled. When you enterenabled,the Annex performs active RIP routing only ifoption_key is set to the correctvalue. Ifoption_key is not set correctly, the Annex performs passive RIP routiwhen the daemon is enabled. If you enterdisabled, no RIP routing occurs.

If you disable the RIP routing daemon and the Annex does not residon the same subnetwork as the Annex Manager’s host, you will nobe able to contact the Annex after you reboot it or after you reset throuting subsystem.

rts_signal controls the RTS (Request to Send) signal for the port. Entering a value foidle port produces an error condition.

If you change the value for this parameter and then reset a poor reboot an Annex, the parameter will return to its original defauvalue. Therefore, you must press in the Reset Parametewindow to prevent the reset process and to use the parametervalues you entered.

Type InterfaceValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Enet Port, Async Port, Routing

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Basic Annex, Routing

Cancel

Type AsyncValues unknown, high, lowDefault unknownLists Async Port



the

rred

-

rwhod determines whether the Annex listens for RWHO broadcasts when it buildshost table.

security_broadcast determines whether an Annex broadcasts for security validation if the prefesecurity servers are not available.

server_capability defines an Annex as a file server host. You can enter:

• all to define the Annex as a file server for the configuration,operational image, and message-of-the-day files.

• config to define the Annex as a file server for configuration files.

• image to define the Annex as a file server for Annex operationalcode.

• motd to define the Annex as a file server for the message-of-theday file.

• none to indicate that the Annex is not a file server.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Modem

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Annex Only, Security

Type AnnexValues all, config, image, motd, noneDefault noneLists Annex Only, Basic Annex



the’s

itshatex

time.

ort at

server_name names the Annex in the LAT protocol. The name you enter should matchVMS host’s node name used in the HIC configuration file. Annex Managerdefault value isLAT followed by the physical ethernet address (for example,LAT_080002BF0020).

service_limit indicates the maximum number of services that an Annex can maintain in local service table. When the table is full, the Annex removes the service thas been idle longest. If all services are busy and the table is full, the Anndiscards a new service.

session_limit_annex specifies the maximum number of active sessions the Annex allows at one

session_limit_port specifies the maximum number of active sessions the Annex allows on a pone time. You can enter-1 to indicate that there is no maximum set.

Type AnnexValues 1 to 16 charactersDefault LAT + physical ethernet addressLists Annex Only, LAT



Type AsyncValues -1 to 16Default 3sLists Async Port, Basic Async Port,



of

r to

r’s

isUs.

short _break allows an Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a breakless than two seconds.

sigproto indicates the signal protocols supported by each DS0 T1 channel.

slip_allow_dump enables an Annex to dump its operational code across a SLIP link.

slip_load_dump_host contains the IP address of the host from which an Annex receives a load owhich it sends dumps over the SLIP interface. If you enteredsl and a number inload_dump_sequence, you must enter a valid address here. This parametevalue overrides values inpref_load_addr andpref_dump_addr.

slip_mtu_size sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size on a SLIP/CSLIP port. Thparameter forces the SLIP interface to use large (1006) or small (256) MT

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, Idle Timer

Type T1 DS0Values loop-loop, loop-none, none-loop, ground-ground, ground-

none, none-ground, wink-wink, wink-none, none-wink,immed-none, none-immed, none-none.

Default loop-loopLists T1_DS0

Type Async PortValues enabled or disabledDefault enabledLists Async Port, SLIP

Type AsyncValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Async Port, SLIP

Type AsyncValues large or smallDefault smallLists Async Port, SLIP



e

ity SLIP

r’s this

rvice

slip_no_icmp discards ICMP packets directed to the SLIP link. This parameter allows thAnnex to reduce unnecessary traffic and messages over the SLIP link.

slip_ppp_security controls dial-up SLIP/PPP access. Whenenable_security andslip_ppp_securityare set toenabled, ports configured for SLIP and PPP will use the ACP securserver. The Annex determines whether CLI users are authorized to executeor PPP commands.

slip_subnet_mask contains the Annex’s IP subnet mask for a SLIP interface. The parametedefault is based on the network portion of the Annex’s IP address. Settingparameter incorrectly can cause routing problems.

slip_tos allows an Annex to send interactive traffic (such astelnet, rlogin, andftp controlsessions) before it sends other traffic. This parameter provides a type-of-sebased SLIP queuing.

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, SLIP

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, PPP, SLIP, Security

Type AsyncValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Async Port, SLIP

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port, SLIP



nnex.eed

x

n thetly

on

speed defines the baud rate of the asynchronous line between a device and an AThe value you enter must match the device’s baud rate. If you want line spto be determined automatically, use theautobaud parameter.

If you enterdisabled in the autobaud parameter, you must enter avalue here.

Not all Annexes support all port speeds. Please refer to your Annehardware guides for detailed information.

stop_bits specifies the number of stop bits for a port.

subnet_mask contains the Annex’s IP subnet mask. The parameter’s default is based onetwork portion of the Annex’s IP address. Setting this parameter incorreccan cause routing problems.

sysContact identifies the contact person for this managed node, including information how to contact this person.

Type AsyncValues 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,

115,200, and othersDefault 9600Lists Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem

Type AsyncValues one, two, one-and-half, dynamicDefault oneLists Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal

Type Annex OnlyValues IP addressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexDefault n/aValues 0 to 255 charactersLists Annex Only



nnex

sysLocation identifies the physical location of this node (e.g., third floor lab).

sysName contains this node’s fully-qualified domain name.

sys_location supplies host location or identification information for the LAT protocol.

syslog_facility defines the local facility to which the Unixsyslogd daemon sends Annex syslogmessages. Please refer to theRemote Annex Administrator’s Guide for UNIX fora detailed syslog configuration description, and to your Unix systemdocumentation.

syslog_host contains the IP address of the host that logs Annex messages. If you use AManager’s default setting (0.0.0.0), the Annex broadcasts its log messages.



Type AnnexValues 0 to 32 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, LAT

Type AnnexValues log_local0 to log_local7Default log_local7Lists Annex Only, Syslog

Type AnnexValues IP AddressDefault 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, SysLog



e andr

syslog_mask determines the priority levels that the Annex logs. You can enterall, none, asingle option from the list below, or a combination of options separated bycommas (e.g.,emergency, alert). The following list includes options in priorityorder. You can enter:

• emergency to log hardware failures.

• alert to log all Annex reboots.

• critical to log configuration and initialization problems such asconfiguration file format errors or lack of memory.

• error to log all line initialization errors, including CLI errors.

• warning to log minor problems.

• notice to log time server queries and information aboutresponses.

• info to start and end CLI sessions and Annex jobs created byrlogin, telnet, connect, ping andtap commands.

• debug to start and end any Annex process.

For more information about event logging, please refer to theRemote AnnexAdministrator’s Guide for UNIX.

syslog_port routes syslog messages to an asynchronous port where messages are timdate stamped. You can enter0 for syslogging to take place over the network, oa number to indicate the port to which syslog messages are sent.

Type AnnexValues emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, info,

debug, all, noneDefault none (disables logging)Lists Annex Only, SysLog

Type AnnexValues 0 or a port numberDefault 0Lists Annex Only, SysLog



.

ends an the after

e

Drop

thereinal

t1_info contains information about the T1 line supplied by the telephone company

tcp_keepalive specifies the length of time a TCP connection must be idle before an Annex skeep-alive messages. A keep-alive message contains no data, but solicitsacknowledgment from the other end of a connection to determine whetherconnection is still active. If the recipient does not acknowledge the messageeight retries, the Annex drops the connection. You can use0 (Annex Manager’sdefault value) to set the keep-alive time to 120 minutes, or you can enter255 todisable the keep-alive mechanism. Theport_tcp_keepalive andprinter_tcp_keepalive parameters override values in this parameter for thosindividual ports.

tdi_distance indicates the length of the cable that runs between the equipment and the and Insert Interface.

tdi_framing selects the superframe format used on the T1 Drop and Insert Interface. If is terminal equipment on this interface, your selection must match the termequipment’s format.

Type T1 DS1Values 0 to 16 charactersDefault n/aLists T1_DS1

Type AnnexValues 0 to 255 minutesDefault 0 minutesLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type T1 DS1Values 1 to 655 feetDefault 1 footLists T1_DS1

Type T1 DS1Values esf, d4Default esfLists T1_DS1



r

by arn

alid host.

tdi_line_code selects the line code format used on the T1 Drop and Insert Interface. Youselection must match the codes assigned to the terminal equipment.

telnet_crlf converts a carriage return in a Telnet session to a carriage return followedline feed. If you enterdisabled, a carriage return translates to a carriage retufollowed by a null string.

telnet_escape defines the character that returns a CLI user to thetelnet prompt. You can press and enterU to disable thetelnet escape character.

term_var identifies the type of terminal using the CLI connection. You must enter a vterminal type for the host. The Annex passes the terminal type setting to the

Type T1DS1Values b8zs, amiDefault b8zsLists T1_DS1

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLIsts Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + (displays as ^])Lists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl ]

Type AsyncValues 0 to 16 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Async Port, Basic Async



ofth

load

tftp_dump_name provides the file name used to dump an Annex’s core image viatftp if the Annexoperational image anderpcd fail. This parameter must include the entire path the dump file, including parent directories. The file you enter must exist wiread/write permissions.

tftp_load_dir contains the string that precedes all files (e.g., image name, configuration, andmotd files) when you boot an Annex viatftp. This string’s value is determinedby the system serving thetftp requests. It does not precede thetftp_dump_name.

time_broadcast defines whether the Annex broadcasts for the current time if the preferred host is not available or does not provide a time server.

Type AnnexValues path and file nameDefault n/aLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues provided by tftp systemDefault n/aLists Annex Only, Basic Annex

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Time of Day



:

.

.

mbertive

ich

cancket).

time_server_addr lists the IP address that an Annex queries for time service. You can enter

• A loopback address (127.0.0.1) to disable time service queries

• A host address to send queries to a specific host.

• A broadcast address to send queries to a specific network ornetworks instead of sending a general broadcast to all networks

• 0.0.0.0 to direct the Annex to query the boot host.

timezone_minuteswest defines the time zone in which the Annex resides. You can enter a positive nuof minutes for time zones west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or a neganumber for time zones east of GMT. For example, you would enter300 for U.S.Eastern Standard Time, which is five hours west of GMT, or -60 for Paris, whis one hour east of GMT.

tmux_delay provides the maximum number of milliseconds during which small packets accumulate to form larger packets. When the time expires, the multiplexed pais sent. Entering0 sets this parameter to 20 (Annex Manager’s default value

Type AnnexValues loopback address, host address, broadcast address, 0.0.0.0Default 0.0.0.0Lists Annex Only, Time of Day

Type AnnexValues positive or negative number of minutesDefault 300Lists Annex Only, Time of Day

Type AnnexValues 0 through 255Default 20Lists Annex Only, TMux



ets

ress, the

nnex

ice

tmux_enable controls whether an Annex uses TMux to multiplex small TCP or UDP packinto a single IP packet. The host must support TMux. If you chooseenabled andthe host does not support TMux, the Annex will not support multiplexing.

tmux_max_host specifies the maximum number of host addresses allowed in the TMux addtable. If the number of host addresses exceeds the number you enter hereAnnex discards the oldest entry.

tmux_max_mpx specifies the largest user packet that can be placed in a TMux packet. The Adoes not multiplex larger packets, but passes them directly to the IP layer.

tni_circuit_id contains the transmission vendor’s circuit identifier used for customer servcalls.

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, TMux



Type T1 DS1Values 0 to 128 charactersDefault “ “Lists T1_DS1



ction

nalone

tni_clock defines the transmit clock for the T1 Network Interface. You can select:

• looptiming to use the recovered receive clock at the transmitclock.

• localtiming to use the local clock as the transmit clock.

• throughtiming to use the recovered receive clock from the otherinterface as the transmit clock.

tni_esf_fdl defines the protocol used by the telephone company to read the statisticsmaintained by an Annex and perform diagnostic tests. You can selectnone, att,ansi, or other.

tni_framing selects the superframe format used on the T1 Network Interface. Your selemust match the format supplied by the telephone company.

tni_line_buildout contains the cable loss measurement, in decibels, between the last T1 sigregenerator and your location. This measurement is supplied by the telephcompany at installation. You need to adjust your buildout based on thismeasurement.

Type T1 DS1Values looptiming, localtiming, throughtimingDefault looptimingLists T1_DS1

Type T1 DS1, PRIValues none, att, ansi, or otherDefault attLists T1_DS1, PRI Line

Type T1 DS1Values esf, d4Default esfLists T1_DS1

Type T1 DS1, PRIValues 0_db, 7.5_db, 15_db, 22.5_dbDefault 0_dbLists T1_DS1, PRI Line



ion

lines

uld

tni_line_code selects the line code format used on the T1 Network Interface. Your selectmust match the codes supplied by the telephone company.

tni_loop_bak_config defines the DS1 interface’s loopback configuration. Users cannot access T1when you change this parameter’s value. You can select:

• noloop to prevent the signal from looping through the T1engine.

• payloadloop to allow the incoming signal to be looped throughthe T1 engine after it passes through the framing function.

• lineloop to cause the incoming signal to loop to the networkwithout passing through the T1 engine.

• localloop to cause the T1 engine’s outgoing signal to loop backto the incoming side.

T1 lines are available to users only when you choosenoloop.

tni_ones_density disables the T1 engine’s built-in ones density monitor. When you selectenabled,this monitor provides the network with the correct number of pulses. You shoselect enabled here when you set thetni_line_code parameter toami.

Type T1 DS1Values b8zs, amiDefault b8zsLists T1_DS1

Type T1 DS1Values noloop, payloadloop, lineloop, localloopDefault noloopLists T1_DS1

Type T1 DS1Values enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists T1_DS1



ction next is

gured

(i.e.,

toggle_output defines the character that flushes the output buffer for CLI users.

vci_autobaud indicates whether the Annex automatically detects line speed when a conneis opened and whether it sets matching terminal port characteristics on thelogin. This parameter works only when the DECServer command interfaceconfigured (i.e., whencli_interface is set tovci). For more information, pleaserefer to theAnnex Interface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guide.

vci_login_port_password

enables the port password when the DECServer command interface is confi(i.e., whencli_interface is set tovci). For more information, please refer to theAnnex Interface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guide.

vci_login_timeout enables a login timer when the DECServer command interface is configuredwhencli_interface is set tovci). For more information, please refer to theAnnexInterface for VMS Environments Administrator’s Guide.

Type AsyncValues + any characterDefault + O (displays as ^O)Lists Async Port, Command Line Editing

Ctrl

Ctrl

Type AsyncValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Async Port





ual

as acurityurity

ou

ndeter

vcli_groups specifies which remote group code is assigned to virtual CLI users. All virtCLI users have the same group code. You can enterall to enable all groups,noneto disable all groups, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g.,1, 5, 7), ora range of numbers separated by dashes(e.g.1, 5, 200-255).

vcli_password defines a password required for virtual CLI connections to the Annex and back-up to host-based security. This parameter serves as host-based sebackup: the Annex requests a password on a virtual CLI connection if the secserver does not respond. For local password protection, you can setenable_security to enabled, choosedisabled for vcli_security, and enter apassword here.

vcli_security controls user validation on virtual CLI connections to and from an Annex. If ychooseenabled, the Annex enables connection security for all virtual CLIconnections and executes the same user validation, including user name apassword, that it uses with CLI security on asynchronous ports. This paramworks with host-based security only if you setenable_security to enabled.

Type AnnexValues all, none, numbers between 0 and 255Default noneLists Annex Only, LAT

Type AnnexValues 0 to 15 charactersDefault unsetLists Annex Only, Security, Virtual CLI

Type AnnexValues enabled or disabledDefault disabledLists Annex Only, Security, Virtual CLI



ust
zone provides the AppleTalk zone name that the Annex uses at start-up. You muse spaces to separate zone names (e.g.,general engineering lab). To escapeembedded spaces, use the backslash (\).
Type AnnexValues 0 to 32 charactersDefault “ “ (null string)Lists Annex Only, AppleTalk


by

ore,r

Chapter 20Troubleshooting

This section provides answers to the questions frequently askedAnnex Manager users.

Starting Annex Manager

Annex Manager’s startup procedure reads all the parameter, groupdefinitions, and other data files. This may take several seconds or mdepending on your workstation and its current load. Annex Managedisplays an in-progress message to indicate that it is initializing itsdatabase.

“Not Reachable” Status

• You may try to connect to an Annex and receive theNOTREACHABLE message. This may be caused by one of theconditions described below. If you check these situations andstill cannot connect to the Annex, call technical support.

• Did you enter a correct Annex name or IP address?

• Annex Manager can connect to an Annex if the name or IPaddress you entered are correct. The Annex name you entermust match a name in the Annex in the local/etc/hosts file.

• Is the Annex booted?

• Open a direct connection to an Annex through one of itsasynchronous ports. You should be able to log onto the Annexand run CLI commands. If you cannot log on, try to reboot theAnnex.

• Can you reach the Annex from the Annex Manager'sworkstation?

• Use theping or telnet commands to reach the Annex from awindow on Annex Manager's workstation. If you cannot dothis, you may not have a path from your workstation to theAnnex in the network.


Chapter 20 Troubleshooting Part 5 Reference Information

• Is the SNMP agent running on the Annex?

Annex Manager cannot communicate with an Annex unless theAnnex is running the SNMP daemon process. You should usethesu CLI command to go to thesuperuser or administrative modefrom the direct connection to the Annex, and then use theprocCLI command to find a line for thesnmpd process. For example,this line may read:407 0 S0 7e8d0 103c 7f7f4 12 12 0 18 0:00.017 ? snmpd.If there is nosnmpd process:

• Check the Annex's configuration file to make sure there isat least onesnmp community defined. Reboot the Annex ifyou change the configuration file.

• Check thedisabled_modules parameter using theadmin orna tool. If this parameter indicates that SNMP is disabled,the Annex discards SNMP messages. You should removesnmp from the parameter’s list of disabled modules andreboot the Annex.

• Did you enter the correct community name?

The community name you enter must match an entry in theAnnex's configuration file. Check the configuration file andlook for allsnmp community definitions. The Annex can have upto four different community names.

• Are the Annex and Annex Manager's workstation on differentsubnetworks?

Using thesuperuser proc CLI command, check to see if therouted process is running. If it is not, the Annex may not beable to reply to the messages received from Annex Manager.Use thesuperuser admin CLI command to change the routedconfiguration parameter toyes and reboot the Annex.


Chapter 20 TroubleshootingPart 5 Reference Information

odeoes

ased

e

gentMPtitytial

r,

Annex Manager Command Availability

Annex Manager provides Setup and Customize modes. Customize mincludes all commands except Setup mode windows. Setup mode dnot include theView Script, Create Script, Execute Script, Compare, Copy, Set,Show, User-defined Parameter Groups andSite Parameters commands. To usethese commands, you must selectCustomize from the Mode menu.

Show and Set Commands

Annex Manager may prevent you from changing parameter values bon the value of theallow_snmp_sets parameter. Ifallow_snmp_sets is set todisabled, you can use thetelnet command to reach the Annex and run thsuperuser admin CLI command to setallow_snmp_sets to yes.

The Annex default value does not allow changes to configurationparameters through SNMP. Annex Manager and the Annex SNMP ause SNMP version 1. The only security check performed by the SNagent is to match the community string in an incoming SNMP packewith the defined community strings for the Annex. Since the communstring in the SNMP packet is transmitted in the clear, there is a potensecurity risk in allowing changes to the configuration through SNMPmessages. If you wish to configure the Annex using Annex Manageplease be aware of this situation.



turn

ome

.ters, IP

lrs for youex, use

Returning to Previous Setup mode Window

Because Setup mode windows display based on your selections inprevious windows, you cannot display a second window and then reto another window. For example, you must close theGeneral (continued)window in order to return to theGeneral window. In addition, you mustclose all Setup mode windows to return to the main window.

Saving All Configuration Parameters

To save all parameter values for an Annex, use theCreate Script commandand select all parameters and all ports on the Annex. This may take stime for Annexes with a large number of asynchronous ports.

Saving Parameters in Scripts

Some Annex configuration parameters include sensitive informationThese parameters include all the Annex and port password paramethe option key that applies only for a specific Annex, and the Annex'saddress.

“Parameter does not exist” Message?

Not all parameters apply to all Annex hardware configurations or alsoftware releases. Since Annex Manager must support all parameteall Annex hardware and software, you may see this message whencompare one Annex’s port configuration to a port on a different Annwhen you copy parameters from one Annex to another, or when youtheShow or Set commands.



x'satchill

d. Iftion,

e

use

e.

SNMP Communication

In order for Annex Manager to communicate with an Annex, the AnneSNMP agent must be up and the specified community string must mone of the Annex’s community strings. To perform operations which wchange parameters (e.g., theSet command), theallow_snmp_sets parameteron the Annex must be set to Y (Yes). You can set this parameter only byusing the non-SNMPna andadmin tools.

OpenLook/OpenWindow Issues

When you run Annex Manager in an OpenLook/OpenWindowsenvironment, make sure that the latest xnews server patch is installethe application appears to hang after simple actions like a menu selecit is likely that the xnews server and OpenLook window manager arcausing the problem.

OpenLook Window Manager Close Menu Item

Do not use the OpenLook Window ManagerClose menu option from themenu bar. Use the Annex Manager buttons instead. If you the OpenLook Window Manager menu option, Annex Manager willterminate unexpectedly. This termination is not always immediate.

Ethernet Interface Numbering

Annex Manager numbers the ethernet interfaces starting with 1. Thna

andadmin tools number the ethernet interfaces starting with 0 (zero)

Close



era

ex

earsagerow

p.

g texto be

w, file

er

lem.

BadWindow Error on Startup

Some X window terminals (possibly depending on the type of Xservor on other applications which have been run recently), will display BadWindow error when you start Annex Manager. Currently, the onlyknown way to clear this problem is to reset the X window server. AnnManager will then come up correctly.

Initialization Window

Some window managers require that a window be placed once it appas an outline. If you use such a window manager, and the Annex Manmain window is not placed within a few seconds, the initialization windmay appear as a small sliver. You can expand this window. It willdisappear automatically when Annex Manager completes its start u

Cut and Paste

Some operating systems seem to have a problem cutting and pastinfrom one portion of a window to another. This issue does not seem texclusive to Annex Manager.

Help on File Selection Windows

When you use or to display help on a file selection windothe you cannot acknowledge the help window until you complete theselection window action.

Set Command Issues

You may experience intermittent problems with setting a large numbof parameters on multiple Annexes. Using theSNMP Information commandto increase the timeout value may reduce the frequency of the prob

F1 Help



asany

out

each

nt

ow

Modifying or Deleting Parameter Groups

Any user with write access to Annex Manager data files (i.e., who hthe ability to create, modify, or delete parameter groups) can modify parameter group even if the user did not create the file.

Resetting Modems

If you encounter problems resetting modems using theReset commandsor the Modem windows in the Setup mode, increasing the SNMP timevalues may alleviate this problem.

Boot Status

Annex Manager does not automatically update the current status of Annex (e.g.,NOT REACHABLE) when you attempt a boot operation. Youmust selectVerify Annex State from the Status menu to determine the currestatus.

MOP Issues

If the Annex has booted from a MOP host, the Annex Information windshows the boot host address as 0.0.0.0.


Index

Aa_router parameter 19-2acp_key parameter 19-2alarmsyslog parameter 19-2allow_broadcast parameter 19-2allow_compression parameter 19-3Annex lists 4-5 to 4-17

automatic 4-5 to 4-6changing 4-9creating 4-7 to 4-8obtaining Annex information from 4-11opening saved lists 4-16 to 4-17saving 4-15 to 4-16selecting Annexes from 4-8See also Save Annex List and Open An-

nex List commandsAnnex Manager windows 3-1

Cancel 3-11Confirmation 3-10File Selection 3-7 to 3-8Help 3-14 to 3-20overview of 3-2 to 3-3Reset Parameters 3-12secondary 3-6 to 3-12Warning 3-13

Annex Status command 17-1 to 17-5displaying the window 17-2loading box 17-3mbufs box 17-4memory box 17-4push buttons 17-5understanding the window 17-3 to 17-5

arap_v42bis parameter 19-3Async Port Status command 17-5 to 17-10

displaying the window 17-5 to 17-6entering port information 17-7port information box 17-8port totals box 17-7push buttons 17-10step-by-step instructions 17-10understanding the window 17-6 to 17-10

Async Ports window 7-2at_guest parameter 19-3, 19-8at_nodeid parameter 19-3at_security parameter 19-4attn_string parameter 19-4authoritative_agent parameter 19-4authorized_groups parameter 19-4autobaud parameter 19-5

Bbackward_key parameter 19-5banner parameter 19-5bidirectional_modem parameter 19-6Boot command 16-1 to 16-9

displaying the window 16-2messages 16-6options 16-3push buttons 16-5step-by-step instructions 16-6 to 16-9text fields 16-4 to 16-5understanding the window 16-3 to 16-6

Broadcast command 16-15 to 16-18choosing a broadcast destination 16-17displaying the window 16-16push buttons 16-18step-by-step instructions 16-18understanding the window 16-16 to 16-

17writing a message 16-17

broadcast_addr parameter 19-6broadcast_direction parameter 19-6bypass 19-6

CCall Defaults window 8-3 to 8-10CallDef_allow_broadcast parameter 19-7CallDef_allow_compression parameter 19-7CallDef_arap_v42bis parameter 19-7CallDef_at_guest parameter 19-7CallDef_at_nodeid parameter 19-8CallDef_at_security parameter 19-8

Index-1Annex Manager User Guide

Index

CallDef_attn_string parameter 19-8CallDef_authorized_groups parameter 19-9CallDef_backward_key parameter 19-9CallDef_banner parameter 19-9CallDef_broadcast_direction parameter 19-9CallDef_char_erase parameter 19-10CallDef_cli_imask7 parameter 19-10CallDef_cli_inactivity parameter 19-10CallDef_cli_interface parameter 19-11CallDef_cli_security parameter 19-11CallDef_connect_security parameter 19-11CallDef_dedicated arguments parameter 19-

11CallDef_def_session_mode parameter 19-

12CallDef_dialup_addresses parameter 19-12CallDef_do_compression parameter 19-13CallDef_echo parameter 19-13CallDef_erase_char parameter 19-13CallDef_erase_line parameter 19-13CallDef_erase_word parameter 19-14CallDef_forward_key parameter 19-14CallDef_forwarding_count parameter 19-14CallDef_forwarding_timer parameter 19-15CallDef_hardware_tabs parameter 19-15CallDef_inactivity_timer parameter 19-16CallDef_input_is_activity parameter 19-16CallDef_input_start_char parameter 19-16CallDef_input_stop_char parameter 19-17CallDef_ipso_class parameter 19-17CallDef_ipx_security parameter 19-17CallDef_ixany_flow_control parameter 19-17CallDef_latb_enable parameter 19-18CallDef_line_erase parameter 19-18CallDef_local_address parameter 19-18CallDef_location parameter 19-19CallDef_long_break parameter 19-19CallDef_map_to_lower parameter 19-19CallDef_map_to_upper parameter 19-19CallDef_mask_7bits parameter 19-15CallDef_max_session parameter 19-20

CallDef_metric parameter 19-20CallDef_mode parameter 19-20CallDef_net_inactivity parameter 19-21CallDef_net_inactivity_units parameter 19-

22CallDef_newline_terminal parameter 19-22CallDef_ouput_start_char parameter 19-23CallDef_output_flow parameter 19-22CallDef_output_is_activity parameter 19-23CallDef_output_stop_char parameter 19-23CallDef_port parameter 19-24CallDef_port_input_flow_control

parameter 19-25CallDef_Port_multisession parameter 19-25CallDef_port_password parameter 19-25CallDef_port_server_security parameter 19-

26CallDef_port_user_name parameter 19-26CallDef_ppp_acm parameter 19-26CallDef_ppp_mru parameter 19-26CallDef_ppp_ncp parameter 19-27CallDef_ppp_password_remote

parameter 19-27CallDef_ppp_security_protocol

parameter 19-28CallDef_ppp_username_remote

parameter 19-28CallDef_printer_host parameter 19-28CallDef_printer_name parameter 19-29CallDef_redisplay_line parameter 19-29CallDef_reset_idle_time_on parameter 19-

29CallDef_resolve_protocol parameter 19-29CallDef_rs232_async_data_bits

parameter 19-30CallDef_rs232_async_parity parameter 19-

30CallDef_rs232_async_stop_bits

parameter 19-30CallDef_rs232_sync_clock_source

parameter 19-30

Annex Manager User GuideIndex-2

Index

CallDef_short_break parameter 19-30CallDef_slip_mtu_size parameter 19-31CallDef_slip_no_icmp parameter 19-31CallDef_slip_ppp_security parameter 19-31CallDef_slip_subnet_mask parameter 19-31CallDef_slip_tos parameter 19-32CallDef_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-32CallDef_telnet_crlf parameter 19-32CallDef_telnet_escape parameter 19-32CallDef_term_var parameter 19-33CallDef_toggle_output parameter 19-33CallDef_v120_mru parameter 19-33CallDef_vci_login_port_ password

parameter 19-33CallDef_vci_login_timeout parameter 19-34Cancel window 3-11Channels window 8-10 to 8-12chap_auth_name parameter 19-34char_erase parameter 19-34check buttons 2-18circuit_timer parameter 19-34cli_imask7 parameter 19-35cli_inactivity parameter 19-35cli_interface parameter 19-35cli_prompt parameter 19-36cli_security parameter 19-37Compare command 15-1 to 15-10

comparing an Annex and a script 15-6comparing two Annexes 15-5comparing two scripts 15-7displaying the window 15-1 to 15-2options 15-3 to 15-4push buttons 15-9reading comparison output 15-7selecting Annexes and scripts 15-5step-by-step instructions 15-9 to 15-10

comparing and copying parameters 15-1 to15-20

config_file parameter 19-37Confirm Auto Reset option 3-12Confirmation window 3-10

confirming commands 3-10connect_security parameter 19-37control_lines parameter 19-38Copy command 15-11 to 15-20

confirmation window 15-18displaying the window 15-11 to 15-12message box 15-15options 15-13push buttons 15-16selecting Annexes and ports 15-14 to 15-

15step-by-step instructions 15-16 to 15-18

Create Script command 14-7 to 14-14displaying the window 14-8errors generated by 14-22 to 14-23message box 14-10options 14-9 to 14-10push buttons 14-11step-by-step instructions 14-11 to 14-14

Customize mode 4-3and Setup mode 4-1 to 4-3configuration area in 4-12 to 4-14main window in 4-4 to 4-14

Ddata_bits parameter 19-38daylight_savings parameter 19-38dedicated_arguments parameter 19-39dedicated_port parameter 19-39def_session_mode parameter 19-39default_image_name parameter 19-40default_zone_list parameter 19-40demand_dial parameter 19-40DHCP box 6-6DHCP_broadcast parameter 19-40dialup_addresses parameter 19-41disabled_modules parameter 19-42Discover Annexes/Network command

displaying the window 17-50 to 17-51finding on a network 17-52 to 17-53understanding the window 17-51


Index

Discover Annexes/Search Device commanddiscovering Annexes 17-48displaying the window 17-44push buttons 17-47understanding the window 17-45 to 17-

47updating and saving discovery lists 17-

49 to 17-50do_compression parameter 19-42documentation conventions xxidocumentation overview xvii to xixdtr_signal parameter 19-43DVS Status command 17-39 to 17-42

displaying the window 17-39 to 17-40push buttons 17-42step-by-step instructions 17-42understanding the GRE information

box 17-40 to 17-41understanding the tunnel information

box 17-41 to 17-42understanding the window 17-40 to 17-

42

Eecho parameter 19-43Edit Async Ports (continued) window 7-4Edit Async Ports window 7-4enable_security parameter 19-43environment variables

DISPLAY 1-8GUI_AM_DIR 1-8PATH 1-8setting 1-8

erase_char parameter 19-44erase_line parameter 19-44erase_word parameter 19-44errors

in script commands 14-22 to 14-24in Set and Show commands 13-16 to 13-

17reading from message boxes 2-23

reading from output boxes 2-24See also troubleshooting

Execute Script command 14-16 to 14-24displaying the window 14-16 to 14-17errors generated by 14-23list box 14-17message box 14-18push buttons 14-18step-by-step instructions 14-19 to 14-21text field 14-17

Ffacility_num parameter 19-44File Selection window 3-7 to 3-9

editing files saved in 3-9push buttons 3-9understanding the format 3-8

forward_key parameter 19-44forwarding_count parameter 19-45forwarding_timer parameter 19-45

Ggroup_value parameter 19-45

Hhardware_tabs parameter 19-46Help windows 3-14 to 3-20

changing default value displaysSee Site Parameters command

displaying 3-14 to 3-17help for a command or parameter 3-16 to

3-17help for a field, box, or button 3-15push buttons 3-18saving contents of 3-19 to 3-20understanding formats of 3-18

host_table_size parameter 19-46

Iimage_name parameter 19-46


Index

imask_7bits parameter 19-46inactivity_timer parameter 19-47inet_addr parameter 19-47input_buffer_size parameter 19-47input_flow_control parameter 19-48input_is_activity parameter 19-48input_start_char parameter 19-48input_stop_char parameter 19-49installing Annex Manager 1-1 to 1-7

delivery media 1-1software platforms supported 1-1

Interface Status command 17-11 to 17-14displaying the window 17-11 to 17-12general information box 17-12 to 17-13push buttons 17-14statistics box 17-13understanding the window 17-12 to 17-

14introduction to Annex Manager xxiii to xxvii

environment xxvfeatures xxiii to xxivmemory requirements xxviplatforms supported xxvisystem requirements xxvi

ip_forward_broadcast parameter 19-49ipencap_type parameter 19-49ipso_class parameter 19-49ipx_do_checksum parameter 19-50ipx_dump_password parameter 19-50ipx_dump_path parameter 19-50ipx_dump_username parameter 19-50ipx_file_server parameter 19-50ipx_frame_type parameter 19-51ipx_security parameter 19-51ixany_flow_control parameter 19-51

Kkeep_alive_timer parameter 19-51keyboard commands. See window manage-

ment

Llat_key parameter 19-51lat_multicast_timer parameter 19-52lat_queue_max parameter 19-52lat_sys_location parameter 19-52latb_enable parameter 19-52line_erase parameter 19-53list boxes. See listslists 2-19 to 2-22

deselecting items in 2-22selecting items in 2-19 to 2-21See also Annex lists

load_broadcast parameter 19-53load_dump_gateway parameter 19-53load_dump_sequence parameter 19-54local_address parameter 19-54location parameter 19-54lock_enable parameter 19-54long_break parameter 19-55loose_source_route parameter 19-55

Mmain window 4-1 to 4-22

annotated examples of 2-2, 4-3map parameter 19-56map_to_lower parameter 19-56map_to_upper parameter 19-57max_modem_calls parameter 19-57max_vcli parameter 19-57menus, overview of 3-3 to 3-5message boxes 2-23metric parameter 19-58min_unique_hostnames parameter 19-58mode parameter 19-58modem_type parameter 19-60mop_login_password parameter 19-60mop_login_prompt parameter 19-60mop_login_timer parameter 19-61mop_password parameter 19-61mop_pref_host parameter 19-61, 19-62


Index

motd_file parameter 19-61mouse usage. See window managementmultisession parameter 19-62

Nname_server_1 parameter 19-62name_server_2 parameter 19-62nameserver_broadcast parameter 19-62need_dsr parameter 19-63net_inactivity parameter 19-63net_inactivity_units parameter 19-63network_turnaround parameter 19-64newline_terminal parameter 19-64node_id parameter 19-64

OOpen Annex List command 4-16 to 4-17option buttons 2-16option_key parameter 19-65output boxes 2-24output_flow_ control parameter 19-65output_is_activity parameter 19-65output_start_char parameter 19-66output_stop_char parameter 19-66output_ttl parameter 19-66

Pparameter groups 12-1 to 12-9

creating 12-3 to 12-8modifying user-defined groups 12-8predefined, list of 12-1 to 12-2User Defined Parameter Groups

command 12-3 to 12-9parameter types

displaying 12-5parameters

changing values of 4-14displaying values of 4-14selecting 4-12 to 4-14See also individual parameter names

parity parameter 19-66

password parameter 19-67phone_number parameter 19-67port_modem_config parameter 19-67port_multisession parameter 19-70port_password parameter 19-70port_server_ security parameter 19-71port_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-71port_type parameter 19-71port_user_name parameter 19-71possword_limit parameter 19-67ppp_acm parameter 19-72ppp_ipx_network parameter 19-72ppp_ipx_node parameter 19-72ppp_mru 19-72ppp_ncp parameter 19-73ppp_password_remote parameter 19-73ppp_security_protocol parameter 19-73ppp_username_remote parameter 19-74pref_DHCP1_addr parameter 19-74pref_DHCP2_addr parameter 19-74pref_dump_addr parameter 19-75pref_load_addr parameter 19-75pref_name1_addr parameter 19-75pref_name2_addr 19-75pref_secure1_host parameter 19-76PRI Channels Status command 17-15 to 17-

20async and sync boxes 17-18displaying the window 17-15 to 17-16entering channel information 17-17push buttons 17-19step-by-step instructions 17-19understanding the window 17-16 to 17-

18PRI Internal CSU Status command 17-20 to

17-28alarms box 17-23displaying the window 17-20 to 17-21entering interval information 17-22interval errored seconds box 17-26interval errors box 17-25


Index

push buttons 17-27status box 17-24step-by-step instructions 17-27understanding the window 17-21 to 17-

26PRI Internal Modems command 16-19 to 16-

22displaying the window 16-19push buttons 16-22step-by-step instructions 16-22understanding the window 16-20

pri_analog_encoding parameter 19-76, 19-78

pri_block_in_calls parameter 19-76pri_block_out_calls parameter 19-76pri_dsx1_line_length parameter 19-77pri_ip_addr parameter 19-77pri_ipx_network partameter 19-77pri_ipx_node parameter 19-77pri_switch_type parameter 19-78printer_crlf parameter 19-78printer_hardware_tabs parameter 19-78printer_host parameter 19-78printer_map_to_upper parameter 19-79printer_name parameter 19-79printer_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-79printer_type parameter 19-79printer_width parameter 19-80prompt parameter 19-80ps_history_buffer parameter 19-81push buttons 2-16

Rradio buttons 2-17redisplay_line parameter 19-81remote_address parameter 19-81Reset command 16-9 to 16-15

displaying the window 16-10entering port information 16-13push buttons 16-13step-by-step instructions 16-14 to 16-15

understanding the window 16-11 to 16-13

Reset Parameters window 3-12reset_idle_time_on parameter 19-81retrans_limit parameter 19-82ring parameter 19-82rip_accept parameter 19-82rip_advertise parameter 19-82rip_auth parameter 19-83rip_default_route parameter 19-83rip_horizon parameter 19-83rip_next_hop parameter 19-83rip_recv_version parameter 19-84rip_routers 19-84rip_send_version parameter 19-84rip_sub_accept parameter 19-84rip_sub_advertise parameter 19-85routed parameter 19-85rts_signal parameter 19-85running Annex Manager 1-12rwhod parameter 19-86

SSave Annex List command 4-15 to 4-16scripts 14-1 to 14-24

editing 14-15See also View Script command, Create

Scriptcommand, Execute Script com-mand

security_broadcast parameter 19-86server_capability parameter 19-86server_name parameter 19-87service_limit parameter 19-87session_limit_annex parameter 19-87session_limit_port parameter 19-87Set command 13-7 to 13-15

changing parameter values 13-12 to 13-15

displaying the window 13-7errors generated by 13-16 to 13-17


Index

message box 13-11prerequisites for using 13-1push buttons 13-11specifying ports 13-9work area 13-10

Setup mode 5-1and Customize mode 4-1 to 4-3, 5-1AppleTalk window 11-1 to 11-2Async Ports windows 7-1 to 7-18confirmation windows 5-9displaying the windows 5-4 to 5-6Edit Modem window 9-1 to 9-4General windows 6-1 to 6-10IP window 11-3 to 11-5IPX window 11-6 to 11-7LAT window 11-8 to 11-10modem definitions 9-1 to 9-9push buttons 5-7 to 5-8Security window 10-1 to 10-4understanding the window fields 5-6understanding the windows 5-3

short_break parameter 19-88Show command 13-2 to 13-6

controlling amount of output from 13-4displaying parameter values 13-6displaying the window 13-2errors generated by 13-16 to 13-17output box 13-5prerequisites for using 13-1push buttons 13-6specifying ports 13-4verbose output button 13-4

sigproto parameter 19-88Site Parameters command 3-20 to 3-24

choosing lists and parameters 3-22default value area 3-22displaying the window 3-21push buttons 3-23step-by-step instructions 3-23understanding the window 3-21

sizing a window. See window management

slip_allow_dump parameter 19-88slip_load_dump_host parameter 19-88slip_mtu_size parameter 19-88slip_no_icmp parameter 19-89slip_ppp_security parameter 19-89slip_subnet_mask parameter 19-89slip_tos parameter 19-89SNMP Information command 4-18 to 4-22

check buttons 4-21community string field 4-20displaying the window 4-19push buttons 4-21retries field 4-20step-by-step instructions 4-22text fields 4-20timeout field 4-20understanding the window 4-20 to 4-21

SNMP protocol 18-1 to 18-15agents 18-3Annex restrictions on standard MIBs 18-

8 to 18-15AppleTalk MIB restrictions 18-15Character MIB restrictions 18-10configuring the Annex for 18-4 to 18-5defining allow_snmp_sets 18-5defining disabled_modules 18-5defining the community string 18-4DS1 MIB restrictions 18-16Ethernet MIB restrictions 18-10management stations 18-2message delivery 18-3MIB object hierarchy 18-6MIB-II restrictions 18-9MIBs supported by the Annex 18-5 to 18-

15object names and syntaxes 18-6overview 18-1 to 18-3parallel printer MIB restrictions 18-13RIPv2 MIB restrictions 18-14RS-232 MIB restrictions 18-12setting port speed 18-13


Index

traps and trap hosts 18-7speed parameter 19-90status

reading from message boxes 2-23reading from output boxes 2-24See also Annex Status, Async Port Sta-

tus, and Interface Status com-mands

stop_bits parameter 19-90subnet_mask parameter 19-90SunNet Manager

linking 1-8sys_location parameter 19-91sysContact parameter 19-90sysLocation parameter 19-91syslog_facility parameter 19-91syslog_host parameter 19-91syslog_mask parameter 19-92syslog_port parameter 19-92sysName parameter 19-91

TT1 Internal CSU Status command 17-28 to

17-35alarms box 17-31displaying the window 17-28 to 17-29entering interval information 17-30interval information box 17-33 to 17-34push buttons 17-34status box 17-32 to 17-33understanding the window 17-29 to 17-

34T1 Modem Calls Status command 17-35 to

17-38displaying the window 17-36push buttons 17-38understanding the window 17-37

T1/PRI Line window 8-13 to 8-15t1_info parameter 19-93tcp_keepalive parameter 19-93tdi 19-94

tdi_distance parameter 19-93tdi_framing parameter 19-93tdi_line_code 19-94telnet_crlf parameter 19-94telnet_escape parameter 19-94term_var parameter 19-94tftp_dump_name parameter 19-95tftp_load_dir parameter 19-95Ti Internal CSU command

17-35time_broadcast parameter 19-95time_server_addr parameter 19-96timezone_minuteswest parameter 19-96tmux_delay parameter 19-96tmux_enable parameter 19-97tmux_max_host parameter 19-97tmux_max_mpx parameter 19-97tni_circuit_id 19-97tni_clock parameter 19-98tni_esf_fdl parameter 19-98tni_framing parameter 19-98tni_line_buildout 19-99tni_line_buildout parameter 19-98tni_line_code parameter 19-99tni_loop_bak_config parameter 19-99tni_ones_density parameter 19-99toggle_output parameter 19-100troubleshooting 20-1 to 20-4

"parameter does not exist" message 20-4

Annex Manager slow to start 20-1Annex not reachable 20-1 to 20-2problems saving parameters 20-4Set command not usable 20-3

UUser Defined Parameter Groups command.

See parameter groups

Vvci_autobaud parameter 19-100


Index

vci_login_port_ password 19-100vci_login_timeout parameter 19-100vcli_groups parameter 19-101vcli_password parameter 19-101vcli_security parameter 19-101verbose output button 13-4View Script command 14-1 to 14-6

displaying the window 14-3list box 14-5message box 14-5push buttons 14-6step-by-step instructions 14-6text field 14-5

Viewing 17-35

WWarning windows 3-13window management 2-1 to 2-24

check buttons 2-18icons 2-8 to 2-9keyboard commands 2-5list boxes 2-19 to 2-22lowering a window 2-14message boxes 2-23mouse usage 2-4moving a window 2-13option buttons 2-16output boxes 2-24overview of 2-2 to 2-4push buttons 2-16radio buttons 2-17scrolling 2-10 to 2-11sizing a window 2-7 to 2-8, 2-14

Zzone parameter 19-102


annex manager

Documents